Service Manual Bizhub 501
Service Manual Bizhub 501
Service Manual Bizhub 501
501/421/361
2008.05
Ver. 1.0
THEORY OF OPERATION TOTAL CONTENTS
DF-613
OUTLINE ....................................................................................................................... 1
COMPOSITION/OPERATION ....................................................................................... 5
* For particulars, see the contents of DF-613.
PC-206
OUTLINE ....................................................................................................................... 1
COMPOSITION/OPERATION ....................................................................................... 3
* For particulars, see the contents of PC-206.
PC-407
OUTLINE ........................................................................................................................ 1
COMPOSITION/OPERATION ....................................................................................... 3
* For particulars, see the contents of PC-407.
LU-203
OUTLINE ........................................................................................................................ 1
COMPOSITION/OPERATION ........................................................................................ 3
* For particulars, see the contents of LU-203.
i
FS-522/PU-501/OT-602
OUTLINE ....................................................................................................................... 1
COMPOSITION/OPERATION ....................................................................................... 9
* For particulars, see the contents of FS-522/PU-501/OT-602.
FS-523/RU-507
OUTLINE ....................................................................................................................... 1
COMPOSITION/OPERATION........................................................................................ 7
* For particulars, see the contents of FS-523/RU-507.
SD-507
OUTLINE ....................................................................................................................... 1
COMPOSITION/OPERATION ....................................................................................... 3
* For particulars, see the contents of SD-507.
MT-502
OUTLINE ........................................................................................................................ 1
COMPOSITION/OPERATION ....................................................................................... 3
* For particulars, see the contents of MT-502.
JS-502
OUTLINE ....................................................................................................................... 1
COMPOSITION/OPERATION ....................................................................................... 3
* For particulars, see the contents of JS-502.
ii
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
IMPORTANT NOTICE
Because of possible hazards to an inexperienced person servicing this product as well as
the risk of damage to the product, Konica Minolta Business Technologies, INC. (hereafter
called the KMBT) strongly recommends that all servicing be performed only by KMBT-
trained service technicians.
Changes may have been made to this product to improve its performance after this Service
Manual was printed. Accordingly, KMBT does not warrant, either explicitly or implicitly, that
the information contained in this Service Manual is complete and accurate.
The user of this Service Manual must assume all risks of personal injury and/or damage to
the product while servicing the product for which this Service Manual is intended.
Therefore, this Service Manual must be carefully read before doing service work both in the
course of technical training and even after that, for performing maintenance and control of
the product properly.
Keep this Service Manual also for future service.
Symbols used for safety and important warning items are defined as follows:
S-1
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
SAFETY WARNINGS
[1] MODIFICATIONS NOT AUTHORIZED BY KONICA MINOLTA
BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
Konica Minolta brand products are renowned for their high reliability. This reliability is
achieved through high-quality design and a solid service network.
Product design is a highly complicated and delicate process where numerous mechanical,
physical, and electrical aspects have to be taken into consideration, with the aim of arriving
at proper tolerances and safety factors. For this reason, unauthorized modifications involve
a high risk of degradation in performance and safety. Such modifications are therefore
strictly prohibited. The points listed below are not exhaustive, but they illustrate the reason-
ing behind this policy.
Prohibited Actions
DANGER
• Using any cables or power cord not specified by KMBT.
S-2
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
WARNING
• Use power supply cord set which meets the following
criteria:
AC230V
- provided with a plug having configuration intended for
the connection to wall outlet appropriate for the prod-
uct's rated voltage and current, and
- the plug has pin/terminal(s) for grounding, and
- provided with three-conductor cable having enough cur-
rent capacity, and
AC208V 240V
- the cord set meets regulatory requirements for the area.
Use of inadequate cord set leads to fire or electric shock.
• Attach power plug which meets the following criteria:
- having configuration intended for the connection to wall
outlet appropriate for the product's rated voltage and
current, and
- the plug has pin/terminal(s) for grounding, and
- meets regulatory requirements for the area.
Use of inadequate cord set leads to the product connect-
ing to inadequate power supply (voltage, current capacity,
grounding), and may result in fire or electric shock.
S-3
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
1. Power Supply
WARNING
• Check that mains voltage is as specified.
Connection to wrong voltage supply may result in fire or
electric shock. ?V
• Plug the power cord into the dedicated wall outlet with a
capacity greater than the maximum power consumption.
If excessive current flows in the wall outlet, fire may
result.
S-4
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
WARNING
• Check whether the product is grounded properly.
If current leakage occurs in an ungrounded product, you
may suffer electric shock while operating the product.
Connect power plug to grounded wall outlet.
WARNING
• When using the power cord set (inlet type) that came with
this product, make sure the connector is securely inserted
in the inlet of the product.
When securing measure is provided, secure the cord with
the fixture properly.
If the power cord (inlet type) is not connected to the prod-
uct securely, a contact problem may lead to increased
resistance, overheating, and risk of fire.
S-5
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
WARNING
• Check whether dust is collected around the power plug
and wall outlet.
Using the power plug and wall outlet without removing
dust may result in fire.
• Do not insert the power plug into the wall outlet with a wet
hand.
The risk of electric shock exists.
• When unplugging the power cord, grasp the plug, not the
cable.
The cable may be broken, leading to a risk of fire and
electric shock.
Wiring
WARNING
• Never use multi-plug adapters to plug multiple power cords
in the same outlet.
If used, the risk of fire exists.
S-6
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
2. Installation Requirements
WARNING
• Do not place the product near flammable materials or vola-
tile materials that may catch fire.
A risk of fire exists.
WARNING
• When the product is not used over an extended period of
time (holidays, etc.), switch it off and unplug the power
cord.
Dust collected around the power plug and outlet may
cause fire.
Ventilation
CAUTION
• The product generates ozone gas during operation, but it
will not be harmful to the human body.
If a bad smell of ozone is present in the following cases,
ventilate the room.
a. When the product is used in a poorly ventilated room
b. When taking a lot of copies
c. When using multiple products at the same time
Fixing
CAUTION
• Be sure to lock the caster stoppers.
In the case of an earthquake and so on, the product may
slide, leading to a injury.
S-7
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
3. Servicing
CAUTION
• Before conducting an inspection, read all relevant docu-
mentation (service manual, technical notices, etc.) and
proceed with the inspection following the prescribed pro-
cedure in safety clothes, using only the prescribed tools.
Do not make any adjustment not described in the docu-
mentation.
If the prescribed procedure or tool is not used, the prod-
uct may break and a risk of injury or fire exists.
WARNING
• Take every care when making adjustments or performing
an operation check with the product powered.
If you make adjustments or perform an operation check
with the external cover detached, you may touch live or
high-voltage parts or you may be caught in moving gears
or the timing belt, leading to a risk of injury.
S-8
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
Safety Checkpoints
WARNING
• When taking a report of problems from a user, check each
part and repair properly.
A risk of product trouble, injury, and fire exists.
• Check the exterior and frame for edges, burrs, and other
damages.
The user or CE may be injured.
• Do not allow any metal parts such as clips, staples, and
screws to fall into the product.
They can short internal circuits and cause electric shock
or fire.
S-9
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
Safety Checkpoints
WARNING
• When replacing a lithium battery, replace it with a new lith-
ium battery specified in the Parts Guide Manual. Dispose
of the used lithium battery using the method specified by
local authority.
Improper replacement can cause explosion.
• Make sure the wiring cannot come into contact with sharp
edges, burrs, or other pointed parts.
Current can leak, leading to a risk of electric shock or
fire.
• Make sure that all screws, components, wiring, connec-
tors, etc. that were removed for safety check and mainte-
nance have been reinstalled in the original location. (Pay
special attention to forgotten connectors, pinched cables,
forgotten screws, etc.)
A risk of product trouble, electric shock, and fire exists.
Handling of Consumables
WARNING
• Toner and developer are not harmful substances, but care
must be taken not to breathe excessive amounts or let the
substances come into contact with eyes, etc. It may be
stimulative.
If the substances get in the eye, rinse with plenty of water
immediately. When symptoms are noticeable, consult a
physician.
S-10
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
Handling of Consumables
WARNING
• Never throw the used cartridge and toner into fire.
You may be burned due to dust explosion.
CAUTION
• Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
Isopropyl alcohol and acetone are highly flammable and
must be handled with care. A risk of fire exists.
4. Fuse
Fuse
CAUTION
• CAUTION
Double pole / neutral fusing
• ATTENTION
Double pôle / Fusible sur le neutre
S-11
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
S-12
SAFETY INFORMATION
SAFETY INFORMATION
IMPORTANT NOTICE
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Admin-
istration implemented regulations for laser products manufactured since August 1, 1976.
Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the United States.
This copier is certified as a "Class 1" laser product under the U.S.
Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation Performance Standard
according to the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968. Since radiation emit-
ted inside this copier is completely confined within protective housings and external covers,
the laser beam cannot escape during any phase of normal user operation.
S-13
SAFETY INFORMATION
Finisher FS-522
50gap0e001nb
S-14
SAFETY INFORMATION
FS-523
50gap0e002nb
CAUTION:
• You may be burned or injured if you touch any area that you are advised by any
caution label to keep yourself away from. Do not remove caution labels. And also,
when the caution label is peeled off or soiled and cannot be seen clearly, replace
it with a new caution label.
S-15
MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT
S-16
Legal restrictions on copying
Certain types of originals must never be copied with the purpose or intent to pass copies of
such originals off as the originals.
The following is not a complete list, but is meant to be used as a guide to responsible copy-
ing.
<Financial Instruments>
• Personal checks
• Traveler’s checks
• Money orders
• Certificates of deposit
• Bonds or other certificates of indebtedness
• Stock certificates
<Legal Originals>
• Food stamps
• Postage stamps (canceled or uncanceled)
• Checks or drafts drawn by government agencies
• Internal revenue stamps (canceled or uncanceled)
• Passports
• Immigration papers
• Motor vehicle licenses and titles
• House and property titles and deeds
<General>
• Identification cards, badges, or insignias
• Copyrighted works without permission of the copyright owner
Detail
In order to prohibit the illegal reproduction of certain originals, such as paper currency, this
machine is equipped with a counterfeit prevention feature.
Due to the counterfeit prevention feature that this machine is equipped with, images may be
distorted.
C-1
Composition of the service manual
This service manual consists of the following sections and chapters:
This section gives, as information required by the CE at the site (or at the customer's
premise), a rough outline of the service schedule and its details, maintenance steps, the
object and role of each adjustment, error codes and supplementary information.
The details of items with an asterisk "*" are described only in the service manual of
the main body.
C-2
Notation of the service manual
A. Product name
In this manual, each of the products is described as follows:
B. Brand name
The company names and product names mentioned in this manual are the brand name or
the registered trademark of each company.
C-3
Classification Load symbol Ex. of signal name Description
24V Power to drive the motor
CONT Drive signal
DRV1
Motor M
DRV2
Drive signals of two kinds
D1
D2
_U
_V
_W
Drive signals (control signals) of three kinds
DRV1
DRV2
DRV3
D1
D2
D3
D4
DRV A
DRV A
DRV B Drive signals (control signals) of four kinds
DRV B Motor, phases A and B control signals
A
Motor M /A
B
/B
AB
BB
CLK, PLL PLL control signal
LCK, Lock, LD PLL lock signal
FR Forward/reverse rotation signal
EM, Lock, LCK, LD Motor lock abnormality
BLK Drive brake signal
P/S Power/stop
S/S
Operating load start/stop signal
SS
CW/CCW, F/R Rotational direction switching signal
ENB Effective signal
TEMP_ER Motor temperature abnormality detection signal
24V Power to drive the fan motor
CONT, DRIVE Drive signal
Fan FM
HL Speed control signal (2 speeds)
EM, Lock, LCK, FEM Detection signal
Others TH1.S, ANG Analog signal
C-4
Classification Load symbol Ex. of signal name Description
SG, S.GND, S_GND Signal ground
Ground
PG, P.GND Power ground
DCD Data carrier detection
SIN Serial input
SOUT Serial output
DTR Data terminal operation available
GND Signal ground (earth)
Serial com-
DSR, DSET Data set ready
munication
RTS Transmission request signal
CTS Consent transmission signal
RI Ring indicator
TXD Serial transmission data
RXD Serial reception data
<Example>
C-5
Blank Page
C-6
SERVICE MANUAL Theory of Operation
501/421/361
Main body
2008.05
Ver. 1.0
Revision history
After publication of this service manual, the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for
improvement of their performance.
Therefore, the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine.
When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual, a revised version will be
issued with a revision mark added as required.
Revision mark:
• To indicate clearly a section revised, 1 is shown at the left margin of the revised section.
The number inside 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made.
• To indicate clearly a page that contains the revision, 1 is shown near the page number of the
corresponding page.
The number inside 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made.
NOTE
Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 3.0 only are shown with those for Ver. 2.0 deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has not been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 2.0 are left as they are.
CONTENTS
bizhub 501/421/361
bizhub 501/421/361
OUTLINE
1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
3. UNIT CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
4. PAPER PATH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
COMPOSITION/OPERATION
5. OVERALL CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
5.1 Time chart when the power is turned ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
5.2 Control block diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
6. SCANNER SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
6.1 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
6.2 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
6.3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
6.3.1 Scan/exposure lamp control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
6.3.2 Original size detection control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
6.3.3 AE control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
6.3.4 Image processing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
7. WRITE SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
7.1 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
7.2 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
7.2.1 Laser beam path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
7.2.2 Write control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
7.2.3 Image stabilization control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
7.2.4 Image processing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
8. PHOTO CONDUCTOR SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
8.1 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
8.2 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
8.2.1 Drum drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
8.2.2 Drum claw drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
8.3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
8.3.1 Image creation control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
8.3.2 Drum claw control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
8.3.3 Image stabilization control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
9. CHARGING SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
9.1 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
9.2 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
9.2.1 Charging control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
9.2.2 Erase lamp (EL) control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
10. TRANSFER/SEPARATION SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
10.1 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
10.2 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
10.2.1 Transfer guide control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
10.2.2 Transfer/separation control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
i
CONTENTS Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
ii
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 CONTENTS
16.3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
bizhub 501/421/361
16.3.1 Loop control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
17. ADU SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
17.1 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
17.2 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
17.3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
17.3.1 Conveyance path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
17.3.2 Conveyance control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
18. FUSING SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
18.1 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
18.2 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
18.3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
18.3.1 Fusing roller drive control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
18.3.2 Web drive control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
18.3.3 Fusing temperature control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
18.3.4 Fusing roller edge cooling control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
18.3.5 Envelope conveyance mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
18.3.6 Protection against abnormality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
18.3.7 Jam detection control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
19. REVERSE/EXIT SECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
19.1 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
19.2 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
19.3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
19.3.1 Conveyance control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
19.3.2 Reverse control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
20. INTERFACE SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
20.1 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
20.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
21. IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
21.1 Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
21.2 Operation flow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
21.2.1 Image stabilization control flow when the power switch (SW2) is turned ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
21.2.2 Image stabilization control flow while in the print and the idle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
22. IMAGE PROCESSING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
22.1 Image processing in the scanner section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
22.1.1 Shading correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
22.1.2 AE control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
22.1.3 Area discrimination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
22.1.4 Brightness/density conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
22.1.5 Filter/magnification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
22.1.6 Scanner gamma correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
22.1.7 Halftone processing (error diffusion) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
22.1.8 Compression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
22.1.9 Storage of image data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
22.2 Image processing in the write section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
23. OTHERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
23.1 Fan control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
23.1.1 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
23.1.2 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
23.2 Counter control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
iii
CONTENTS Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
iv
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
OUTLINE
bizhub 501/421/361
1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
A. System configuration
[1] [11]
[2] [12]
[3] [13]
[4]
[14]
[27] [5]
[26]
[6]
[25]
[24] [16]
[19]
[22] [20 ]
[23]
[15] [17]
[21]
[14] [18]
50gat1e001nd
1
1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
Note
• Any combination other than those listed below is not available.
2
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
bizhub 501/421/361
A. Type
3
2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
B. Functions
bizhub 501/421/361
4
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
bizhub 501/421/361
Write 600 x 600 dpi
Memory Standard 1024 MB
Additional 1024 MB *1
Interface section RJ45 Ethernet, Serial port (RS232-C), Serial port (USB TypeA x 3),
Serial port (USB TypeB) *2, RJ-11 *3
C. Type of paper
D. Maintenance
5
2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
E. Machine data
bizhub 501/421/361
F. Operating environment
Temperature 10 to 30 °C
Humidity 10 to 80%RH (with no condensation)
Note
• The information herein may be subject to change for improvement without notice.
6
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. UNIT CONFIGURATION
3. UNIT CONFIGURATION
bizhub 501/421/361
[17]
[1]
[2]
[16]
[15] [3]
[14]
[4]
[5]
[13]
[6]
[12]
[7]
[8]
[11]
[9]
[10]
50gat1c002na
7
4. PAPER PATH Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
4. PAPER PATH
bizhub 501/421/361
[1]
[9]
[8]
[7]
[2]
[6]
[3]
[5] [4]
50gat1c003na
8
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 5. OVERALL CONFIGURATION
COMPOSITION/OPERATION
bizhub 501/421/361
5. OVERALL CONFIGURATION
5.1 Time chart when the power is turned ON
Item
Normal
Scanner motor rotation
(M2) Reverse
rotation
Exposure lamp (L1)
Fusing heater lamp /1 (L2)
Fusing heater lamp /2 (L3)
Fusing motor (M11)
Drum motor (M1)
Developing motor (M3)
Polygon motor (M5)
Laser (LDB)
Paper lift motor /1 (M7)
Upper limit sensor /1 (PS6)
Paper lift motor /2 (M8)
Upper limit sensor /2 (PS13)
50gat2e001na
[1] Fusing heater lamps /1 (L2) and /2 (L3) turn [5] Drum motor (M1) turns ON
ON early [6] Dot diameter adjustment starts
[2] Power switch (SW2) turns ON [7] The fusing temperature gets to the pre-
[3] Initial communication between the overall scribed temperature to start the preliminary
control board (OACB) and the printer control rotation for fusing
board (PRCB) [8] Dot diameter adjustment completed
[4] Shading correction [9] Warming up completed
Note
• Each operation varies according to the setting of the software DipSW in the service mode.
• The power is turned ON with DF closed.
• The power is turned ON with the lift plate of the tray down.
9
5. OVERALL CONFIGURATION Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
OACB
SC
Write
Section DF
M FM CL SD PS
PRCB
SDB DCPU HV
M PS
JS LU PC FS, RU
10
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 6. SCANNER SECTION
6. SCANNER SECTION
bizhub 501/421/361
6.1 Composition
CCD unit
Mirror unit (CCDB)
Exposure unit
Shading
correction
plate
50gat2c001na
6.2 Drive
[4]
[3]
[5]
[1]
[2]
50gat2c002na
11
6. SCANNER SECTION Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
6.3 Operation
bizhub 501/421/361
[2] [1]
[3]
[6]
[4]
[5]
50gat2c034na
[2] [1]
[3]
[6]
[4]
[5]
50gat2c035na
12
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 6. SCANNER SECTION
bizhub 501/421/361
For the original read mode, the following two types are available: the platen mode and the DF mode. While in the
platen mode, the exposure unit scans the original for reading. And while in the DF mode, since DF conveys the
original, the exposure unit remains at the prescribed position (DF read position) to read the original.
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
50gat2c037na
[5]
[6]
[7]
50gat2c036na
Note
• When the tray 1 is selected by manual, not by APS, no shading correction is made.
13
6. SCANNER SECTION Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
[4]
[5]
[6]
50gat2c038na
14
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 6. SCANNER SECTION
bizhub 501/421/361
A. Detection method
The original size detection method varies for the DF mode and the platen mode.
(1) DF mode
See DF-613 Service Manual.
*1 No discrimination is made between 81/2 x 14 and 81/2 x 11S. When the size is 81/2 x 14, this is detected as
81/2 x 11S.
B. Detection timing
(1) Platen mode (while in DF closed)
When the APS timing sensor (PS31) turns on while in DF closed, the original size is detected.
15
6. SCANNER SECTION Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
6.3.3 AE control
bizhub 501/421/361
When AE is selected, the density level of the original is detected to adjust it to an appropriate density automati-
cally. The sampling range of the original density in the AE control varies for the platen mode and the DF mode.
[5]
[1]
[7]
[6]
[5]
[2] [2]
[4]
[3]
50gat2c039na
[4]
[1]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[3] [2]
50gat2c040na
16
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 6. SCANNER SECTION
bizhub 501/421/361
The following items are provided for the image processing. For details, See "22. IMAGE PROCESSING".
• AOC (Auto offset control)
• AGC (Auto gain control)
• Shading correction
• AE processing
• Range discrimination
• Brightness/density conversion
• Filter/magnification
• Density gamma (conversion)
• Halftone processing (error diffusion)
• Compression
• Storage of image data
17
7. WRITE SECTION Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
7. WRITE SECTION
bizhub 501/421/361
7.1 Composition
18
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 7. WRITE SECTION
7.2 Operation
bizhub 501/421/361
7.2.1 Laser beam path
[10]
[9]
[8]
[7] [1]
[6]
[2]
[5]
[3]
[4]
50gat2c041na
19
7. WRITE SECTION Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
The following items are provided for the image processing. For details, See "22.2 Image processing in the write
section".
• Rotation/elongation
• PWM
• Frequency conversion
20
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 8. PHOTO CONDUCTOR SECTION
bizhub 501/421/361
8.1 Composition
50gat2c004na
21
8. PHOTO CONDUCTOR SECTION Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
8.2 Drive
bizhub 501/421/361
[1]
[2]
50gat2c005na
[1]
[2]
50gat2c006na
22
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 8. PHOTO CONDUCTOR SECTION
8.3 Operation
bizhub 501/421/361
8.3.1 Image creation control
When the print start signal turns ON [1], various motors turn ON to place each unit in the operating condition. At
the same time, the erase lamp (EL) turns ON to neutralize the drum and the charging corona charges the drum.
A specified period of time after the print start signal turns ON, the developing bias turns ON [2] and then a high
voltage is impressed [3] on the guide plate. When the preparation for image creation is made, an image is cre-
ated on the drum surface by laser irradiation and developing.
A specified period of time after the registration clutch (CL1) turns ON [4], a high voltage is impressed on the
transfer corona [5] and the separation corona [6] to turn ON the transfer exposure lamp (TSL) [8] and the drum
claw solenoid (SD2) [9] sequentially. The ON timing [7] of TSL varies according to the type of paper. And the ON
time period of TSL also varies according to the setting environment. An image created on the drum is transferred
onto paper and then the paper is separated from the drum.
A specified period of time after the registration sensor (PS1) detects the trailing edge of paper and turns OFF
[10], each operation turns OFF. However, some operations turn OFF a specified period of time after PS1 detects
the trailing edge of the last paper and turns OFF [11], or a specified period of time after the fusing exit sensor
(PS3) detects the trailing edge of the last paper and turns OFF [13]. For the charging corona, the developing bias
and the guide plate bias, with the OFF timing [12] by the last paper of the transfer corona used as a starting
point, each of the OFF timing is interlocked.
[13]
[7] [8] [9] [12] 50gat2c103na
[1] Print start signal ON [8] Transfer exposure lamp (TSL) ON (This var-
[2] Developing bias high voltage impressed ies according to the setting environment.)
[3] Guide plate bias high voltage impressed [9] Drum claw solenoid (SD2) ON
[4] Registration clutch (CL1) ON [10] Trailing edge of the 1st paper detected
[5] Transfer corona high voltage impressed [11] Trailing edge of the last paper detected
[6] Separation corona high voltage impressed [12] Transfer of the last paper OFF
[7] Varies according to the type of paper. [13] Trailing edge of the last paper detected
23
8. PHOTO CONDUCTOR SECTION Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
A. Purpose
Two drum claws are employed to prevent paper from winding up around the drum (winding-up jam). The contact
and severance of the drum claws to and from the drum are made by the ON/OFF of the drum claw solenoid
(SD2).
B. Swing operation
To prevent paper from getting stained at specific points and the drum [3] from being damaged, the drum claw [2]
makes a swing operation of about 7 mm against the drum surface.
The drum claw unit [4] is provided with a projection [7]. This projection is pressed by the cam [6] provided on the
gear [5] to push out the drum claw unit backward. When the gear rotates to release the cam, the drum claw unit
is sent back to the original position by the spring [1]. This operation is repeated to swing the drum claw.
24
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 9. CHARGING SECTION
9. CHARGING SECTION
bizhub 501/421/361
9.1 Composition
50gat2c007na
9.2 Operation
9.2.1 Charging control
A. Charging wire
The high voltage unit (HV) pressurizes 24V DC to impress a minus (–) DC voltage on the charging wire for dis-
charge.
Charging output range: –500 to –1100 μA
B. Charging grid
To obtain a uniform charging wire discharge, a minus (–) high voltage is impressed from the high voltage unit (HV)
to the charging grid.
Charging grid voltage output range: –450 to –1090 V
B. Execution timing
The erase lamp (EL) turns ON in synch with the print start signal turning ON. And it turns OFF a specified period
of time after the fusing exit sensor (PS3) detects the trailing edge of the last paper.
25
10. TRANSFER/SEPARATION SECTION Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
10.1 Composition
26
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 10. TRANSFER/SEPARATION SECTION
10.2 Operation
bizhub 501/421/361
10.2.1 Transfer guide control
A. Purpose
To prevent the transfer guide plate from getting stained, a minus (–) DC voltage is impressed from the high volt-
age unit (HV).
Voltage impressed: –500 V
B. Execution timing
The impression of a voltage onto the transfer guide plate is made ON a specified period of time after the devel-
oping bias turns ON. And it turns OFF a specified period of time after the developing bias turns OFF.
B. Separation
For separation, an AC high voltage and a minus (–) DC voltage are employed. The high voltage unit (HV)
impresses a voltage onto the separation wire for discharging.
Separation AC output range: 300 to 1000 μA
Separation DC output range: 0 to –200 μA
B. Execution timing
The transfer exposure lamp (TSL) turns ON a specified period of time after the registration clutch (CL1) turns ON.
And it turns OFF a specified period of time after the registration sensor (PS1) turns OFF.
27
11. DEVELOPING UNIT Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
11.1 Composition
28
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 11. DEVELOPING UNIT
11.2 Drive
bizhub 501/421/361
[6]
[5]
[4]
[1]
[3]
[2]
50gat2c010na
29
11. DEVELOPING UNIT Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
11.3 Operation
bizhub 501/421/361
[1]
[2]
50gat2c043nb
30
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 11. DEVELOPING UNIT
bizhub 501/421/361
A. Purpose
To make toner get easily attached to the drum while in developing, a developing bias is impressed onto the
developing roller [1].
[1]
50gat2c044na
B. Timing
To prevent unnecessary carriers from attaching to the drum, a developing bias turns ON a specified period of
time after the print start signal turns ON, and it turns OFF a specified period of time after charging turns OFF.
31
11. DEVELOPING UNIT Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
A. Purpose
To prevent the splash of toner from the developing roller, the duct [4] is provided at 2 places of the developing
unit [1]. Toner guided into the duct is sucked in by the developing suction fan (FM6) [3] to be collected by the
suction filter /A [2].
[3]
[4]
[2]
[1]
50gat2c045na
32
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 12. TONER SUPPLY SECTION
bizhub 501/421/361
12.1 Composition
Toner bottle
50gat2c011na
33
12. TONER SUPPLY SECTION Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
12.2 Drive
bizhub 501/421/361
[5]
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
50gat2e003na
34
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 12. TONER SUPPLY SECTION
12.3 Operation
bizhub 501/421/361
12.3.1 Toner level detection control
A. Toner level detection control
Toner remaining in the toner hopper is detected by the toner remaining sensor (PZS). When toner remaining in
the hopper is found below the prescribed amount, a toner supply signal is issued to the printer control board
(PRCB). This signal is transmitted to the operation board (OB) through the overall control board (OACB). Accord-
ingly, OB displays a message in LCD on the LCD board (LCDB).
B. Detection timing
• At all times while in printing.
B. While in printing
While in printing, the toner density is detected by the TCR sensor (TCRS). The ON time periods of the toner sup-
ply motor (M4) and the toner solenoid (SD5) are decided according to the output voltage of TCRS to supply
toner from the toner hopper to the developing unit.
35
12. TONER SUPPLY SECTION Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
A. Purpose
To convey toner in the toner bottle to the toner hopper.
B. Operation
The exit [1] of the toner bottle is normally closed. However, by setting the bottle to the toner supply section, the
accordion section is pushed and compressed to let the exit open. A bottle set to the toner supply section
rotates when the toner bottle motor (M10) turns ON. When the toner bottle rotates, toner is conveyed to the exit
of the bottle along the spiral groove engraved on the surface of the toner bottle and flows out into the toner hop-
per.
[1]
D C B A
[2]
D C B
A
50gat2e002na
36
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 13. CLEANING/TONER RECYCLE SECTION
bizhub 501/421/361
13.1 Composition
50gat2c013na
37
13. CLEANING/TONER RECYCLE SECTION Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
13.2 Drive
bizhub 501/421/361
[1]
[2]
[3]
50gat2c014na
38
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 13. CLEANING/TONER RECYCLE SECTION
13.3 Operation
bizhub 501/421/361
13.3.1 Cleaning operation
Toner scraped by the cleaning blade [4] is neutralized by the neutralizing sheet [2], then collected by the collec-
tion paddle [1], and finally guided to the collection screw [5]. At this time, toner remaining on the collection pad-
dle is scraped by the scraper [6].
[5] [6]
[1]
[4]
[3]
[2]
50gat2c047na
B. Execution timing
The collection paddle to be used to collect toner is driven by the drum motor (M1) and the toner collection oper-
ation is made in synch with the ON/OFF of M1.
B. Execution timing
The collection screw is driven by the drum motor (M1) and the toner conveyance operation is made in synch
with the ON/OFF of M1.
39
14. PAPER FEED SECTION (Tray 1/2) Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
14.1 Composition
14.1.1 Tray 1
Pick-up roller
Lift plate Feed roller
Separation roller
Tray 1
50gat2c015na
14.1.2 Tray 2
Feed roller
Lift plate
Separation roller
Tray 2
50gat2c104na
40
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 14. PAPER FEED SECTION (Tray 1/2)
14.2 Drive
bizhub 501/421/361
14.2.1 Paper feed drive
[1]
[13]
[12] [2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[11] [10]
[8]
[9]
50gat2c016na
[3][4]
[1]
[2] 50gat2c017na
41
14. PAPER FEED SECTION (Tray 1/2) Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
14.3 Operation
bizhub 501/421/361
[9][10]
[1]
[4] [5]
C. Operation timing
When the tray is set, the tray set sensors /1 (PS8) and /2 (PS14) turn ON. In this way, the paper lift motors /1
(M7) and /2 (M8) turn ON to raise the lift plate. When the lift plate goes up and the upper most paper that is
loaded turns ON the upper limit sensors /1 (PS6) and /2 (PS13), M7 and M8 turn OFF to stop the up drive oper-
ation.
When the paper feed operation causes PS6 and PS13 to turn OFF from ON while in the print operation, M7 and
M8 turn ON again to raise the lift plate. In this way, when PS6 and PS13 turn ON again, M7 and M8 turn OFF to
stop the up drive operation.
42
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 14. PAPER FEED SECTION (Tray 1/2)
bizhub 501/421/361
A. Paper size detection mechanism
(1) Size detection in the main scan direction
The side guide plate [12] is provided with the size detection actuator [7]. And interlocked with the side guide
plate, this actuator sticks out to the rear side of the tray. The size detection actuator is provided with the 2 lines
of notches, which are detected by the paper size sensors /Fr1 (PS11) [11] and /Rr1 (PS10) [10], or the paper
size sensors /Fr2 (PS17) [3] and /Rr2 (PS16) [4] equipped individually on the rear of the main body. The notches
of the size detection actuator vary for each paper size and the paper size is detected in the main scan direction
by the combination of the ON/OFF of PS10 and PS11, or PS16 and 17.
43
14. PAPER FEED SECTION (Tray 1/2) Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
Paper size Paper size boards /1 (PSB/1), /2 (PSB/2) Paper size sensor Paper size sensor
SW101 SW102 SW103 SW104 /Rr1 (PS10), /Rr2 /Fr1 (PS11), /Fr2
(PS16) (PS17)
B5 ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF
A5S ON/OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
A4 ON/OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF
81/2 x 11 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
81/2 x 11S ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON
B5S OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF
A4S OFF ON/OFF ON ON OFF ON
81/2 x 14 ON ON ON OFF ON ON
B4 ON ON ON OFF ON OFF
A3 ON ON/OFF ON ON ON OFF
44
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 14. PAPER FEED SECTION (Tray 1/2)
bizhub 501/421/361
A. Pick-up mechanism
The pick-up roller [4] is brought up and down mechanically by the lever [6] provided on the rear side of the paper
feed unit. When the tray is set, the lever is pushed by the tray to bring down the pick-up roller. In this way, the
pick-up roller comes in contact with paper to pick it up.
[6]
[1]
[5] [3]
[4] [2]
50gat2c098na
45
14. PAPER FEED SECTION (Tray 1/2) Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
B. Pick-up control
bizhub 501/421/361
46
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 14. PAPER FEED SECTION (Tray 1/2)
C. Separation mechanism
bizhub 501/421/361
The separation roller [5] is pressed against the feed roller [8] by the operating pressure generated by the pres-
sure [2] of the spring [4] and the torque of the torque limiter [3]. This operating pressure of the feed roller, sepa-
ration roller and torque limiter becomes a limit torque to prevent the double feed of paper.
When there is no paper between the separation roller and the feed roller, or when only one sheet of paper is con-
veyed, the operating pressure of the feed roller, the paper and the spring is in excess of the limit torque, and
therefore, the separation roller rotates [6] following the rotation of the feed roller. When two or more sheets of
paper are conveyed between the separation roller and the feed roller, the limit torque is greater than the frictional
force between 2 sheets of paper, and accordingly, the separation roller stops and the lower side paper [7] in
contact with the separation roller is not conveyed.
[8] [1]
[2]
[3]
47
14. PAPER FEED SECTION (Tray 1/2) Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
The paper empty of the tray is detected by the paper empty sensors /1 (PS5) [3] and /2 (PS12) [4]. And to
prompt the supply of paper before paper in the tray runs out completely, the paper near-empty sensors /1 (PS9)
[7] and /2 (PS15) [8] are equipped. The lift drive shaft [2] that brings up the lift plate [5] is provided with the actu-
ator [1] and PS9 and PS15 are turned ON and OFF by this actuator. When a sufficient amount of paper is loaded
on the tray, the actuator turns ON PS9 and PS15. However, when the amount of paper gets reduced and the lift
plate goes up, the actuator turns OFF PS9 and PS15. In this way, it is detected that the paper loaded in the tray
comes near to an end.
[7] [8]
[1]
[2]
[3][4]
[6] [5]
50gat2c050na
48
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 14. PAPER FEED SECTION (Tray 1/2)
bizhub 501/421/361
The front cover [4] of the tray is provided with the paper remaining display window [3], and the paper remaining
in the tray can be checked through this window. The inside of the paper remaining display window is provided
with the display lever [2] which is interlocked with the up/down position of the lift plate [1]. The display lever is red
in color and it is indicated that the more the red portion that can be seen through the paper remaining display
window, the less paper there remains in the tray.
[4] [1]
[3]
[2] 50gat2c053nb
49
15. BYPASS SECTION Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
15.1 Composition
Feed roller
50gat2c019na
50
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 15. BYPASS SECTION
15.2 Drive
bizhub 501/421/361
15.2.1 Paper feed drive
[4]
[1] [2]
[3]
50gat2c018na
[3] [2]
50gat2c020na
51
15. BYPASS SECTION Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
15.3 Operation
bizhub 501/421/361
[2] [1]
[6]
52
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 15. BYPASS SECTION
bizhub 501/421/361
A. Size detection in the main scan direction
According to the position of the guide plate connected to the paper size VR/BP (VR1), the paper size is
detected in the main scan direction.
53
15. BYPASS SECTION Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
A. Pick-up control
When the feed motor (M9) is turned ON by the print start signal [1], the pick-up solenoid /BP (SD1) and the ver-
tical conveyance clutch (CL3) also turn ON a specified period of time after that. When SD1 turns ON, the lift
plate goes up [2] and paper comes into contact with the feed roller. After that, the feed clutch /BP (CL6) turns
ON. Through these operations, the driving force of M9 is transmitted to the feed roller and the vertical convey-
ance roller to conduct the pick-up [3] and the vertical conveyance [4] of the 1st sheet of paper. When paper is
conveyed and the vertical conveyance sensor (PS2) turns ON, CL6 turns OFF to complete the pick-up opera-
tion. However, since CL3 keeps turning ON, paper is conveyed to the registration section by the vertical convey-
ance roller. In this way, when the registration sensor (PS1) turns ON, CL3 turns OFF a specified period of time
after that. The pick-up [6] and the vertical conveyance [8] of the 2nd and succeeding sheets of paper are con-
ducted using the paper feed request signal [5] as a starting point. When the last paper turns ON PS2, SD1 turns
ON to bring down [7] the lift plate.
54
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 15. BYPASS SECTION
B. Separation mechanism
bizhub 501/421/361
The separation roller [7] is pressed against the feed roller [1] by the operating pressure generated by the pres-
sure [4] of the spring [5] and the torque of the torque limiter [6]. This operating pressure of the feed roller, sepa-
ration roller and torque limiter becomes a limit torque to prevent the double feed of paper.
When there is no paper between the separation roller and the feed roller, or when only one sheet of paper is con-
veyed, the operating pressure of the feed roller, the paper and the spring is in excess of the limit torque, and
therefore, the separation roller rotates [3] following the rotation of the feed roller.
When two or more sheets of paper are conveyed between the separation roller and the feed roller, the limit
torque is greater than the frictional force between 2 sheets of paper, and accordingly, the separation roller stops
and the lower side paper [2] in contact with the separation roller is not conveyed.
[8] [1]
[7]
[6]
55
16. REGISTRATION SECTION Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
16.1 Composition
Registration roller
Loop roller
50gat2c021na
56
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 16. REGISTRATION SECTION
16.2 Drive
bizhub 501/421/361
[1]
[6]
[2]
[3]
[5]
[4]
50gat2c022na
57
16. REGISTRATION SECTION Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
16.3 Operation
bizhub 501/421/361
[1]
[13]
[2]
[12]
[3]
[11]
[4]
[10]
[5]
[9]
[6]
[8] [7]
50gat2c055na
58
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 16. REGISTRATION SECTION
B. Registration operation
bizhub 501/421/361
The feed motor (M9) and the loop clutch (CL2) are turned ON by the print start signal [1]. In this way, the driving
force of M9 is transmitted to the loop roller and paper conveyed from each of the paper feed sections is con-
veyed to the registration roller. When the registration sensor (PS1) detects the leading edge of paper and turns
ON [3], CL2 turns OFF a specified period of time after that. At this time, since paper is being conveyed for a
specified period of time after being hit against the registration roller, a loop [4] is formed and a paper skew is cor-
rected.
The print signal [5] turns ON the registration clutch (CL1) to transmit the driving force of M9 to the registration
roller. At this time, CL2 also turns ON to drive the loop roller for a loop assist [7].
When PS1 detects the trailing edge of paper and turns OFF [8], CL1 also turns OFF a specified period of time
after that to complete the registration operation. However, CL2 keeps tuning ON to conduct a loop formation [9]
of the next paper. After that, the same operations are repeated.
When PS1 detects the trailing edge of the last paper and turns OFF [11], M9, CL1 and CL2 also turn OFF a
specified period of time after that to complete a series of registration operations.
[1] Print start signal [8] Detection of the trailing edge of the 1st
[2] Conveyance of the 1st paper paper
[3] Detection of the leading edge of 1st paper [9] Loop formation of the 2nd paper
[4] Loop formation of the 1st paper [10] Print signal for the 2nd paper
[5] Print signal for the 1st paper [11] Detection of the trailing edge of the last
[6] 1st paper registration roller ON paper
[7] Loop assist of the 1st paper, and convey-
ance of 2nd of paper
59
17. ADU SECTION Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
17.1 Composition
Conveyance roller /1
Conveyance roller /2
50gat2c023na
60
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 17. ADU SECTION
17.2 Drive
bizhub 501/421/361
[1] [2]
[3] [4]
[6]
[5] 50gat2c024na
61
17. ADU SECTION Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
17.3 Operation
bizhub 501/421/361
[12]
[1]
[11]
[10] [2]
[9]
[3]
[8]
[7]
[4]
[6]
[5]
50gat2c057na
62
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 17. ADU SECTION
bizhub 501/421/361
When printing two or more sheets of paper in the double sided print mode, the conveyance control in ADU var-
ies according to the length of paper in the sub scan direction. The following 3 control methods are provided for
the conveyance control.
Note
• A figure in the illustration (shown in the square) represents the page number.
50gat2c058na
50gat2c059na
63
17. ADU SECTION Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
out interruption.
50gat2c060na
1
2
50gat2c061na
50gat2c062na
64
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 17. ADU SECTION
bizhub 501/421/361
Note
• A figure in the illustration (shown in the square) represents the page number.
50gat2c063na
50gat2c064na
50gat2c065na
65
17. ADU SECTION Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
50gat2c066na
50gat2c067na
50gat2c068na
50gat2c069na
66
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 17. ADU SECTION
bizhub 501/421/361
image of the 8th page (the back side of the 4th
sheet of paper when the original is double sided)
is printed on the 4th sheet of paper. At this time,
4
the 3rd sheet of paper is standing by on this side
3 8
of the conveyance roller /3.
2
1
6
50gat2c070na
50gat2c071na
67
17. ADU SECTION Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
Note
• A figure in the illustration (shown in the square) represents the page number.
50gat2c072na
50gat2c073na
50gat2c074na
68
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 17. ADU SECTION
bizhub 501/421/361
reverse/exit section and the 2nd sheet of paper is
6 4 conveyed in ADU without interruption. However,
the 1st sheet of paper remains standing by at the
conveyance roller /3.
50gat2c075na
50gat2c076na
50gat2c077na
50gat2c078na
69
17. ADU SECTION Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
50gat2c079na
70
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 18. FUSING SECTION
bizhub 501/421/361
18.1 Composition
Fusing heater
Fusing web lamp /1 (L2) Fusing roller Paper exit roller Decurler roller
18.2 Drive
[1]
[2]
50gat2c026na
71
18. FUSING SECTION Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
18.3 Operation
bizhub 501/421/361
72
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 18. FUSING SECTION
bizhub 501/421/361
The fusing roller is heated by the fusing heater lamps /1 (L2) and /2 (L3). The fusing pressure roller is heated by
the thermal conduction from the fusing roller.
The surface temperature of the fusing roller is detected by the thermistors /1 (TH1) [2] and /2 (TH2) [1]. TH1 and
TH2 monitor the surface temperature of the fusing roller at specified intervals to control the ON/OFF of L2 and
L3 through the AC drive circuit in the DC power supply (DCPS) so that a prescribed temperature can be
obtained.
[1] [2]
50gat2c081na
A. Warm-up
Warm-up is conducted when the main power switch (SW1), the power switch (SW2) and the interlock switch
(MS) turn ON, and also when the system returns from the low power mode or the sleep mode.
While in the warm-up, the fusing heater lamps /1 (L2) and /2 (L3) turn ON. And it turns OFF at the prescribed
temperature. The temperature at which the warm-up completes varies for bizhub 501 and 421/361.
73
18. FUSING SECTION Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
When each key is not pressed within a specified period of time after the completion of the last print, the system
changes into the low power mode or the sleep mode. The starting time for operation can be set individually for
the low power mode and the sleep mode. When the same starting time for operation is set for both modes, the
sleep mode takes precedence over the low power mode.
When the system changes into the low power mode, the ON/OFF of the fusing heater lamps /1 (L2) and /2 (L3)
is controlled so that the fusing roller gets to the prescribed temperature. The controlled temperature at this time
becomes lower than other controlled temperatures. And when the system changes into the sleep mode, the
power supply to L2 and L3 is shut off to put the system in the stand-by condition.
Note
• When the power switch (SW2) turns OFF due to the occurrence of a jam, or when the interlock
switch (MS) is turned OFF by opening ADU, the power supply to each fan is shut off and, even if it
is within a specified period of time, the fan turns OFF. However, when SW2 and MS are turned ON
within a specified period of time, FM2 and FM8 turn ON again.
74
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 18. FUSING SECTION
bizhub 501/421/361
The air inside the machine is sucked in by the fusing cooling fans /Fr (FM2) [6] and /Rr (FM8) [1] to be blown
against the edges of the fusing roller [3] through the ducts [2] and [5]. In this way, the edges of the fusing roller
are cooled down and the surface temperature of the edges of the fusing pressure roller [4] that is in contact also
goes down.
[1]
[2]
[6]
[3]
[4]
[5]
50gat2c082na
[1] Fusing cooling fan /Rr (FM8) [4] Fusing pressure roller
[2] Duct [5] Duct
[3] Fusing roller [6] Fusing cooling fan /Fr (FM2)
[1]
50gat2c083na
75
18. FUSING SECTION Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
When the thermistors /1 (TH1) and /2 (TH2) detects a stipulated temperature (233°C) 5 times at the prescribed
intervals, this is deemed to be a high temperature abnormality and the fusing heater lamps /1 (L2) and /2 (L3) are
turned OFF. The thermostat (TS) also monitors an abnormal temperature rise and, when the detected tempera-
ture gets to 220 ± 10°C, the AC power lines to L2 and L3 are shut off.
For each condition in the warm-up, print, stand-by and the low power modes, the detected temperatures of
TH1 and TH2 and the number of times when L2 and L3 turned ON are calculated. And it is considered that a
low temperature abnormality occurs when certain conditions are met. When a low temperature abnormality
occurs, the power supply to L2 and L3 is cut off.
When these fusing temperature abnormalities occur, the system is placed in the SC latch condition with a mes-
sage shown in the touch panel. After repairing with the cause of abnormality identified, it is necessary to release
the SC latch by the software DipSW3-1 for restoration.
RL1 DCPS
TS
CBR NF
RL2
AC L2
drive
section L3
PRCB
TH1
Control
section
RL RL1
drive
section RL2
TH2
50gat2c084na
76
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 19. REVERSE/EXIT SECTION
bizhub 501/421/361
19.1 Composition
19.2 Drive
[4] [1]
[3] [2]
50gat2c028na
77
19. REVERSE/EXIT SECTION Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
19.3 Operation
bizhub 501/421/361
B. Conveyance path
(1) Paper exit path
The reverse solenoid (SD3) is normally turned OFF and the reverse gate [1] is held in the position in which it
blocks the conveyance path to the reverse roller [4]. In this manner, paper conveyed from the fusing exit roller
(decurler roller) [2] is guided to the main body paper exit roller [3] along the internal form of the reverse gate to be
exited.
[4]
[1]
[3]
[2]
50gat2c085na
78
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 19. REVERSE/EXIT SECTION
bizhub 501/421/361
While in the double sided print, the reverse solenoid (SD3) turns ON when the print on the back side is com-
pleted, and the reverse gate [1] is switched in the direction in which the conveyance path to the reverse roller [4]
is opened. In this way, paper conveyed from the fusing exit roller (decurler roller) [2] is guided to the reverse roller
along the external form of the reverse gate.
[4]
[1]
[3]
[2]
50gat2c086na
79
19. REVERSE/EXIT SECTION Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
A. Switch-back mechanism
While in the double sided print, paper that passes through the reverse gate [3] is conveyed to the outside of the
main body by the reverse roller [5] and then sent back again to the inside of the main body. At this time, the
paper is guided to the conveyance roller /1 [1] side, not to the reverse gate side from the metal frame form of the
conveyance path. In this way, the paper is turned over to be conveyed to the registration section again through
ADU.
The ON/OFF timing of the reverse solenoid (SD3) that drives the reverse gate is controlled by the fusing exit sen-
sor (PS3) [2]. And the switchover between the normal rotation and the reverse rotation of the reverse motor (M6)
that drives the reverse roller is controlled by the reverse sensor (PS27) [4].
[5]
[4]
[1]
[3]
[2]
50gat2c087na
80
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 19. REVERSE/EXIT SECTION
B. Reverse control
bizhub 501/421/361
While in the double sided print, when the fusing exit sensor (PS3) detects the leading edge of paper of which the
printing of the back side has been completed and turns ON [1], the reverse solenoid (SD3) turns ON to switch
the reverse gate a specified period of time after the registration clutch (CL1) turns ON for back side printing. In
this manner, the paper is conveyed to the reverse section. A specified period of time after the reverse sensor
(PS27) detects the leading edge of paper and turns ON [2], the reverse motor (M6) rotates in the normal direc-
tion [3] and the reverse roller conveys the paper to the outside of the main body. And then, a specified period of
time after PS3 detects the trailing edge of the paper and turns OFF [4], SD3 turns OFF [5] to bring the reverse
gate back to its original position. And when PS27 detects the trailing edge of the paper and turns OFF [6], the
rotation of M6 is switched [7] from the normal rotation to the reverse rotation and the reverse roller sends the
paper back to the inside of the main body to convey it to ADU. In this manner, the paper is turned over.
Normal
Reverse motor (M6) rotation
Reverse
rotation
Reverse solenoid (SD3)
[1] Switchover of the reverse gate [5] Return to the reverse gate
[2] Detection of the leading edge of paper [6] Detection of the trailing edge of paper
[3] Normal rotation of the reverse roller ON [7] Switchover of the reverse roller from the nor-
[4] Detection of the trailing edge of paper mal rotation to the reverse rotation
81
20. INTERFACE SECTION Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
20.1 Composition
CF card slot
20.2 Specifications
Item Specifications
Serial port (RS-232C) For CS Remote Care
CF card slot System management for CF card
CF card stored the following pro-
grams and the datas
1. MFP controller program (Firmware)
2. The datas (Utility/Administrator
Setting Data, Destination Storage
Data, CS Remote Care Setting
Data, All History Data) that initial-
ized in the [System 1]-[Initializa-
tion] of the service mode
3. HDD serial number
4. HDD model type
RJ45 Ethernet connector Network connection, Internet for ISW
USB port /1 (USB TypeA) USB ISW, For authentication device
USB port /2 (USB TypeA) (Biometric type: AU-101 or IC card type:
AU-201)
USB port /3 (USB TypeA) Scan to USB, USB for print
USB port /4 (USB TypeB) For the local connection when
installed EK-703 (Option)
Service port For the production adjustment
This is not used in the field
82
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 21. IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL
bizhub 501/421/361
21.1 Outline
This machine employs various image stabilization controls to realize the top quality print image at all times. The
operation of the image stabilization control varies between while in the power switch (SW2) ON and while in the
print.
B. Drum rotation
D. Fusing preliminary rotation
C. Dot diameter adjustment control
Stand-by
83
21. IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
B. Drum rotation
bizhub 501/421/361
(1) Purpose
• Prevent the drum charge leak such as an image flow at high humidity
• When left in the low/normal humidity condition, prevent the uneven density due to the difference in sensitiv-
ity between the section facing the cleaner and the developing of the drum and other sections.
Note
• For bizhub 421/361, since the early morning dot diameter adjustment is not selected by default, no
drum rotation is made.
(2) Method
• Create a dot pattern patch of a fixed density on the drum. The laser PWM at this time is maximum.
• Read this dot pattern patch with the IDC sensor (IDCS) and calculate the difference between the sensor
output and the specified value.
• Determine the correction amount of the laser power based on a value calculated to make corrections of the
laser power.
• Repeat several times the control operations described above.
Note
• For bizhub 421/361, since the early morning dot diameter adjustment is not selected by default, no
execution is made.
Note
• The stipulated temperature at which the fusing preliminary rotation is made varies for bizhub 501
and 421/361.
84
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 21. IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL
bizhub 501/421/361
(1) Purpose
To detect the environmental temperature and humidity to maintain the image quality, feedback is made to vari-
ous controls.
(2) Method
A temperature sensor and a humidity sensor are equipped inside the machine.
85
21. IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
21.2.2 Image stabilization control flow while in the print and the idle
bizhub 501/421/361
The following shows the image stabilization control flow while in the print and the idle.
Every 20 prints
Start of print
End of print
Stand-by
(2) Method
Detect the machine inside humidity with the humidity sensor (HUMS) when turning ON the power switch (SW2)
8 hours or more after turning it OFF.
Calculate the correction amount based on the machine inside humidity detected and the time period during
which the photosensitive material is driven.
Make corrections of the output value of the charging grid and the developing bias based on the correction
amount calculated.
When the time period during which SW2 is turned ON after OFF is less than 8 hours, use the value of the
machine inside humidity detected last time.
86
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 21. IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL
bizhub 501/421/361
(2) Method
• Create a dot pattern patch between images of which more than 20 prints have been run off. The laser PWM
at this time is maximum.
• Read this dot pattern patch with the IDC sensor (IDCS) and calculate the difference between the sensor
output and the specified value.
• Determine the correction amount of the laser power based on a value calculated to make corrections of the
laser power.
• Repeat several times the control operations described above.
87
22. IMAGE PROCESSING Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
A. Shading correction
B. AE control
C. Area discrimination
D. Brightness/density conversion
E. Filter/magnification
H. Compression
88
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 22. IMAGE PROCESSING
bizhub 501/421/361
This is the measure to obtain an even distribution from light of the CCD sensor. The following corrections are
made at the prescribed timing.
a. White correction
The output voltage of each pixel of the CCD sensor when the white reference plate is exposed to the exposure
lamp is stored as the maximum output of the pixel.
b. Black correction
The output voltage of each pixel of the CCD sensor when the exposure lamp is turned off is stored as the mini-
mum output of the pixel.
Conduct calculation to find out what step in this range falls on the image data read from the original based on
the difference between the black and white data for each pixel stored in the steps a. and b. above, and output
the results of the calculation in the 10 bits accuracy.
0V
Black
Width in which the read is made
0
Width in which the read is made Black
50gat2c091nb
89
22. IMAGE PROCESSING Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
22.1.2 AE control
bizhub 501/421/361
Through the AE control, a density suitable for the original density is automatically selected and the copy is made
properly.
A. Sampling area
(1) While in the platen mode
[5]
[1]
[7]
[6]
[5]
[2] [2]
[4]
[3]
50gat2c092na
[4]
[1]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[3] [2]
50gat2c093na
B. Execution timing
• While in the platen print: At the pre-scan before the actual scan when the print or the read starts.
• While in the DF print : At the same time as when the original is read.
90
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 22. IMAGE PROCESSING
bizhub 501/421/361
To make a copy of the original under the correct condition (to make a correct filter processing), check the read
section to see if it is a character or a dot picture, and use the results at the image processing unit at the later
stage.
255
Density
91
22. IMAGE PROCESSING Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
22.1.5 Filter/magnification
bizhub 501/421/361
A. Filter processing
An appropriate filter processing is made according to the type of an original and the magnification selected.
B. Magnification processing
For this machine, the sub scan direction magnification is made by the scan speed of the exposure unit (platen
mode) or by the conveyance speed of the DF (DF mode), and the main scan direction magnification is made by
processing images electrically.
a. There occurs a clearance between data, and this results in a distorted image.
b. The data position does not fall in exactly with the write position.
As shown with dotted lines in the drawing below, when there is no read data that corresponds exactly to the
write position, a density is decided for the write as shown below and appropriate processing is made.
[1] D1 D2 D3 D4 D5
[2] E1 E2 E3 E4 E5
[3] W1 W2 W3 W4 W5 W6 W7 W8
50gat2c095na
92
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 22. IMAGE PROCESSING
bizhub 501/421/361
As shown in drawing below, if the data of each pixel obtained when the original is read by the CCD are D1 to D5,
the positions of the data read when reduced are R1 to R5. They are overlapping each other and do not corre-
spond to the write position. Therefore, a density is decided for the write as shown below and an appropriate
processing is made.
[1] D1 D2 D3 D4 D5
[2] R1 R2 R3 R4 R5
[3] W1 W2 W3 W4 W5
50gat2c096na
255
E2
W2
S
Density
E1
0
0 Position 15 50gat2c097na
93
22. IMAGE PROCESSING Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
To the data obtained after the filter/magnification processing, select a density curve corresponding to the density
button selected on the operation panel. An appropriate density curve is provided for each of the character/pic-
ture/character and the picture/thin character modes.
22.1.8 Compression
To store more image data, data is stored temporarily in the image memory after the images has been com-
pressed.
94
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 22. IMAGE PROCESSING
bizhub 501/421/361
A. Rotation/elongation
B. Frequency conversion
C. PWM
A. Rotation/elongation
Rotate the image in the direction of 90 degrees and 180 degrees as necessary.
When outputting images from the memory, expand the compressed data to restore them to their original state.
B. Frequency conversion
Write in the memory once the data after the PWM conversion and read it in accord with the write clock signal of
the printer.
C. PWM
The period of time the laser is turned ON is changed by changing the pulse width.
95
23. OTHERS Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
23. OTHERS
bizhub 501/421/361
[8]
[7]
[1]
[6]
[2]
[5]
[3]
[4]
50gat2c029nb
[1] Exhaust fan /Rr (FM9) [7] Fusing cooling fan /Fr (FM2)
[2] Exhaust fan /Fr (FM3) [8] Fusing cooling fan /Rr (FM8)
[3] CPU cooling fan (FM11) [9] Power supply cooling fan (FM1)
[4] Conveyance suction fan (FM5) [10] Overall control board cooling fan (FM10)
[5] Drum cooling fan (FM4) [11] Developing cooling fan (FM7)
[6] Developing suction fan (FM6)
96
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 23. OTHERS
23.1.2 Operation
bizhub 501/421/361
A. Power supply cooling fan (FM1) control
(1) Purpose
Cool down the DC power supply (DCPS) and the high voltage unit (HV2) with suction air.
(2) ON timing
• It turns ON a specified period of time after the drum motor (M1) turns ON.
• While in the auto toner supply mode and the TCR adjustment mode, it turns ON in synch with the turn-ON
of M1.
• While in the low power mode and the stand-by condition, it turns ON in synch with the turn-ON of the drum
cooling fan (FM4).
(2) ON timing
• While in the print of small size paper, they turn ON when the fusing exit sensor detects the first job paper .
• While in the print of large size paper, they turn ON when the thermistor /2 (TH2) goes over the prescribed
temperature.
• They turn ON when the print operation is stopped by a jam.
(2) ON timing
• They turn ON in synch with the turn-ON of the drum motor (M1).
97
23. OTHERS Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
(1) Purpose
Cool around the drum and the toner bottle with suction air.
(2) ON timing
• After completion of the print, it turns ON a specified period of time after the drum motor (M1) turns OFF.
• It turns ON when the machine inside temperature goes over the prescribed temperature.
(2) ON timing
• It turns ON in synch with the turn-ON of the drum motor (M1).
• While in the low power mode and the stand-by condition, it turns ON in synch with the turn-ON of the drum
cooling fan (FM4).
(2) ON timing
• It turns ON in synch with the turn-ON of the developing motor (M3).
98
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 23. OTHERS
bizhub 501/421/361
(1) Purpose
Take in fresh air to cool down the developing motor (M3).
(2) ON timing
• After completion of the print, it turns ON a specified period of time after M3 turns OFF.
• While in the auto toner supply mode, it turns ON in synch with the turn-ON of M3.
• It turns ON when the machine inside temperature goes over the prescribed temperature.
(2) ON timing
• It turns ON when the power switch (SW2) turns ON.
(2) ON timing
• It turns ON in synch with the turn-ON of the main power switch (SW1).
99
23. OTHERS Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
23.2.1 Composition
[2] [1]
OB CN936
SDB CN64
3 6 KCT
LCDB
50gat2c030na
100
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 23. OTHERS
23.2.2 Operation
bizhub 501/421/361
A. Paper exit counter
Item Specifications/mechanism
Total counter (TCT) • Display accumulated number of prints in all print modes.
• Counts up by a paper exit signal.
Electronic counter • Display accumulated number of prints on the touch
panel.
• Data collection *1
• Counts up by a paper exit signal.
Key counter (KCT), optional • Counting the designated number of prints allows no fur-
ther copy operation (can be removed).
*1 For data collected, See "10.6 Counter" in Field service bizhub 501/421/361 Main body. (See P.196)
[2] [1]
50gat2c031nb
101
23. OTHERS Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
Connector Pin No. Signal name Description Output timing Type of signal
36 1 M1 signal Output from the start L output while in the Open collec-
key being turned ON print operation tor output
up to the completion of
paper exit
2 Paper feed signal Output each time L output each time
paper is supplied paper is supplied from
each tray
3 Paper size signal (0) Signal output by paper When the paper size is
4 Paper size signal (1) sizes *1 changed
5 Paper size signal (2)
6 Paper size signal (3)
7 Double sided print Signal output while in While in the selection
selection signal the double sided print of the double sided
print
8 CPF signal (0) Signal output by CPF While in the selection
9 CPF signal (1) modes of the CPF mode
10 P.GND Ground — —
102
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 23. OTHERS
bizhub 501/421/361
23.3.1 Parts that operate when the main power switch (SW1) is turned ON
A. Composition
SW2
SW1 PSWB
OB
DCPS
5VDC
IC
12VDC
DCPS
CBR NF OACB FK
section
HD
24VDC SC
PC LU PRCB
50gat2c032na
B. Operation
Turning ON the main power switch (SW1) supplies an AC power source to DC power supply (DCPS).
In this way, each power source of 12V DC and 5V DC is supplied to the overall control board (OACB).
OACB supplies 12V DC and 5V DC to the operation board (OB) to be placed in the condition of standing by for
the turn-ON of the power switch (SW2).
When equipped optionally with the FAX kit (FK-502) and the hard disk (HD-509), each power source of 12V DC
and 5V DC (FK-502) and 5V DC (HD509) is supplied through OACB.
103
23. OTHERS Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
23.3.2 Parts that operate when the power switch (SW2) is turned ON
bizhub 501/421/361
A. Composition
SW2
PSWB
OB
SW1
OACB
24VDC
DCPS
RL1
CBR NF
section
RL2
L2, L3
AC drive
section
DCPS
50gat2c033na
B. Operation
Turning ON the power switch (SW2) transmits an ON signal of SW2 to the overall control board (OACB) through
the operation board (OB). In this way, OACB sends out a control signal to the DC power supply (DCPS) and
DCPS supplies each power source of 12V DC and 5V DC to all boards and optional devices, including the
printer control board (PRCB).
After that, OACB sends out to DCPS a control signal that generates a 24V DC power source, which is supplied
to all drive boards and optional devices. And when the main relay (RL1) and the sub relay (RL2) turn ON, an AC
power source is supplied to the fusing heater lamps /1 (L2) and /2 (L3) to start the initial operation of this
machine.
104
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 23. OTHERS
bizhub 501/421/361
23.4.1 Authentication unit (Biometric type) (AU-101)
• A finger vein pattern is used for personal identification.
• Vein patterns are inside the body and cannot be visually recognized. This makes vein patterns extremely dif-
ficult to forge or falsify. The vein pattern authentication system can provide high security.
• With ultra-red LED radiation, a finger vein pattern is captured by camera and its image is created. The vein
pattern image is registered and a person can be identified if the person's vein pattern matches the regis-
tered one at the time of user authentication.
Ultra-red LED
Finger
Vein image
Camera
Abcde Fgdhi
ABCDE_Co.
Non-contact IC card
105
23. OTHERS Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
bizhub 501/421/361
Blank page
106
SERVICE MANUAL Theory of Operation
DF-613
2008.05
Ver. 1.0
Revision history
After publication of this service manual, the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for
improvement of their performance.
Therefore, the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine.
When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual, a revised version will be
issued with a revision mark added as required.
Revision mark:
• To indicate clearly a section revised, 1 is shown at the left margin of the revised section.
The number inside 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made.
• To indicate clearly a page that contains the revision, 1 is shown near the page number of the
corresponding page.
The number inside 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made.
NOTE
Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 3.0 only are shown with those for Ver. 2.0 deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has not been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 2.0 are left as they are.
CONTENTS
DF-613
DF-613
OUTLINE
1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS ................................................................................1
2. PAPER PATH ...........................................................................................................4
2.1 In 1-sided mode ....................................................................................................4
2.2 In 2-sided mode ....................................................................................................4
COMPOSITION/OPERATION
3. COMPOSITION .......................................................................................................5
4. DRIVE......................................................................................................................6
5. OPERATION............................................................................................................7
5.1 Document pick-up mechanism..............................................................................7
5.1.1 Pick-up operation ..........................................................................................7
5.2 Document feed/conveyance mechanism ..............................................................8
5.3 Raised/lowered position detecting mechanism...................................................12
5.3.1 DF 15° open/close detection mechanism....................................................12
5.3.2 DF open/close detection mechanism ..........................................................12
i
CONTENTS Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
DF-613
Blank Page
ii
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
OUTLINE
1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
DF-613
A. Type
B. Functions
C. Paper type
1-Sided Mode
Standard Mode 35 to 128 g/m2 (9.25 to 34 lbs)
Plain Paper 2-Sided Mode
50 to 128 g/m2 (13.25 to 34 lbs)
Mixed Original Detection
1-Sided / 2-Sided Mode
Type of Document Mode
50 to 128 g/m2 (13.25 to 34 lbs)
Plain Paper
1-Sided Mode
FAX Mode 35 to 128 g/m2 (9.25 to 34 lbs)
Plain Paper 2-Sided Mode
50 to 128 g/m2 (13.25 to 34 lbs)
Inch area
A3, A4S, A4, B4, B5S, B5
Detectable Document 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11S, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 51/2S, 81/2 x 51/2
Size*1 Metric area
A3, A4S, A4, A5S, A5, B4, B5S, B5, B6S
11 x 17, 81/2 x 11S, 81/2 x 11
Capacity 80 sheets (80 g/m2 and load height of 11 mm or less)
*1: For the Combined Original Detection Mode, Refer to the Mixed Original Detection Enabled
Size Combination Table.
1
1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
2
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
DF-613
Reference original (original with a maximum width)
A3 A4 B4S B5 A4S A5 B5S A5
Other A3 U { — — — — — —
originals A4 { U — — — — — —
B4S ~ ~ U { — — — —
B5 ~ ~ { U — — — —
A4S ~ ~ ~ ~ U { — —
A5 ~ ~ ~ ~ { U — —
B5S X X ~ ~ ~ ~ U —
A5S X X X X X X X U
U: Same size {: Same group ~: Different group X: Mix prohibited —: No need to set
For Inch
G. Maintenance
H. Machine data
I. Operating environment
Temperature 10 to 30°C
Humidity 10 to 80% RH (with no condensation)
NOTE
• These specifications are subject to change without notice.
3
2. PAPER PATH Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
2. PAPER PATH
2.1 In 1-sided mode
DF-613
4
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. COMPOSITION
COMPOSITION/OPERATION
3. COMPOSITION
DF-613
Document feed section
5
4. DRIVE Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
4. DRIVE
DF-613
[1]
[2]
16eat2c002na
[1] Original Feed Motor (M1) [2] Original Conveyance Motor (M2)
6
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 5. OPERATION
5. OPERATION
5.1 Document pick-up mechanism
DF-613
• The Document Pick-Up Section consists of the Pick-Up Rollers, Feed Roller and Separation
Roller, and this section is driven by the Original Feed Motor (M1).
[3]
[4]
[2]
[1] 16eat2c003na
7
5. OPERATION Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
rotating forward and, at the same time that the Pickup Roller goes up, drive is then supplied
to the Registration Roller [3].
• When the Original Conveyance Motor (M2) [4] starts rotating forward, the two Conveyance
Rollers [2] and the Exit/Turnover Roller [1] feed the document toward the exit direction.
Direction of
Parts Details
Rotation
Backward The Pickup Rollers lower and start rotating and the Feed
rotation Roller rotates.
M1
Forward
The Registration Roller rotates.
rotation
Backward The Conveyance Roller and Exit/Turnover Roller rotate in
rotation the direction to turn over the original.
M2
Forward The Conveyance Roller and Exit/Turnover Roller rotate in
rotation the direction to feed the original out.
[5]
[1]
[4]
[3]
[2]
16eat2c004na
8
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 5. OPERATION
[4]
DF-613
[1]
1. When the Start key is pressed, the Original Feed Motor (M1) starts rotating backward,
causing the Pick-Up Roller to lower and start a paper take-up sequence.
2. A specified period of time after the leading edge of the original turns ON PS8 [4], the
scanning of the 1st side of the original starts.
3. The original is conveyed for a given period of time after the trailing edge of the last
page of the document has deactivated the PS10 [2]. It is then fed into [1] the Exit Tray
and the Original Conveyance Motor (M2) is deenergized.
9
5. OPERATION Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
A specified period of time after the leading edge of the original turns ON the Original
Detection Sensor (PS8) [4], the scanning of the 1st side of the original starts.
The Original Conveyance Motor (M2) is deenergized to stop [1] the original after the
lapse of a given period of time after the trailing edge of the 1st page has deactivated
the Original Exit Sensor (PS10) [2].
[4]
[1]
2. M2 is turned backward to turn over [3] the original. After the Registration Roller, M2 is
turned forward to allow the Scanner to scan the backside of the 1st page.
3. After the conveyance sequence for turnover has been started, the Pressure Roller
Release Solenoid (SD1) is energized so that the Exit/Turnover Roller is retracted.
[3]
[1]
[2] 16eat2c007na
10
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 5. OPERATION
4. To ensure that pages of the document are in the proper order, the page is turned over
[3] again before being ejected [1] into the Exit Tray.
DF-613
[3]
[1]
[2] 16eat2c008na
11
5. OPERATION Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
• When DF is closed down to about 15° or less, the Original Cover Angle Detection Lever of
the main body is pressed down to turn ON the APS Timing Sensor (PS31).
[1]
a0ret2c001ca
12
SERVICE MANUAL Theory of Operation
PC-206
( 501/421/361 (
2008.05
Ver. 1.0
Revision history
After publication of this service manual, the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for
improvement of their performance.
Therefore, the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine.
When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual, a revised version will be
issued with a revision mark added as required.
Revision mark:
• To indicate clearly a section revised, 1 is shown at the left margin of the revised section.
The number inside 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made.
• To indicate clearly a page that contains the revision, 1 is shown near the page number of the
corresponding page.
The number inside 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made.
NOTE
Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 3.0 only are shown with those for Ver. 2.0 deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has not been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 2.0 are left as they are.
CONTENTS
PC-206
PC-206
OUTLINE
1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS ................................................................................1
2. PAPER PATH ...........................................................................................................2
COMPOSITION/OPERATION
3. COMPOSITION .......................................................................................................3
4. DRIVE......................................................................................................................4
5. OPERATIONS .........................................................................................................5
5.1 Paper Feed Section ..............................................................................................5
5.1.1 Paper feed mechanism..................................................................................5
5.1.2 Paper lifting motion........................................................................................6
5.2 Tray Section ..........................................................................................................7
5.2.1 Paper size detection ......................................................................................7
5.2.2 Paper level indicator mechanism...................................................................8
i
CONTENTS Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
PC-206
Blank Page
ii
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
OUTLINE
1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
PC-206
A. Type
B. Paper type
C. Maintenance
D. Machine specifications
E. Operating environment
NOTE
• The information herein may be subject to change for improvement without notice.
1
2. PAPER PATH Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
2. PAPER PATH
PC-206
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
4061t1c001na
2
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. COMPOSITION
COMPOSITION/OPERATION
3. COMPOSITION
PC-206
Tray 3
Paper Feed
Section
Tray 4 4061t2c001na
3
4. DRIVE Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
4. DRIVE
PC-206
[4] [1]
[3]
[2]
4061t2c002na
[1] Vertical Conveyance Motor /3 (M120) [3] Vertical Conveyance Motor /4 (M121)
[2] Paper Feed Motor /4 (M123) [4] Paper Feed Motor /3 (M122)
4
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 5. OPERATIONS
5. OPERATIONS
5.1 Paper Feed Section
PC-206
5.1.1 Paper feed mechanism
• The Paper Feed Motor (M122, M123) drives the Pick-up Roller [8] and Feed Roller [6] to
take up and feed a sheet of paper into the main body.
• Then, the Vertical Conveyance Motor /3, /4 (M120, M121) transports the paper through the
vertical conveyance section.
• The Pick-up Roller takes up sheet of paper and the Feed Roller and Separation Roller [5]
ensure that only one sheet of paper is separated and fed into the main body.
• When the Tray is slid in, the lever [7] is pushed to lower the Pick-up Roller.
• The Upper Limit Sensor /3, /4 (PS114, PS123) [9] then detects the upper limit position when
the paper lifting plate is raised.
• The Paper Empty Sensor /3, /4 (PS115, PS124) [1] detects when paper in the Tray runs out.
[4] [3]
4061t2c003na
[1] Paper Empty Sensor /3, /4 (PS115, PS124) [6] Feed Roller
[2] Actuator [7] Lever
[3] Pick-up Roller Feed Position [8] Pick-up Roller
[4] Pick-up Roller Home Position [9] Upper Limit Sensor /3, /4 (PS114, PS123)
[5] Separation Roller
5
5. OPERATIONS Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
activated, the Paper Lift Motor /3, /4 (M124, M125) starts rotating to raise the Lifting Plate
[3].
• The paper stack of the Tray pushes up the Pick-up Roller [1]. When the upper limit position
is detected by the Upper Limit Sensor /3, /4 (PS114, PS123) [4], it stops raising the lifting
plate.
• As paper is consumed during the print cycle and the Pick-up Roller is lowered, M124, M125
is energized until PS114, PS123 is blocked again.
A. When the Tray is slid in
1. The lifting plate [3] goes up and the top surface of the paper stack pushes up the roller
[1].
2. The lifting motion stops as soon as the Upper Limit Sensor /3, /4 (PS114, PS123)
detects the upper limit position.
[4] [1]
[1]
4061t2c005na
6
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 5. OPERATIONS
PC-206
• Moving the Sub Scan Direction Restriction Plate of the Tray rotates the Circular Plate [1]
provided on the bottom of the Tray.
• The length of paper in the sub scan direction is detected by the Paper Size Detection Switch
[8] provided on the Paper Size Detect Boards /3 and /4 (PSDB3, PSDB49) [7] that is driven
by the Lever interlocked with the Circular Plate.
• The detection of the length of paper in the main scan direction is made by detecting a notch
on the Lever of the Main Scan Direction Restriction Plate by the Paper Size Sensors /Rr3,
/Fr3 (PS118, PS119) [2] or /Rr4, /Fr4 (PS127, PS128) [3].
• The paper size is determined by the combination of the 4 Paper Size Detection Switches
and the 2 Paper Size Sensors.
• The setting of the Tray is detected by the Tray Set Sensors /3, /4 (PS112, PS121) [6].
[9]
[1] Circular Plate [6] Tray Set Sensor /3, /4 (PS112, PS121)
[2] Paper Size Sensor /Rr3, /Rr4 (PS118, [7] Paper Size Detect Board /3, /4 (PSDB3,
PS127) PSDB4)
[3] Paper Size Sensor /Fr3, /Fr4 (PS119, PS128) [8] Paper Size Detection Switch
[4] Paper Lift Motor /3, /4 (M124, M125) [9] Sub scan direction size detection
[5] Main scan direction size detection
7
5. OPERATIONS Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
• There is a window in the front cover of the Tray that serves as the Paper Level Indicator [3]
showing the amount of paper that is still available for use.
• A red lever [1] is attached to the bottom plate [5] of the Tray and as the lifting plate [4] raises,
the red lever becomes visible in the window.
• The more the red lever is visible, the lesser the amount of paper will be available for use.
[5]
[4] [1]
[3] [2]
4061t2c007nb
8
SERVICE MANUAL Theory of Operation
PC-407
( 501/421/361 (
2008.05
Ver. 1.0
Revision history
After publication of this service manual, the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for
improvement of their performance.
Therefore, the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine.
When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual, a revised version will be
issued with a revision mark added as required.
Revision mark:
• To indicate clearly a section revised, 1 is shown at the left margin of the revised section.
The number inside 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made.
• To indicate clearly a page that contains the revision, 1 is shown near the page number of the
corresponding page.
The number inside 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made.
NOTE
Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 3.0 only are shown with those for Ver. 2.0 deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has not been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 2.0 are left as they are.
CONTENTS
PC-407
PC-407
OUTLINE
1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATION...................................................................................1
2. PAPER PATH ...........................................................................................................2
COMPOSITION/OPERATION
3. COMPOSITION .......................................................................................................3
4. DRIVE......................................................................................................................4
5. OPERATIONS .........................................................................................................5
5.1 Paper Feed Section ..............................................................................................5
5.1.1 Paper feed mechanism..................................................................................5
5.2 Tray Section ..........................................................................................................6
5.2.1 Up/down mechanism.....................................................................................6
5.2.2 Shift Gate drive mechanism ..........................................................................7
5.2.3 Shifter drive mechanism................................................................................8
5.2.4 Paper empty detection ..................................................................................9
i
CONTENTS Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
PC-407
Blank Page
ii
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATION
OUTLINE
1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATION
PC-407
A. Type
B. Paper type
C. Maintenance
D. Machine specifications
E. Operating environment
NOTE
• The information herein may be subject to change for improvement without notice.
1
2. PAPER PATH Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
2. PAPER PATH
PC-407
[1]
[2]
[1] Convey to the main body [4] From the Sub Tray to Main Tray
[2] Tray paper feed [5] Sub Tray
[3] Main Tray
2
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. COMPOSITION
COMPOSITION/OPERATION
3. COMPOSITION
PC-407
Tray Section Paper Feed Section
3
4. DRIVE Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
4. DRIVE
PC-407
[1]
[2]
[6]
[3]
[5] [4]
4061t2c202na
[1] Paper Lift Motor (M5) [6] Shift Gate Drive Section
[2] Paper Lift Drive Section [7] Tray Lock Solenoid (SD1)
[3] Shifter Drive Section [8] Paper Feed Motor (M1)
[4] Shift Motor (M4) [9] Vertical Conveyance Motor (M2)
[5] Shift Gate Motor (M3) [10] Vertical Conveyance Drive Section
4
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 5. OPERATIONS
5. OPERATIONS
5.1 Paper Feed Section
PC-407
5.1.1 Paper feed mechanism
• The Paper Feed Motor (M1) drives the Pick-up Roller [8] and Feed Roller [6] to take up and
feed a sheet of paper into the main body.
• Then, the Vertical Conveyance Motor (M2) transports the paper through the vertical convey-
ance section.
• The Pick-up Roller takes up sheet of paper and the Feed and Separation Rollers [5] ensure
that only one sheet of paper is separated and fed into the main body.
• When the Tray is slid in, the lever [7] is pushed to lower the Pick-up Roller.
• The Upper Limit Sensor (PS4) [9] then detects the upper limit position when the paper lifting
plate is raised.
• The Paper Empty Sensor (PS3) [1] detects when paper in the Main Tray runs out.
[4] [3]
4061t2c203na
5
5. OPERATIONS Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
• The Main Tray [3] is suspended by the cables [1] at the front and rear.
• As the Paper Lift Motor (M5) [5] turns forward or backward, the cables are wound to raise or
lower the Main Tray.
• The Lower Limit Sensor (PS13) [2] detects the Main Tray at its lower limit position.
[1]
[5] [2]
[3]
[4]
4061t2c204na
6
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 5. OPERATIONS
PC-407
on the Sub Tray is moved to the Main Tray [2].
• At this time, the Shift Gate Motor (M3) [4] is energized to retract the front and rear Shift
Gates [1].
[1]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1] 4061t2c205na
7
5. OPERATIONS Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
• The movement of paper from the Sub Tray to the Main Tray is made by the Shifter that is
driven by the Shift Motor (M4) [1].
• The stopping of the movement of the Shifter to the Main Tray side is made by the Shift Posi-
tion Sensor (PS11) [4].
• The movement to the home position starts when the Tray Release Key is pressed.
• The stopping of the movement of the Shifter to the home position is made by the Shift Home
Sensor (PS12) [3].
[3]
[2]
[2]
[4]
[1] [1]
4061t2c206na
8
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 5. OPERATIONS
PC-407
• Paper empty detection of Sub Tray is performed by Sub Tray Empty Sensor (PS9) [3].
[4] [1]
[3] [2]
4061t2c207na
9
5. OPERATIONS Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
PC-407
Blank Page
10
SERVICE MANUAL Theory of Operation
LU-203
2008.05
Ver. 1.0
Revision history
After publication of this service manual, the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for improve-
ment of their performance.
Therefore, the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine.
When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual, a revised version will be
issued with a revision mark added as required.
Revision mark:
• To indicate clearly a section revised, 1 is shown at the left margin of the revised section.
The number inside 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made.
• To indicate clearly a page that contains the revision, 1 is shown near the page number of the
corresponding page.
The number inside 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made.
NOTE
Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 3.0 only are shown with those for Ver. 2.0 deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has not been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 2.0 are left as they are.
CONTENTS
LU-203
LU-203
OUTLINE
1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2. PAPER PATH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
COMPOSITION/OPERATION
3. COMPOSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
4. PAPER FEED SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
4.1 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
4.1.1 Paper feed drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
4.2 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
4.2.1 Paper feed control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
4.2.2 Remaining paper detection control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
5. TRAY SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
5.1 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
5.1.1 Tray lift drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
5.2 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
5.2.1 Tray lift control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
i
CONTENTS Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
LU-203
Blank page
ii
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATION
OUTLINE
LU-203
1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATION
A. Type
B. Functions
C. Type of paper
Paper type *1 Plain paper, recycled paper, high quality paper of 60 to 105 g/m2
Paper size A4, 81/2 x 11
*1 Recommended paper
Plain paper Inch: Hammermill Tidal MP (20 lbs)
Metric: Konica Profi (80 g/m2), Konica Minolta Original (80 g/m2)
Recycled paper Inch: Weyehaeuser Recycled Laser Copy (20 lbs)
Metric: Nautilus (80 g/m2)
D. Maintenance
E. Machine data
F. Operating environment
Note
• The information herein may be subject to change for improvement without notice.
1
2. PAPER PATH Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
2. PAPER PATH
LU-203
[2]
16aat1c001na
2
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. COMPOSITION
COMPOSITION/OPERATION
LU-203
3. COMPOSITION
16aat2c001na
3
4. PAPER FEED SECTION Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
[2]
16aat2c002na
[3]
[2]
[1]
16aat2c007na
4
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 4. PAPER FEED SECTION
4.2 Operation
4.2.1 Paper feed control
LU-203
A. Pick-up mechanism
(1) Drive transmission
The driving force of the feed motor (M150) is transmitted to the paper feed gear /3 [4] through various gears. The
paper feed gear /3 is connected with the pick-up solenoid (SD151) [1] through the claw [2]. When SD151 is
turned OFF, the coupling between the paper feed gear /3 and the paper feed coupling gear /B [3] provided on
the front stage is disengaged and the paper feed gear /3 does not rotate. When SD151 turns ON, the claw is
released to engage the paper feed gear /3 to the paper feed coupling gear /B. In this way, the paper feed gear /
3 rotates and the driving force is transmitted to the paper feed roller unit [6] through the paper feed gear [5] to
pick up paper.
[2] [1]
16aat2c003na
5
4. PAPER FEED SECTION Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
while it is being pushed by the cam. When the paper feed gear /3 rotates, the pressure by the cam on the lift-up
shaft is released and the paper feed roller unit goes down. In this way, the paper feed roller unit goes up and
down while the paper feed gear /3 is rotating a full turn to pick up paper.
[1] [1]
16aat2c004na
6
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 4. PAPER FEED SECTION
LU-203
paper sensors /1 (PS154) [3] and /2 (PS151) [2] and the remaining paper is detected by the combination of the
ON/OFF of these sensors. And the no paper detection in the tray is made by the paper empty sensor (PS153)
[5].
[5]
[4]
[3]
[1]
[2]
16aat2c005na
7
5. TRAY SECTION Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
5. TRAY SECTION
5.1 Drive
LU-203
[8]
[1]
[2]
[7]
[3]
[4]
[6]
[5]
16aat2c006na
8
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 5. TRAY SECTION
5.2 Operation
5.2.1 Tray lift control
LU-203
When the upper door is closed, a parallel pin for the up drive of the lift plate is pushed out to be coupled to the
coupling of the paper lift motor (M151). Closing the upper door also turn ON the upper door interlock switch
(MS151) to supply a 24V DC to the load of the drive system. In this way, M151 turns ON to bring up the lift plate.
When the lift plate goes up and the upper limit sensor (PS152) detects the upper surface of paper, M151 turns
OFF to stop the up drive of the lift plate. When PS152 turns OFF by the paper feed operation, M151 turns ON
again to keep on bringing up the lift plate until PS152 turns ON.
When the upper door is opened, the wire is pulled to release the coupling for the up drive of the lift plate. In this
way, the lift plate goes down up to the position in which a balance is kept between the weight of paper and the
spring tension.
[4] [1]
[3] [2]
16aat2c008na
9
5. TRAY SECTION Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
LU-203
Blank page
10
SERVICE MANUAL Theory of Operation
FS-522/PU-501/
OT-602
2008.05
Ver. 1.0
Revision history
After publication of this service manual, the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for
improvement of their performance.
Therefore, the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine.
When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual, a revised version will be
issued with a revision mark added as required.
Revision mark:
• To indicate clearly a section revised, 1 is shown at the left margin of the revised section.
The number inside 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made.
• To indicate clearly a page that contains the revision, 1 is shown near the page number of the
corresponding page.
The number inside 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made.
NOTE
Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 3.0 only are shown with those for Ver. 2.0 deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has not been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 2.0 are left as they are.
FS-522/PU-501/OT-602
CONTENTS
FS-522/PU-501/OT-602
OUTLINE
1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS ................................................................................1
1.1 FS-522 ..................................................................................................................1
1.2 PU-501..................................................................................................................3
1.3 OT-602 ..................................................................................................................4
2. PAPER PATH ...........................................................................................................5
2.1 Exiting Paper to the Tray /1 ...................................................................................5
2.2 Exiting Paper to the Tray /2 ...................................................................................6
2.3 Exiting Paper to OT...............................................................................................7
COMPOSITION/OPERATION
3. COMPOSITION .......................................................................................................9
4. DRIVE....................................................................................................................10
4.1 FS-522 ................................................................................................................10
4.2 PU-501................................................................................................................11
5. OPERATIONS .......................................................................................................12
5.1 Conveyance Section ...........................................................................................12
5.1.1 Entrance/Conveyance section .....................................................................13
5.1.2 Intermediate Conveyance Section...............................................................14
5.1.3 Exit Conveyance Section.............................................................................15
5.2 Up/down Section.................................................................................................16
5.2.1 Up/down mechanism...................................................................................16
5.2.2 Tray Up/Down operation ..............................................................................17
5.2.3 Tray Upper Limit Position Detection Mechanism .........................................18
5.2.4 Shutter Open/Close Mechanism .................................................................21
5.3 Stacker section....................................................................................................22
5.3.1 Paper aligning mechanism (sub scan direction)..........................................22
5.3.2 Paper aligning mechanism (main scan direction)........................................23
5.3.3 Exit mechanism ...........................................................................................25
5.4 Stapling ...............................................................................................................27
5.4.1 Stapling mechanism ....................................................................................27
5.4.2 Stapling Unit moving mechanism ................................................................28
5.4.3 Stapling Position..........................................................................................28
5.4.4 Staple empty detection................................................................................29
i
CONTENTS Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
FS-522/PU-501/OT-602
6. PU-501.................................................................................................................. 30
6.1 Composition ....................................................................................................... 30
6.2 Operation............................................................................................................ 30
6.2.1 Registration mechanism ............................................................................. 30
6.2.2 Punch mechanism ...................................................................................... 31
6.2.3 Punch status detection ............................................................................... 31
6.2.4 Punch Scraps Box full detection mechanism.............................................. 32
7. OT-602 .................................................................................................................. 33
7.1 Composition ....................................................................................................... 33
7.2 Operation............................................................................................................ 33
7.2.1 Overview..................................................................................................... 33
ii
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
OUTLINE
FS-522/PU-501/OT-602
1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
1.1 FS-522
A. Type
B. Functions
Modes Non sort, sort, group, sort staple, and punch (when PU-501 is mounted)
C. Paper type
(1) Non sort
(2) Sort/Group
1
1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
FS-522/PU-501/OT-602
D. Stapling
F. Machine specifications
G. Operating environment
2
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
FS-522/PU-501/OT-602
1.2 PU-501
A. Type
B. Maintenance
C. Machine specifications
D. Operating environment
3
1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
FS-522/PU-501/OT-602
1.3 OT-602
A. Type
B. Paper Type
D. Machine specifications
E. Operating environment
NOTE
• The information herein may be subject to change for improvement without notice.
4
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 2. PAPER PATH
FS-522/PU-501/OT-602
2. PAPER PATH
2.1 Exiting Paper to the Tray /1
[2] [1]
[3]
4349t1c001na
[1] From the main body [3] Exiting paper to the Tray /1
[2] Convey to the Tray /1
5
2. PAPER PATH Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
FS-522/PU-501/OT-602
[2] [1]
[3]
4349t1c002na
[1] From the main body [3] Exiting paper to the Tray /2
[2] Convey to the Tray /2
6
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 2. PAPER PATH
FS-522/PU-501/OT-602
2.3 Exiting Paper to OT
[2] [1]
[3]
4349t1c003na
7
2. PAPER PATH Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
FS-522/PU-501/OT-602
Blank Page
8
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. COMPOSITION
COMPOSITION/OPERATION
FS-522/PU-501/OT-602
3. COMPOSITION
Up/down Section
Conveyance Section
PU
OT
Staple Section
4349t2c001na
9
4. DRIVE Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
FS-522/PU-501/OT-602
4. DRIVE
4.1 FS-522
[5] [6]
[4] [7]
[1]
[3]
[2]
4349t2c002na
[1] Stapler Drive Section [5] Paper Exit Opening Drive Section
[2] Exit Drive Section [6] Conveyance/Alignment Drive Section
[3] Up/down Drive Section [7] Entrance Drive Section
[4] Shutter Drive Section
10
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 4. DRIVE
FS-522/PU-501/OT-602
4.2 PU-501
[1]
4512t2c001na
11
5. OPERATIONS Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
FS-522/PU-501/OT-602
5. OPERATIONS
5.1 Conveyance Section
• The Conveyance Section is divided into the entrance conveyance section [3], intermediate
conveyance section [1], and the exit conveyance section [2]. It controls to convey the paper
fed from the main body, stop the paper at the punching and folding positions, and drive the
paper for feeding into the exit section.
[3]
[1]
[2]
4349t2c003na
12
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 5. OPERATIONS
FS-522/PU-501/OT-602
5.1.1 Entrance/Conveyance section
• A paper [5] fed from the main body is conveyed to the intermediate conveyance section.
• The Entrance Motor (M3) [3] provides the drive for conveying a paper.
• When the M3 is energized, the Entrance Roller [1] and Registration Roller [2] are driven to
rotate.
• The Entrance Sensor (PS4) [4] detects a paper in the conveyance section.
[4]
[5]
[1]
[3]
[2]
4349t2c004na
13
5. OPERATIONS Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
FS-522/PU-501/OT-602
[4]
[1]
[3]
[2]
4349t2c005na
14
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 5. OPERATIONS
FS-522/PU-501/OT-602
5.1.3 Exit Conveyance Section
• The paper is exited onto each of the trays.
• The Exit Motor (M1) [1] provides drive for the Exit Roller [3], Stacker Paddle [5], and Exit
Paddle [2].
[4]
[5]
[3]
[2] [1]
4349t2c006na
[1] Exit motor (M1) [4] Exit roller release motor (M6)
[2] Exit Paddle [5] Stacker Paddle
[3] Exit Roller
15
5. OPERATIONS Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
FS-522/PU-501/OT-602
[1]
4349t2c007na
16
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 5. OPERATIONS
FS-522/PU-501/OT-602
5.2.2 Tray Up/Down operation
• The Tray is moved up or down by the Tray Lift Motor (M11) that turns forward or backward to
drive the front and rear belts.
• The Lower Limit Sensor (PS14) [1] detects the Tray at its lower limit position.
• The Tray Overrun Switch (SW3) [2] is provided for protection when the trays overruns nor-
mal position.
[2]
[1]
4349t2c008na
[1] Lower Limit Sensor (PS14) [2] Tray Overrun Switch (SW3)
17
5. OPERATIONS Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
FS-522/PU-501/OT-602
[1]
4349t2c009na
18
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 5. OPERATIONS
FS-522/PU-501/OT-602
A. Tray Position Detection
• Tray position detection is controlled according to the number of times the Tray Position Sen-
sor (PS3) [1] is activated after the Lower Limit Sensor (PS14) [2] has been activated.
[2] [1]
4349t2c010na
[1] Tray Position Sensor (PS3) [2] Lower Limit Sensor (PS14)
19
5. OPERATIONS Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
FS-522/PU-501/OT-602
2. After PS14 has been activated, the Up/Down Section is subjected to an ascent motion.
3. When PS3 [1] is activated a first time after the ascent motion of the Up/Down Section
has been started, it is determined that the Up/Down Section is now located at the
paper exit opening for the Tray /1.
[1]
4349t2c011na
4. When PS3 is activated a second time after the ascent motion of the Up/Down Section
has been started, it is determined that the Up/Down Section is now located at the
paper exit opening for the Tray /2.
5. Drive is stopped when PS3 is activated with Upper Limit Sensor (PS15) of the target
tray in the activated position.
* If OT is installed, OT is at the exit port when the position sensor is activated twice and the
Tray /2 is at the exit port when the position sensor is activated three times.
20
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 5. OPERATIONS
FS-522/PU-501/OT-602
5.2.4 Shutter Open/Close Mechanism
• The paper exit section is provided with the Shutter [3] and this Shutter is normally in the up
condition (the condition in which the Paper Exit Opening is opened). However, when the Tray
goes up and down, the Paper Exit Opening is closed to prevent an accident such as hands
getting caught in the Paper Exit Opening.
• The Shutter is opened or closed by the Shutter Motor (M12) [2] that turns a gear train for
raising or lowering the Shutter.
• The Shutter Home Sensor (PS16) [4] detects the position of the gear, thereby determining
the position of the Shutter.
• When the Shutter does not close while in the Tray up/down operation, the Shutter Switch
(SW2) [1] turns OFF to shut off a 24V DC and stop the up/down of the Tray at once.
[4]
[1]
[3] [2]
4349t2c012na
21
5. OPERATIONS Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
FS-522/PU-501/OT-602
[5]
[4]
[6]
[1]
[3]
[2]
4349t2c013na
22
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 5. OPERATIONS
FS-522/PU-501/OT-602
5.3.2 Paper aligning mechanism (main scan direction)
• Aligning Plates are moved and the Paddle is rotated so as to align the paper at the stapling
position.
• The paper in the Stacker is aligned in the main scan direction by two Alignment Motors and
aligning plates.
A. Aligning plates
• The aligning plates [6] are moved to the front or rear in accordance with the paper size.
• The Alignment Sensor /Rr (PS6) [4], /Fr (PS7) [1] detects the position of each aligning plate.
[6]
[5]
[7]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
4349t2c014na
23
5. OPERATIONS Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
FS-522/PU-501/OT-602
[5]
[1]
[2]
[4] [3]
4349t2c015na
24
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 5. OPERATIONS
FS-522/PU-501/OT-602
5.3.3 Exit mechanism
• The paper exit roller section is provided with the Paper Holding Paddle [3] to hold the paper
exited onto the Tray while in the sort mode so that the paper does not have an uneven edge.
• The subsequent copy set is fed out with the copy sets previously resident on the tray being
held down by the paper holding paddle.
• The Exit Paddle Home Sensor (PS11) [1], Spring Clutch [4], and Exit Paddle Solenoid (SD2)
[2] control the retracted position and paper holding position of the paper holding paddle.
[4] [1]
[3] [2]
4349t2c016na
[1] Exit Paddle Home Sensor (PS11) [3] Paper Holding Paddle
[2] Exit Paddle Solenoid (SD2) [4] Spring Clutch
25
5. OPERATIONS Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
FS-522/PU-501/OT-602
[4]
4349t2c017na
26
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 5. OPERATIONS
FS-522/PU-501/OT-602
5.4 Stapling
5.4.1 Stapling mechanism
• Stapling is performed by the Stapling Unit.
• When the Stapling Motor [1] is rotated, the Clinch Arm [3] lowers. The Stapler [2] thereafter
goes up to drive a staple in the paper.
• Five different types of stapling are available: parallel front one point, parallel rear one point,
slant front one point, slant rear one point and parallel two points.
[3]
[1]
[2]
4349t2c018na
27
5. OPERATIONS Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
FS-522/PU-501/OT-602
[1]
[5]
[4]
[2]
[3]
4349t2c019na
4349t2c020na
28
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 5. OPERATIONS
FS-522/PU-501/OT-602
5.4.4 Staple empty detection
• Staple Empty Sensor [2] detect whether or not there are staples still left.
• When the number of staples left in the staple cartridge becomes about 20, a staple sheet
empty condition results, causing a corresponding empty message to appear on the opera-
tion panel.
• When the empty condition is detected, the corresponding empty indication is given on the
operation panel. At the same time, the Stapling Unit moves to the front.
• When a new staple cartridge is loaded, the stapling motor is energized until the Stapler
Ready Sensor [1] detects a staple, which results in the staple to be fed up to the stapling
position.
[1]
[2]
4349t2c021na
29
6. PU-501 Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
FS-522/PU-501/OT-602
6. PU-501
6.1 Composition
4512t2c002na
6.2 Operation
6.2.1 Registration mechanism
• For punch and holding operations, a loop is formed in the paper at the Registration Roller [2]
to correct skew of the paper.
• The Entrance Sensor (PS4) [1] detects the leading edge of the paper and the Registration
Roller forms a loop in the paper.
• The Registration Clutch (CL1) is then energized after a given period of time after the PS4 is
activated by the leading edge of the paper, this causes the Registration Roller to start turn-
ing.
[2]
[1]
4512t2c003na
30
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 6. PU-501
FS-522/PU-501/OT-602
6.2.2 Punch mechanism
• After a given period of time after the Entrance Sensor (PS4) [3] has detected the trailing
edge of the paper, the Conveyance Motor (M2) of FS is deenergized and a punch hole oper-
ation is made at the trailing edge portion in each sheet of paper.
• Punch holes are made when the slide cam [1] makes a reciprocating motion, as driven by
the drive cam which is rotated by the Punch Motor (M1) [2] provided in the punch unit.
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
4512t2c004na
[1] [2]
[3]
4512t2c005na
31
6. PU-501 Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
FS-522/PU-501/OT-602
[1]
4512t2c006na
32
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 7. OT-602
FS-522/PU-501/OT-602
7. OT-602
7.1 Composition
4625t2c001na
7.2 Operation
7.2.1 Overview
• Mounting the optional OT provides a total of three trays.
• The OT is attached at different positions depending on whether options SD or MT is
mounted or not.
The capacity of each tray is different depending on the position of the OT is attached.
• When the short-circuit connector shipped with OT is mounted, the machine determines that
OT has been mounted.
[5] [6]
[4] [7]
[3] [8]
[2] [1]
4625t2c002na
33
7. OT-602 Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
FS-522/PU-501/OT-602
Blank Page
34
SERVICE MANUAL Theory of Operation
FS-523/RU-507
2008.05
Ver. 1.0
Revision history
After publication of this service manual, the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for improve-
ment of their performance.
Therefore, the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine.
When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual, a revised version will be
issued with a revision mark added as required.
Revision mark:
• To indicate clearly a section revised, 1 is shown at the left margin of the revised section.
The number inside 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made.
• To indicate clearly a page that contains the revision, 1 is shown near the page number of the
corresponding page.
The number inside 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made.
NOTE
Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 3.0 only are shown with those for Ver. 2.0 deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has not been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 2.0 are left as they are.
CONTENTS
FS-523/RU-507
FS-523/RU-507
OUTLINE
1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.1 FS-523 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.2 RU-507 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
2. PAPER PATH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
COMPOSITION/OPERATION
3. COMPOSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
4. DRIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
4.1 FS-523 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
4.2 RU-507 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
5. OPERATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
5.1 RU conveyance section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
5.1.1 Conveyance mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
5.2 FS conveyance section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
5.2.1 Entrance conveyance mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
5.2.2 Gate mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
5.2.3 Sub tray conveyance mechanism. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
5.2.4 Main tray/handling tray conveyance mechanism. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
5.2.5 Roller separation mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
5.2.6 Conveyance operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
5.3 Main tray section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
5.3.1 Main tray up/down mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
5.3.2 Main tray shift mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
5.4 Punch section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
5.4.1 Punch mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
5.4.2 Punch hole switchover mechanism (for inch area) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
5.5 Staple section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
5.5.1 Alignment mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
5.5.2 Stapler movement mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
5.5.3 Stapling mechanism. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
5.5.4 Staple sheet empty control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
i
CONTENTS Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
FS-523/RU-507
Blank page
ii
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATION
OUTLINE
FS-523/RU-507
1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATION
1.1 FS-523
A. Type
B. Functions
C. Type of paper
• Maximum load capacity: (80 g/m2) when loaded with paper of the same size.
(1) Straight
Type of paper Size of paper Weight Max. capacity Exit tray Max. number of
sheets stapled
Plain paper Inch: 60 to 90 g/m2 250 sheets Sub tray —
Recycled paper A3, A4, A4S
Thick paper 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 91 to 210 g/m2 20 sheets
81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S,
Thin paper 50 to 59 g/m2
81/2 x 51/2S, Foolscap
OHP —
Metric:
transparencies
A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5,
Envelope
B5S *2, A5S, B6S
Label paper
11 x 17, 81/2 x 11,
Letterhead 81/2 x 11S, Foolscap,
8K *1, 16K *1, 16KS *1
1
1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATION Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
sheets stapled
Plain paper Inch: 50 to 210 g/m2 3000 sheets Main tray —
Recycled paper A3, A4, A4S (A4S or smaller)
11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 1500 sheets
Thick paper 81/2 x 11S, Foolscap (B4 or larger)
Thin paper Metric:
A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5,
B5S *2
11 x 17, 81/2 x 11,
81/2 x 11S, Foolscap,
8K *1, 16K *1, 16KS*1
(4) Punch
a. Metric/Swedish
Type of paper Size of paper Weight Max. capacity Exit tray Max. number of
sheets stapled
Plain paper
A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, 60 to 90 g/m2 — Main tray —
Recycled paper 8K *1, 16K *1 Sub tray
b. Inch 2 holes
Type of paper Size of paper Weight Max. capacity Exit tray Max. number of
sheets stapled
Plain paper
11 x 17, 81/2 x 11, 60 to 90 g/m2 — Main tray —
Recycled paper 8 /2 x 11S, 8 /2 x 14,
1 1
Sub tray
51/2 x 81/2S, Foolscap
c. Inch 3 holes
Type of paper Size of paper Weight Max. capacity Exit tray Max. number of
sheets stapled
Plain paper 81/2 x 11, 11 x 17 60 to 90 g/m2 — Main tray —
Recycled paper Sub tray
2
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATION
D. Stapling
FS-523/RU-507
Staple filling method Dedicated staple cartridge (5000 staples)
Staple detection Available (near empty: 20 remaining staples)
Staple position *1 Rear: Diagonal 45° 1 point Metric: A3, B4, A4, B5
Front: Diagonal 45° 1 point Inch: 81/2 x 11, 11 x 17
Rear: Diagonal 28° 1 point Metric: B4, B5
Front: Diagonal 28° 1 point Inch: —
Rear: Parallel 1 point Metric: A4S, B5S
Front: Parallel 1 point Inch: 81/2 x 11S, 81/2 x 14
Side: 2 points Metric: A4, A4S, A3, B5, B5S, B4
Inch: 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 81/2 x 14, 11 x 17
Manual staple None
*1 In case of the 1-staple mode, conduct a parallel and a skew adjustment according to the length in the
main scan direction.
Parallel: main scan direction 182 to 216 mm
Diagonal: main scan direction 216 to 297 mm
E. Punch
F. Maintenance
G. Machine data
H. Operating environment
Note
• The information herein may be subject to change for improvement without notice.
3
1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATION Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
1.2 RU-507
FS-523/RU-507
A. Type
B. Functions
C. Type of paper
16fat1c001na
D. Maintenance
E. Machine data
F. Operating environment
Note
• The information herein may be subject to change for improvement without notice.
4
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 2. PAPER PATH
2. PAPER PATH
FS-523/RU-507
A. Non-sort mode (sub tray paper exit)
[1]
[3] [2]
4521t1c004na
Note: Even when mixed with the punch mode, the paper path is the same.
B. Non-sort/sort/group mode
[1]
[2]
4521t1c005na
Note: Even when mixed with the punch mode, the paper path is the same.
5
2. PAPER PATH Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
C. Staple mode
FS-523/RU-507
[1]
[5] [4] [3] [2]
4521t1c006na
[1] Paper exit roller (main body) [7] Paper path for other than the 1st paper of
[2] Bypass gate the 2nd and succeeding copies.
[3] Paper path for the 1st paper of the 2nd and [8] FS-523
succeeding copies [9] Main gate
[4] Stapler [10] Punch
[5] Handling tray [11] RU-507
[6] Main tray
Note: Even when the A, B or C mode mentioned above is mixed with the punch mode, the paper path is the
same.
6
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. COMPOSITION
COMPOSITION/OPERATION
FS-523/RU-507
3. COMPOSITION
Conveyance
Sub tray section Punch section RU-507
Staple section
4521t2c001na
7
4. DRIVE Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
4. DRIVE
FS-523/RU-507
4.1 FS-523
[8] [1]
[7] [2]
[6]
[5]
[3]
[4]
4521t2e001na
[1] Paddle motor /Lw (M9) [8] Paper exit motor (M3)
[2] Hole punch selector motor (M14) (for inch [9] Paddle motor /Up (M15)
area) [10] Paper exit roller release motor (M13)
[3] Tray lift motor (M7) [11] Conveyance motor /Lw (M2)
[4] Shift motor (M8) [12] Conveyance motor /Up (M4)
[5] Stapler moving motor (M6) [13] Entrance conveyance motor (M1)
[6] Alignment motor (M5) [14] Punch motor (M11)
[7] Intermediate conveyance roller release
motor (M12)
8
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 4. DRIVE
4.2 RU-507
FS-523/RU-507
[3] [4] [5]
[2]
[1]
16fat2c001na
9
5. OPERATION Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
5. OPERATION
FS-523/RU-507
[4] [5]
[1]
[3]
[2]
16fat2c003na
[1] Paper exit roller (main body) [4] Path sensor (PS2)
[2] Coupling gear [5] Conveyance roller
[3] Entrance roller (FS-523)
10
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 5. OPERATION
FS-523/RU-507
• The conveyance section is made up of the entrance conveyance mechanism [6] that conducts the convey-
ance drive, the main route conveyance mechanism [2], the sub tray conveyance mechanism [5], the han-
dling/paper exit conveyance mechanism [3], the gate mechanism [1] that switches the paper path and the
roller separation mechanism [4] that conducts the pressure/release of the roller.
[3]
11
5. OPERATION Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
[4]
[1]
[3] [2]
4521t2c005na
A. Control
(1) Sub tray paper exit
• When the FS start signal turns ON, the entrance conveyance motor (M1) turns ON. And it turns OFF a
specified period of time after the sub tray exit sensor (PS1) detects the trailing edge of the last paper.
(2) Sort/staple
• When the FS start signal turns ON, M1 turns ON. And it turns OFF a specified period of time after the inter-
mediate conveyance sensor (PS3) detects the trailing edge of the last paper.
12
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 5. OPERATION
FS-523/RU-507
[3].
• The bypass gate is driven by the bypass gate solenoid (SD1) [5].
• The main gate is driven by the main gate solenoid (SD2) [2].
[6]
[1]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
4521t2c006na
13
5. OPERATION Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
A. Operation
• The paper conveyance path of the bypass gate [1] is switched over in the bypass route direction [2] when
FS-523/RU-507
the bypass gate solenoid (SD1) turns OFF and switched over in the main gate direction [10] when it turns
ON.
• The paper conveyance path of the main gate [9] is switched over in the main route direction [4] when the
main gate solenoid (SD2) turns OFF and switched over in the sub tray route direction [8] when SD2 turns
ON.
• The paper conveyance to the bypass route is used when conveying each of the 1st sheets of paper of the
2nd and succeeding copies in the staple mode to increase the handling capacity of paper even while in the
stapling operation.
4521t2c007na
B. Control
(1) Sub tray paper exit
• A specified period of time after the fusing exit sensor (PS3) of the main body turns ON and detects the lead-
ing edge of paper, the bypass gate solenoid (SD1) turns ON and the main gate solenoid (SD2) also turns
ON to switch over the conveyance path to the sub tray route.
• A specified period of time after the sub tray exit sensor (PS1) turns ON with the trailing edge of paper
detected, SD1 and SD2 turn OFF.
14
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 5. OPERATION
FS-523/RU-507
• The conveyance motor /Up (M4) [5] drives the conveyance roller /Up [1] and the sub tray paper exit roller [2]
to convey [3] paper [4] to the sub tray.
[5]
[1]
[4]
[3]
[2]
4521t2c008na
A. Control
(1) Sub tray paper exit (with no punch)
• A specified period of time after the FS start signal turns ON, the conveyance motor /Up (M4) turns ON. And
it turns OFF a specified period of time after the sub tray exit sensor (PS1) turns OFF with the trailing edge of
paper detected.
15
5. OPERATION Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
roller [9] to convey paper in the main tray direction [4]. When rotating M2 in the reverse direction, paper is
switched back [10].
• The switch back is made for the 1st paper of each of the 2nd and succeeding copies when printing contin-
uously 2 or more copies in the staple mode to convey the 1st and the 2nd sheets of paper overlapped each
other.
• The paper exit motor (M3) [6] drives the paper exit roller [2] to convey paper in the main tray direction. When
rotating M3 in the reverse direction, paper is conveyed [3] to the handling tray [8].
• The paper conveyance to the handling tray is made while in the staple mode.
[7]
[8] [9] [10]
[6]
[1]
[5]
[4]
[3] [2]
4521t2c009na
16
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 5. OPERATION
FS-523/RU-507
when the bypass route conveyance sensor (PS2) [3] detects the trailing edge of the 1st paper [1] of the 2nd
copy that has been conveyed to the bypass route, M2 turns OFF.
2. A specified period of time after M2 turns OFF, M2 rotates in the reverse direction to switch back the convey-
ance [2]. And a specified period of time after that, M2 stops to stand by for the 2nd paper.
3. A specified period of time after the main route conveyance sensor (PS4) [7] detects the leading edge of the
2nd paper [8] that has been conveyed through the main route by the conveyance motor /Up (M4), M2
rotates again in the normal direction to convey the 1st and the 2nd sheets of paper overlapped each other.
4. A specified period of time after the intermediate conveyance sensor (PS3) [6] detects the trailing edge of the
last paper, M2 turns OFF.
[1]
[1] 1st paper of the 2nd copy [5] Paper of the 1st copy
[2] Switch back [6] Intermediate conveyance sensor (PS3)
[3] Bypass route conveyance sensor (PS2) [7] Main route conveyance sensor (PS4)
[4] Handling tray [8] 2nd paper of the 2nd copy
17
5. OPERATION Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
• When the FS start signal turns ON, the paper exit motor (M3) rotates in the normal direction to convey
paper to the main tray. M3 turns OFF a specified period of time after the intermediate conveyance sensor
(PS3) detects the trailing edge of the last paper.
18
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 5. OPERATION
FS-523/RU-507
releases the pressure from the roller.
• The intermediate conveyance roller release motor (M12) [1] drives the cam [5] to pressure/release the inter-
mediate conveyance roller [2]. The home position is detected by the roller release home sensor (PS12) [4].
• The paper exit roller release motor (M13) [8] drives the crank [7] to pressure/release the paper exit roller [3].
The home position is detected by the paper exit roller home sensor (PS13) [6].
[8]
[7]
[1]
[6]
[2]
[5]
[4]
[3]
4521t2c012na
19
5. OPERATION Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
2nd paper [4] gets to the intermediate conveyance roller [2] while in the switch back [1] of the 1st paper of
the 2nd and succeeding copies. To prevent this, release the pressure of the intermediate conveyance roller
and separate [3] the roller to get the 2 sheets of paper overlapped each other.
2. When the 2nd paper stops, the intermediate conveyance roller is pressured to convey the 2 sheets of paper
overlapped each other to the handling tray.
[1]
4521t2c013na
20
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 5. OPERATION
FS-523/RU-507
exit roller release motor (M13) turns ON. After the pressure of the paper exit roller [3] is released and the
paper exit roller is separated [4], M13 turns OFF.
2. After completion of the stapling operation, M13 turns ON again when the fusing exit sensor (PS3) of the main
body detects the trailing edge of the 2nd paper of the next copy. M13 pressures [7] the paper exit roller to
nip the paper [5], then M13 stops and the paper exits.
21
5. OPERATION Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
1. The 1st paper [2], the 2nd paper [3] and the 3rd paper [4] of the 1st copy are conveyed to the handling tray
[1].
2. While in the conveyance of the last paper [7] of the 1st copy, the 1st paper of the 2nd copy is conveyed [6]
to the bypass route.
[1] 4521t2c015na
3. The 1st paper [1] of the 2nd copy thus conveyed to the bypass route is switched back by the conveyance
roller /Lw [2] and the storage roller [3], and then it stops.
4. The 1st paper [4] of the 2nd copy is overlapped with the 2nd paper [5] of the 2nd copy to be conveyed.
[3] [5]
[1] 1st paper of the 2nd copy [4] 1st paper of the 2nd copy
[2] Conveyance roller /Lw [5] 2nd paper of the 2nd copy
[3] Storage roller
22
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 5. OPERATION
5. After completion of the stapling operation of the paper [1] of the 1st copy, the paper exit roller [2] is pres-
sured to exit the paper of the 1st copy. At this time, the moment the paper of the 1st copy is exited, the 1st
FS-523/RU-507
and the 2nd sheets of paper [3] of the 2nd copy are also conveyed in the main tray direction.
6. After completion of the exit of the paper [6] of the 1st copy, the pressure of the paper exit roller is released [7]
and the paper exit roller [5] rotates in the reverse direction to convey the 1st and the 2nd sheets of paper [4]
of the 2nd copy to the handling tray.
[1] Paper of the 1st copy [4] 1st and the 2nd sheets of paper of the 2nd
[2] Pressure the paper exit roller copy
[3] 1st and the 2nd sheets of paper of the 2nd [5] Paper exit roller
copy [6] Paper of the 1st copy
[7] Separation of the paper exit roller
23
5. OPERATION Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
[5]
[4]
[1]
[3]
[2]
4521t2c018na
[1] Main tray upper limit LED (LED19) [4] Main tray upper limit sensor (PS19)
[2] Tray lift motor (M7) [5] Main tray reset sensor (PS8)
[3] Main tray
A. Control
(1) While in the print operation
• While in the paper exit, when the main tray upper limit sensor (PS19) turns ON, the tray lift motor (M7)
rotates in the reverse direction to bring down the main tray. And M7 turns OFF when PS19 turns OFF. This
operation is repeated and stopped when the tray gets to the bottom according to the amount of paper
exited.
24
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 5. OPERATION
FS-523/RU-507
scan direction through the shift plate [3].
• The home position is detected by the shift home sensor (PS10) [2].
[1]
[5]
[4]
[2]
[3]
4521t2c019na
A. Control
(1) Sort mode
• A specified period of time after the intermediate conveyance sensor (PS3) detects the trailing edge of the
last paper of the copy, the shift motor (M8) turns ON to start the shift operation, and when the shift home
sensor (PS10) detects the shift position, M8 turn OFF.
25
5. OPERATION Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
[6]
[1]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2] 4521t2c020na
A. Operation
1. A specified period of time after the path sensor (PS2) of the RU detects the trailing edge of paper, the con-
veyance motor /Up (M4) or conveyance motor /Lw (M2) turns OFF to stop at the prescribed punch position.
2. The punch clutch (CL1) turns ON to punch a hole.
3. M4 or M2 turns ON to convey paper.
26
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 5. OPERATION
FS-523/RU-507
move the lock holder [2] as necessary to select the hole positions (2 or 3 holes [1][6]).
[1]
[2] [3]
S4
[4]
[5]
[6]
S4 [7]
4521t2e002na
27
5. OPERATION Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
A. Alignment plate
• The movement of the alignment plates /Fr [5] and /Rr [1] is made by the normal/reverse drive of the align-
ment motor (M5) [2].
• The alignment plates /Fr and /Rr move with the position at the center of paper as a reference and the home
position is detected by the alignment home sensor (PS9) [4].
• The distance of movement of the alignment plate is variable according to the paper size.
• The alignment operation is made each time paper is conveyed to the handling tray.
(1) Control
1. When the intermediate conveyance sensor (PS3) detects the leading edge of the 1st paper of the job, M5
rotates in the normal direction to conduct a size movement.
2. A specified period of time after PS3 detects the trailing edge of paper, M5 rotates in the normal direction to
conduct the paper alignment. And it rotates in the reverse direction to return to the size standby position.
28
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 5. OPERATION
B. Paddle
• The paddle /Up [3] and /Lw [6] hit paper against the stopper to conduct the alignment in the sub scan
FS-523/RU-507
direction.
• The drive of the paddle /Up is made by the paddle motor /Up (M15) [5] and the paddle solenoid (SD3) [4].
• The drive of the paddle /Lw is made by the paddle motor /Lw (M9) [1].
[4] [5]
[6]
[1]
[3]
[2]
4521t2c022na
(1) Control
1. When the FS start signal turns ON, M15 and M9 also turn ON.
2. A specified period of time after the intermediate conveyance sensor (PS3) detects the leading edge of paper,
SD3 turns ON while a specified period of time.
3. A specified period of time after PS3 detects the trailing edge of the last paper of the copy, M15 and M9 turn
OFF.
4. In case of the last copy, the moment the paper exit motor (M3) turns OFF, M15 and M9 turn OFF.
29
5. OPERATION Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
• The home position is detected by the stapler home sensor (PS14) [2] and the position is decided according
to the drive amount of M6.
• The 1 stapling at the front corner is made by the stapler /Fr, the 1 stapling at the rear corner made by the
stapler /Rr, and the 2 stapling operations are made by the staplers /Fr and /Rr.
A. Control
• When the FS start signal turns ON, the stapler moving motor (M6) turns ON, and it stops at the stapling
position.
• After completion of the job, the moment the paper exit motor (M3) turns OFF, it returns to the home posi-
tion.
30
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 5. OPERATION
FS-523/RU-507
• When the stapler motors /Rr (M16) and /Fr (M17) [1] are driven, the clinch arm [3] goes down to drive the
staple blade [2] and hit in a staple.
[3]
[1]
[2]
4521t2c024na
[1] Stapler motors /Rr, /Fr (M16, M17) [3] Clinch arm
[2] Staple blade
A. Control
• A specified period of time after the intermediate conveyance sensor (PS3) detects the trailing edge of the
last paper of the copy, the stapler motors /Rr (M16) and /Fr (M17) turn ON. After completion of the stapling
operation, the motors stop.
31
5. OPERATION Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
• The detection of the staple sheet [6] is made by the staple empty sensors /Rr (PS20) and /Fr (PS23) [4].
• The detection of the staple ready is made by the staple ready sensors /Rr (PS21) and /Fr (PS24) [2].
[5] [6]
[4] [2]
[3] [1] 4521t2c025na
[1] No staple condition [4] Staple empty sensors /Rr, /Fr (PS20, PS23)
[2] Stapler ready sensors /Rr, /Fr (PS21, PS24) [5] Stapler cartridge
[3] Staple set condition [6] Staples
32
SERVICE MANUAL Theory of Operation
SD-507
( 501/421/361 (
2008.05
Ver. 1.0
Revision history
After publication of this service manual, the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for
improvement of their performance.
Therefore, the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine.
When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual, a revised version will be
issued with a revision mark added as required.
Revision mark:
• To indicate clearly a section revised, 1 is shown at the left margin of the revised section.
The number inside 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made.
• To indicate clearly a page that contains the revision, 1 is shown near the page number of the
corresponding page.
The number inside 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made.
NOTE
Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 3.0 only are shown with those for Ver. 2.0 deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has not been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 2.0 are left as they are.
CONTENTS
SD-507
SD-507
OUTLINE
1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS ................................................................................1
2. PAPER PATH ...........................................................................................................2
COMPOSITION/OPERATION
3. COMPOSITION .......................................................................................................3
4. DRIVE......................................................................................................................4
4.1 Half-fold section ....................................................................................................4
4.2 Saddle Stitching Section .......................................................................................4
5. OPERATIONS .........................................................................................................5
5.1 Paper Conveyance mechanism ............................................................................5
5.2 Conveyance roller pressure/release .....................................................................6
5.2.1 Pressure/release mechanism........................................................................6
5.2.2 Operation.......................................................................................................7
5.3 Stapling mechanism..............................................................................................8
5.4 Staple guide ..........................................................................................................9
5.4.1 Staple guide mechanism ...............................................................................9
5.4.2 Operation timing ............................................................................................9
5.5 Half-folding mechanism ......................................................................................10
5.5.1 Operation.....................................................................................................11
5.6 Paper guide.........................................................................................................12
5.6.1 Paper guide mechanism..............................................................................12
5.7 Tray paper detection............................................................................................13
i
CONTENTS Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
SD-507
Blank Page
ii
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
OUTLINE
1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
SD-507
A. Type
B. Paper type
Plain Paper,
Type 56 to 90 g/m2
Recycled paper
Metric: A3, B4, A4S, B5S *2, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 11S, Foolscap,
Size 8K *1, 16KS *1
Inch: 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11S, A3, A4S, Foolscap
Capacity 200 sheets or 20 copies
*1: Only supported in Taiwan.
*2: Supported in other than inch area and Taiwan.
C. Maintenance
D. Machine specifications
E. Operating environment
NOTE
• The information herein may be subject to change for improvement without notice.
1
2. PAPER PATH Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
2. PAPER PATH
SD-507
4511t1c001na
2
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. COMPOSITION
COMPOSITION/OPERATION
3. COMPOSITION
SD-507
Saddle-Stitching Section
Half-Fold Section
4511t2c001na
3
4. DRIVE Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
4. DRIVE
4.1 Half-fold section
SD-507
[3]
[2]
[1]
4511t2c013na
[3]
[1]
[2]
4511t2c003na
4
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 5. OPERATIONS
5. OPERATIONS
5.1 Paper Conveyance mechanism
SD-507
• Paper is conveyed by the Exit Rollers of FS and Conveyance Roller /Up [5], /Lw [2].
• The Conveyance Motor (M8) [3] provides the drive for the Conveyance Roller /Lw [2].
• If a center stapling operation is made with a bundle papers stored in the Stacker, a bundle
papers is conveyed to the center stapling position, through a pulse control of the Exit Roller
of FS.
• A bundle papers is thereafter fed out by the Conveyance Roller /Up and /Lw.
[5]
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
4511t2c004na
5
5. OPERATIONS Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
• The Conveyance Roller /Up [1] is moved away from, or pressed up against, the Conveyance
Roller /Lw [2], when the paper is fed out as a bundle of papers.
• The Saddle Exit Home Sensor (PS18) [3] is used to control the pressure/release position of
the Conveyance Roller /Up.
[1]
[3] [2]
4511t2c005na
[1] Conveyance Roller /Up [3] Saddle Exit Home Sensor (PS18)
[2] Conveyance Roller /Lw
6
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 5. OPERATIONS
5.2.2 Operation
1. The Conveyance Roller /Up [5] is moved up or down by the cams which are driven by
SD-507
the Exit Open/Close Motor (M9) [6].
2. When a bundle papers moves past the Conveyance Roller /Up and /Lw, the motor is
energized to press the Conveyance Roller /Up up against the Conveyance Roller /Lw,
thereby feeding a bundle papers out into the tray.
[6]
[1]
[1]
[5]
7
5. OPERATIONS Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
• Since the unit are for center stapling only, it is made up of the upper clincher portion [1] and
the lower stapling portion. A bundle papers moves through the space between the upper
and lower portions of the staplers.
• When stapling, the clincher portion moves downward to perform the stapling operation.
[3]
[1]
[2]
4511t2c007na
8
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 5. OPERATIONS
SD-507
sheet of paper is stored, thereby preventing the leading edge from contacting the Stapling
Unit and jamming.
[3]
[2] [1]
4511t2c008na
9
5. OPERATIONS Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
• The paper feed amount is determined for each paper size as counted from the timing when
the trailing edge is detected. Half-folding is effected as follows. Specifically, the paper under-
goes a switchback operation and is conveyed to the half-folding position as the motor is
turned backward.
• The Half-Folding Blade [3] is lowered and the center of the paper is pinched between the
Folding Rollers and this creates a crease in the paper.
• After the half-folding, the paper is conveyed by the Conveyance Roller [7] and then the Reg-
istration Roller [1] as they are driven in that order.
[7] [1]
[3]
[6] [2]
[5]
[3]
[4]
4511t2c009na
10
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 5. OPERATIONS
5.5.1 Operation
• When the Folding Motor (M10) is energized for one cycle of operation, the Conveyance
SD-507
Guides /Lw [2] are retracted to the right and left and the Half-folding Blade [3] makes one
up-and-down reciprocating motion. In synchronism with the sequence of these operations,
the Folding Roller [1] turns one complete turn to pull the paper downward at its center.
• At the same time that the Conveyance Guides /Lw returns to their original position, the Half-
folding Blade goes up.
[1]
[3]
[2]
4511t2c010na
11
5. OPERATIONS Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
paper of a large size so as to prevent it from pushing the trailing edge of the paper that has
previously been fed out.
• The Paper Guide is driven only when paper with a length of 257 mm or more will be stored.
• The Paper Guide advances when the Entrance Sensor (PS4) of FS is OFF and retracts
when the trailing edge of the paper passes the Exit Sensor (PS20).
[3]
[2]
[2] [1]
4511t2c011na
[1] Paper Guide Home Sensor (PS23) [3] Paper Guide Motor (M13)
[2] Paper Guide
12
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 5. OPERATIONS
SD-507
(PS21) [1] to detect the paper.
[1]
4511t2c012na
13
5. OPERATIONS Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
SD-507
Blank Page
14
SERVICE MANUAL Theory of Operation
MT-502
( 501/421/361 (
2008.05
Ver. 1.0
Revision history
After publication of this service manual, the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for
improvement of their performance.
Therefore, the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine.
When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual, a revised version will be
issued with a revision mark added as required.
Revision mark:
• To indicate clearly a section revised, 1 is shown at the left margin of the revised section.
The number inside 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made.
• To indicate clearly a page that contains the revision, 1 is shown near the page number of the
corresponding page.
The number inside 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made.
NOTE
Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 3.0 only are shown with those for Ver. 2.0 deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has not been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 2.0 are left as they are.
CONTENTS
MT-502
MT-502
OUTLINE
1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS ................................................................................1
2. PAPER PATH ...........................................................................................................2
COMPOSITION/OPERATION
3. COMPOSITION .......................................................................................................3
4. DRIVE......................................................................................................................4
5. OPERATIONS .........................................................................................................5
5.1 Paper conveyance mechanism .............................................................................5
5.2 Paper path selection mechanism ..........................................................................6
5.3 Paper detection .....................................................................................................7
i
CONTENTS Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
MT-502
Blank Page
ii
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
OUTLINE
1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
MT-502
A. Type
B. Maintenance
C. Machine specifications
D. Operating environment
NOTE
• The information herein may be subject to change for improvement without notice.
1
2. PAPER PATH Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
2. PAPER PATH
MT-502
4510t1c001na
2
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. COMPOSITION
COMPOSITION/OPERATION
3. COMPOSITION
MT-502
4510t2c001nb
3
4. DRIVE Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
4. DRIVE
MT-502
[3]
[1]
[2]
4510t2c003na
4
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 5. OPERATIONS
5. OPERATIONS
5.1 Paper conveyance mechanism
MT-502
• When the Mailbin is selected as the exit source, paper is fed off from the Finisher (FS-522)
and toward the Mailbin.
• Drive for the Conveyance Rollers [2] of the Mailbin is transmitted from the Conveyance
Motor (M1) [1] by way of a belt.
• As each of the Conveyance Rollers is driven, paper fed off from the Finisher is conveyed into
the Mailbin.
[1]
[2]
4510t2c004na
5
5. OPERATIONS Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
[1]
[2]
4510t2c005na
[1] Gate Solenoid /1, /2, /3 (SD1, SD2, SD3) [2] Gate
6
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 5. OPERATIONS
MT-502
paper that is fed into the tray, causing the LED to light up blue steadily to inform the user that
a sheet of paper has been fed into the tray.
• As the paper stacks up and eventually deactivates the Paper Full Sensor /1, /2, /3, /4 (PS5,
PS6, PS7, PS8) [1], at which time a paper full condition is detected.
[1]
[2]
4510t2c006na
[1] Paper Full Sensor /1, /2, /3, /4 (PS5, PS6, [2] Paper Detection Sensor /1, /2, /3, /4 (PS1,
PS7, PS8) PS2, PS3, PS4)
7
5. OPERATIONS Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
MT-502
Blank Page
8
SERVICE MANUAL Theory of Operation
JS-502
( 501/421/361 (
2008.05
Ver. 1.0
Revision history
After publication of this service manual, the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for
improvement of their performance.
Therefore, the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine.
When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual, a revised version will be
issued with a revision mark added as required.
Revision mark:
• To indicate clearly a section revised, 1 is shown at the left margin of the revised section.
The number inside 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made.
• To indicate clearly a page that contains the revision, 1 is shown near the page number of the
corresponding page.
The number inside 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made.
NOTE
Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 3.0 only are shown with those for Ver. 2.0 deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has not been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 2.0 are left as they are.
CONTENTS
JS-502
JS-502
OUTLINE
1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS ................................................................................1
2. PAPER PATH ...........................................................................................................2
COMPOSITION/OPERATION
3. COMPOSITION .......................................................................................................3
4. OPERATIONS .........................................................................................................4
4.1 Job Tray Conveyance/Exit.....................................................................................4
i
CONTENTS Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
JS-502
Blank Page
ii
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
OUTLINE
1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
JS-502
A. Type
B. Paper type
C. Maintenance
Maintenance None
D. Machine specifications
E. Operating environment
NOTE
• The information herein may be subject to change for improvement without notice.
1
2. PAPER PATH Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
2. PAPER PATH
JS-502
[1]
4347t1c001na
2
Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. COMPOSITION
COMPOSITION/OPERATION
3. COMPOSITION
JS-502
Job Separator section Switchback Unit section
4347t2c001na
3
4. OPERATIONS Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 May. 2008
4. OPERATIONS
4.1 Job Tray Conveyance/Exit
JS-502
• The Switchback Unit functions to convey paper through, and feed it out from, the Job Tray.
• The paper sensor section of the Job Tray is mounted to the Switchback Unit, thereby detect-
ing paper.
• When paper stacks up on the Tray [3], the actuator [2] is pushed up by the paper, indicating
that there is paper at the exit port.
[1]
[3]
[2]
4347t2c002na
4
© 2008 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
Printed in Japan
Use of this manual should be strictly supervised to avoid
CCA0R5-M-TE1
disclosure of confidential information.
SERVICE MANUAL Field Service
501/421/361
2008.05
Ver. 1.0
FIELD SERVICE TOTAL CONTENTS
DF-613
OUTLINE ........................................................................................................................ 1
MAINTENANCE.............................................................................................................. 5
ADJUSTMENT/SETTING ............................................................................................. 21
* For particulars, see the contents of DF-613.
PC-206
OUTLINE ........................................................................................................................ 1
MAINTENANCE.............................................................................................................. 3
ADJUSTMENT/SETTING ............................................................................................. 15
* For particulars, see the contents of PC-206.
PC-407
OUTLINE ........................................................................................................................ 1
MAINTENANCE.............................................................................................................. 3
ADJUSTMENT/SETTING ............................................................................................. 19
* For particulars, see the contents of PC-407.
i
LU-203
OUTLINE ........................................................................................................................ 1
MAINTENANCE ............................................................................................................. 3
ADJUSTMENT/SETTING ............................................................................................. 23
* For particulars, see the contents of LU-203.
FS-522/PU-501/OT-602
OUTLINE ........................................................................................................................ 1
MAINTENANCE ............................................................................................................. 5
ADJUSTMENT/SETTING ............................................................................................. 19
* For particulars, see the contents of FS-522/PU-501/OT-602.
FS-523/RU-507
OUTLINE ........................................................................................................................ 1
MAINTENANCE ............................................................................................................. 5
ADJUSTMENT/SETTING ............................................................................................. 17
* For particulars, see the contents of FS-523/RU-507.
SD-507
OUTLINE ........................................................................................................................ 1
MAINTENANCE ............................................................................................................. 3
ADJUSTMENT/SETTING ............................................................................................. 29
* For particulars, see the contents of SD-507.
MT-502
OUTLINE ........................................................................................................................ 1
MAINTENANCE ............................................................................................................. 3
* For particulars, see the contents of MT-502.
JS-502
OUTLINE ........................................................................................................................ 1
MAINTENANCE ............................................................................................................. 3
* For particulars, see the contents of JS-502.
IC-207
OUTLINE ........................................................................................................................ 1
MAINTENANCE ............................................................................................................. 5
ADJUSTMENT / SETTING ............................................................................................. 9
TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................................................. 11
* For particulars, see the contents of IC-207.
ii
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
IMPORTANT NOTICE
Because of possible hazards to an inexperienced person servicing this product as well as
the risk of damage to the product, Konica Minolta Business Technologies, INC. (hereafter
called the KMBT) strongly recommends that all servicing be performed only by KMBT-
trained service technicians.
Changes may have been made to this product to improve its performance after this Service
Manual was printed. Accordingly, KMBT does not warrant, either explicitly or implicitly, that
the information contained in this Service Manual is complete and accurate.
The user of this Service Manual must assume all risks of personal injury and/or damage to
the product while servicing the product for which this Service Manual is intended.
Therefore, this Service Manual must be carefully read before doing service work both in the
course of technical training and even after that, for performing maintenance and control of
the product properly.
Keep this Service Manual also for future service.
Symbols used for safety and important warning items are defined as follows:
S-1
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
SAFETY WARNINGS
[1] MODIFICATIONS NOT AUTHORIZED BY KONICA MINOLTA
BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
Konica Minolta brand products are renowned for their high reliability. This reliability is
achieved through high-quality design and a solid service network.
Product design is a highly complicated and delicate process where numerous mechanical,
physical, and electrical aspects have to be taken into consideration, with the aim of arriving
at proper tolerances and safety factors. For this reason, unauthorized modifications involve
a high risk of degradation in performance and safety. Such modifications are therefore
strictly prohibited. The points listed below are not exhaustive, but they illustrate the reason-
ing behind this policy.
Prohibited Actions
DANGER
• Using any cables or power cord not specified by KMBT.
S-2
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
WARNING
• Use power supply cord set which meets the following
criteria:
AC230V
- provided with a plug having configuration intended for
the connection to wall outlet appropriate for the prod-
uct's rated voltage and current, and
- the plug has pin/terminal(s) for grounding, and
- provided with three-conductor cable having enough cur-
rent capacity, and
AC208V 240V
- the cord set meets regulatory requirements for the area.
Use of inadequate cord set leads to fire or electric shock.
• Attach power plug which meets the following criteria:
- having configuration intended for the connection to wall
outlet appropriate for the product's rated voltage and
current, and
- the plug has pin/terminal(s) for grounding, and
- meets regulatory requirements for the area.
Use of inadequate cord set leads to the product connect-
ing to inadequate power supply (voltage, current capacity,
grounding), and may result in fire or electric shock.
S-3
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
1. Power Supply
WARNING
• Check that mains voltage is as specified.
Connection to wrong voltage supply may result in fire or
electric shock. ?V
• Plug the power cord into the dedicated wall outlet with a
capacity greater than the maximum power consumption.
If excessive current flows in the wall outlet, fire may
result.
S-4
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
WARNING
• Check whether the product is grounded properly.
If current leakage occurs in an ungrounded product, you
may suffer electric shock while operating the product.
Connect power plug to grounded wall outlet.
WARNING
• When using the power cord set (inlet type) that came with
this product, make sure the connector is securely inserted
in the inlet of the product.
When securing measure is provided, secure the cord with
the fixture properly.
If the power cord (inlet type) is not connected to the prod-
uct securely, a contact problem may lead to increased
resistance, overheating, and risk of fire.
S-5
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
WARNING
• Check whether dust is collected around the power plug
and wall outlet.
Using the power plug and wall outlet without removing
dust may result in fire.
• Do not insert the power plug into the wall outlet with a wet
hand.
The risk of electric shock exists.
• When unplugging the power cord, grasp the plug, not the
cable.
The cable may be broken, leading to a risk of fire and
electric shock.
Wiring
WARNING
• Never use multi-plug adapters to plug multiple power cords
in the same outlet.
If used, the risk of fire exists.
S-6
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
2. Installation Requirements
WARNING
• Do not place the product near flammable materials or vola-
tile materials that may catch fire.
A risk of fire exists.
WARNING
• When the product is not used over an extended period of
time (holidays, etc.), switch it off and unplug the power
cord.
Dust collected around the power plug and outlet may
cause fire.
Ventilation
CAUTION
• The product generates ozone gas during operation, but it
will not be harmful to the human body.
If a bad smell of ozone is present in the following cases,
ventilate the room.
a. When the product is used in a poorly ventilated room
b. When taking a lot of copies
c. When using multiple products at the same time
Fixing
CAUTION
• Be sure to lock the caster stoppers.
In the case of an earthquake and so on, the product may
slide, leading to a injury.
S-7
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
3. Servicing
CAUTION
• Before conducting an inspection, read all relevant docu-
mentation (service manual, technical notices, etc.) and
proceed with the inspection following the prescribed pro-
cedure in safety clothes, using only the prescribed tools.
Do not make any adjustment not described in the docu-
mentation.
If the prescribed procedure or tool is not used, the prod-
uct may break and a risk of injury or fire exists.
WARNING
• Take every care when making adjustments or performing
an operation check with the product powered.
If you make adjustments or perform an operation check
with the external cover detached, you may touch live or
high-voltage parts or you may be caught in moving gears
or the timing belt, leading to a risk of injury.
S-8
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
Safety Checkpoints
WARNING
• When taking a report of problems from a user, check each
part and repair properly.
A risk of product trouble, injury, and fire exists.
• Check the exterior and frame for edges, burrs, and other
damages.
The user or CE may be injured.
• Do not allow any metal parts such as clips, staples, and
screws to fall into the product.
They can short internal circuits and cause electric shock
or fire.
S-9
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
Safety Checkpoints
WARNING
• When replacing a lithium battery, replace it with a new lith-
ium battery specified in the Parts Guide Manual. Dispose
of the used lithium battery using the method specified by
local authority.
Improper replacement can cause explosion.
• Make sure the wiring cannot come into contact with sharp
edges, burrs, or other pointed parts.
Current can leak, leading to a risk of electric shock or
fire.
• Make sure that all screws, components, wiring, connec-
tors, etc. that were removed for safety check and mainte-
nance have been reinstalled in the original location. (Pay
special attention to forgotten connectors, pinched cables,
forgotten screws, etc.)
A risk of product trouble, electric shock, and fire exists.
Handling of Consumables
WARNING
• Toner and developer are not harmful substances, but care
must be taken not to breathe excessive amounts or let the
substances come into contact with eyes, etc. It may be
stimulative.
If the substances get in the eye, rinse with plenty of water
immediately. When symptoms are noticeable, consult a
physician.
S-10
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
Handling of Consumables
WARNING
• Never throw the used cartridge and toner into fire.
You may be burned due to dust explosion.
CAUTION
• Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
Isopropyl alcohol and acetone are highly flammable and
must be handled with care. A risk of fire exists.
4. Fuse
Fuse
CAUTION
• CAUTION
Double pole / neutral fusing
• ATTENTION
Double pôle / Fusible sur le neutre
S-11
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
S-12
SAFETY INFORMATION
SAFETY INFORMATION
IMPORTANT NOTICE
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Admin-
istration implemented regulations for laser products manufactured since August 1, 1976.
Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the United States.
This copier is certified as a "Class 1" laser product under the U.S.
Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation Performance Standard
according to the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968. Since radiation emit-
ted inside this copier is completely confined within protective housings and external covers,
the laser beam cannot escape during any phase of normal user operation.
S-13
SAFETY INFORMATION
Finisher FS-522
50gap0e001nb
S-14
SAFETY INFORMATION
FS-523
50gap0e002nb
CAUTION:
• You may be burned or injured if you touch any area that you are advised by any
caution label to keep yourself away from. Do not remove caution labels. And also,
when the caution label is peeled off or soiled and cannot be seen clearly, replace
it with a new caution label.
S-15
MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT
S-16
Legal restrictions on copying
Certain types of originals must never be copied with the purpose or intent to pass copies of
such originals off as the originals.
The following is not a complete list, but is meant to be used as a guide to responsible copy-
ing.
<Financial Instruments>
• Personal checks
• Traveler’s checks
• Money orders
• Certificates of deposit
• Bonds or other certificates of indebtedness
• Stock certificates
<Legal Originals>
• Food stamps
• Postage stamps (canceled or uncanceled)
• Checks or drafts drawn by government agencies
• Internal revenue stamps (canceled or uncanceled)
• Passports
• Immigration papers
• Motor vehicle licenses and titles
• House and property titles and deeds
<General>
• Identification cards, badges, or insignias
• Copyrighted works without permission of the copyright owner
Detail
In order to prohibit the illegal reproduction of certain originals, such as paper currency, this
machine is equipped with a counterfeit prevention feature.
Due to the counterfeit prevention feature that this machine is equipped with, images may be
distorted.
C-1
Composition of the service manual
This service manual consists of the following sections and chapters:
This section gives, as information required by the CE at the site (or at the customer's
premise), a rough outline of the service schedule and its details, maintenance steps, the
object and role of each adjustment, error codes and supplementary information.
The details of items with an asterisk "*" are described only in the service manual of
the main body.
C-2
Notation of the service manual
A. Product name
In this manual, each of the products is described as follows:
B. Brand name
The company names and product names mentioned in this manual are the brand name or
the registered trademark of each company.
C-3
Classification Load symbol Ex. of signal name Description
24V Power to drive the motor
CONT Drive signal
DRV1
Motor M
DRV2
Drive signals of two kinds
D1
D2
_U
_V
_W
Drive signals (control signals) of three kinds
DRV1
DRV2
DRV3
D1
D2
D3
D4
DRV A
DRV A
DRV B Drive signals (control signals) of four kinds
DRV B Motor, phases A and B control signals
A
Motor M /A
B
/B
AB
BB
CLK, PLL PLL control signal
LCK, Lock, LD PLL lock signal
FR Forward/reverse rotation signal
EM, Lock, LCK, LD Motor lock abnormality
BLK Drive brake signal
P/S Power/stop
S/S
Operating load start/stop signal
SS
CW/CCW, F/R Rotational direction switching signal
ENB Effective signal
TEMP_ER Motor temperature abnormality detection signal
24V Power to drive the fan motor
CONT, DRIVE Drive signal
Fan FM
HL Speed control signal (2 speeds)
EM, Lock, LCK, FEM Detection signal
Others TH1.S, ANG Analog signal
C-4
Classification Load symbol Ex. of signal name Description
SG, S.GND, S_GND Signal ground
Ground
PG, P.GND Power ground
DCD Data carrier detection
SIN Serial input
SOUT Serial output
DTR Data terminal operation available
GND Signal ground (earth)
Serial com-
DSR, DSET Data set ready
munication
RTS Transmission request signal
CTS Consent transmission signal
RI Ring indicator
TXD Serial transmission data
RXD Serial reception data
<Example>
C-5
Blank Page
C-6
SERVICE MANUAL Field Service
501/421/361
Main body
2008.05
Ver. 1.0
Revision history
After publication of this service manual, the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for
improvement of their performance.
Therefore, the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine.
When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual, a revised version will be
issued with a revision mark added as required.
Revision mark:
• To indicate clearly a section revised, 1 is shown at the left margin of the revised section.
The number inside 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made.
• To indicate clearly a page that contains the revision, 1 is shown near the page number of the
corresponding page.
The number inside 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made.
NOTE
Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 3.0 only are shown with those for Ver. 2.0 deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has not been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 2.0 are left as they are.
CONTENTS
bizhub 501/421/361
bizhub 501/421/361
OUTLINE
1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
MAINTENANCE
3. PERIODIC CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
3.1 Maintenance item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
3.1.1 Main body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
3.1.2 DF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
3.1.3 PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
3.1.4 LU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
3.1.5 FS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
3.1.6 MT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
3.1.7 SD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
3.1.8 RU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
3.2 Replacement parts list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
3.2.1 Periodically replacement parts list (bizhub 501/421) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
3.2.2 Periodically replacement parts list (bizhub 361) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
3.3 Life value. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
3.3.1 Life value of materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
3.4 Maintenance procedure of the external section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
3.4.1 Replacing the ozone filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
3.4.2 Replacing the filter cover assy and the suction filter /A assy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
3.4.3 Replacing the paper exit suction filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
3.5 Maintenance procedure of the write section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
3.5.1 Replacing the write unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
3.6 Maintenance procedure of the photosensitive material section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
3.6.1 Replacing the drum unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
3.6.2 Replacing the drum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
3.7 Maintenance procedure of the transfer/separation corona section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
3.7.1 Replacing the transfer/separation corona unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
3.8 Maintenance procedure of the developing section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
3.8.1 Replacing the developing unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
3.8.2 Replacing developer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
3.9 Maintenance procedure of the toner supply section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
3.9.1 Replacing the filter mounting plate assy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
3.9.2 Replacing the suction cover /2 assy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
3.10 Cleaning/toner recycle section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
3.10.1 Replacing the cleaning blade assy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
3.11 Maintenance procedure of the paper feed section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
3.11.1 Replacing the feed roller/pick-up roller (tray 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
3.11.2 Replacing the separation roller assy (tray 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
3.11.3 Replacing the feed roller/pick-up roller (tray 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
3.11.4 Replacing the separation roller assy (tray 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
i
CONTENTS Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
ii
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 CONTENTS
bizhub 501/421/361
6.2 List of parts to be disassembled and reassembled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
6.3 Disassembling/assembling procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
6.3.1 Removing/reinstalling the rear cover /1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
6.3.2 Removing/reinstalling the rear cover /2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
6.3.3 Removing/reinstalling the rear cover /3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
6.3.4 Removing/reinstalling the rear cover /4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
6.3.5 Removing/reinstalling the right cover /Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
6.3.6 Removing/reinstalling the right cover /Lw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
6.3.7 Removing/reinstalling the left cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
6.3.8 Removing/reinstalling the front door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
6.3.9 Removing/reinstalling the original glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
6.3.10 Removing/reinstalling the upper covers /Fr and /Lt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
6.3.11 Removing/reinstalling the upper cover /Rr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
6.3.12 Removing/reinstalling the front cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
6.3.13 Removing/reinstalling the operation panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
6.3.14 Removing/reinstalling the CCD unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
6.3.15 Replacing the exposure lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
6.3.16 Removing/reinstalling the exposure unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
6.3.17 Stretching the scanner wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
6.3.18 Removing/reinstalling the toner supply unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
6.3.19 Removing/reinstalling the trays 1 and 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
6.4 Option counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
6.4.1 Configuration of the key counter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
6.4.2 Installation procedure of the key counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
ADJUSTMENT/SETTING
7. HOW TO USE THE ADJUSTMENT/SETTING SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
7.1 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
8. UTILITY MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
8.1 List of utility mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
9. LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
10. SERVICE MODE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
10.1 List of service mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
10.2 Setting Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
10.2.1 Start and exit of the service mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
10.3 Machine Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
10.3.1 Print Positioning: Leading Edge (Printer Area). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
10.3.2 Print Positioning: Side Edge (Printer Area) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
10.3.3 Paper Feed Direction Adj. (Printer Area) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
10.3.4 Printer Resist Loop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
10.3.5 Bypass Tray Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
10.3.6 Image Position: Leading Edge (Scan Area) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
10.3.7 Image Position: Side Edge (Scan Area). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
10.3.8 Cross Direction Adjustment (Scan Area) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
10.3.9 Feed Direction Adjustment (Scan Area) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
10.3.10 Lead Edge Erase Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
10.3.11 Non-Image Area Erase Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
10.4 Imaging Process Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
10.4.1 Charging Main Manual Adj. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
iii
CONTENTS Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
iv
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 CONTENTS
bizhub 501/421/361
10.11CS Remote Care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
10.11.1 Outlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
10.11.2 Setting Up the CS Remote Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
10.11.3 Software SW setting for CS Remote Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
10.11.4 Setup confirmation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
10.11.5 Calling the Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
10.11.6 Calling the Center from the Administrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
10.11.7 Checking the transmission log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
10.11.8 Detail on settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
10.11.9 List of the CS Remote Care error code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
10.11.10Troubleshooting for CS Remote Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
10.12System 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
10.12.1 Data Capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
10.12.2 Paper Size Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
10.12.3 DipSW Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
10.12.4 ISW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
10.12.5 Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
10.12.6 Network FAX Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
10.12.7 Trouble Reset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
10.12.8 Internet ISW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
10.13List Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
10.13.1 List output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
10.14Test Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
10.14.1 Test pattern list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
10.14.2 Test pattern output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
10.14.3 Running Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
10.15Fax setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
10.16Enhanced Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
10.16.1 The setting method of the security settting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
10.16.2 Enhanced Security function tree. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
10.16.3 CE Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
10.16.4 Administrator Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
10.16.5 Administrator Feature Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
10.16.6 CE Authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
10.16.7 Operation Ban release time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
10.16.8 Administrator unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
10.16.9 F Memory Lock PW Initialize. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
10.17Billing Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
10.17.1 Billing Setting function tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
10.17.2 Tree structure of the billing setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
10.17.3 Counter Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
10.17.4 Management Function Choice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
11. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
11.1 Mis-centering adjustment of the trays 1 and 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
11.2 Mis-centering adjustment of the bypass tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
TROUBLESHOOTING
12. JAM CODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
12.1 Jam code list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
v
CONTENTS Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
APPENDIX
14. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
14.1 Main body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
14.1.1 Switch/sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
14.1.2 Load. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
14.1.3 Boards and others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
14.2 DF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
14.3 PC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
14.3.1 PC-206 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
14.3.2 PC-407 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
14.4 LU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
14.5 FS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
14.5.1 FS-522 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
14.5.2 FS-523 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
14.6 PU-501 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
14.7 SD-507 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
14.8 MT-502 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
14.9 RU-507 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
14.10JS-502 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
15. CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
15.1 Main body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
15.1.1 Connector in the board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
15.2 DF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
15.2.1 Connector in the board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
15.3 PC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
15.3.1 Connector in the board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
15.4 LU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
15.4.1 Connector in the board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
15.5 FS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
15.5.1 Connector in the board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
15.6 SD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
15.6.1 Connector in the board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
15.7 MT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
15.7.1 Connector in the board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
16. TIMING CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
16.1 Main body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
16.2 DF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
16.3 LU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
16.4 FS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
16.4.1 FS-522 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
16.4.2 FS-523 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
17. OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM
17.1 Main body
17.2 Main body 1/4
17.3 Main body 2/4
17.4 Main body 3/4
17.5 Main body 4/4
vi
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 CONTENTS
17.6 DF
bizhub 501/421/361
17.7 PC
17.7.1 PC-206
17.7.2 PC-407
17.8 LU
17.9 FS
17.9.1 FS-522/PU-501
17.9.2 FS-523
17.10SD
17.11MT
vii
CONTENTS Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
bizhub 501/421/361
Blank page
viii
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
OUTLINE
bizhub 501/421/361
1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
A. System configuration
[1] [11]
[2] [12]
[3] [13]
[4]
[14]
[27] [5]
[26]
[6]
[25]
[24] [16]
[19]
[22] [20 ]
[23]
[15] [17]
[21]
[14] [18]
50gat1e001nd
*1 See "6.4 Option counter" in Field Service bizhub 501/421/361 main body for details.
*2 Dehumidifier heater is set up as service part.
*3 Swedish punch kit G is for Europe only.
1
1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
Note
• Any combination other than those listed below is not available.
2
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
bizhub 501/421/361
A. Type
3
2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
B. Functions
bizhub 501/421/361
4
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
bizhub 501/421/361
Write 600 x 600 dpi
Memory Standard 1024 MB
Additional 1024 MB*1
Interface section RJ45 Ethernet, Serial port (RS232-C), Serial port (USB TypeA x 3),
Serial port (USB TypeB) *2, RJ-11 *3
C. Type of paper
D. Maintenance
5
2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
E. Machine data
bizhub 501/421/361
F. Operating environment
Temperature 10 to 30 °C
Humidity 10 to 80%RH (with no condensation)
Note
• The information herein may be subject to change for improvement without notice.
6
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. PERIODIC CHECK
MAINTENANCE
bizhub 501/421/361
3. PERIODIC CHECK
3.1 Maintenance item
Note
• For the replacement procedure of periodically replaced parts, see "3.4 Maintenance procedure of
the external section" to "3.14 Maintenance procedure of the fusing section".
• The alcohol described in this section represents the isopropyl alcohol.
7
3. PERIODIC CHECK Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
8
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. PERIODIC CHECK
bizhub 501/421/361
No. Unit Description Quantity Implementation classification Materials
classification Cleaning Check Lubrication Replacement Tools used
1 Transfer/sep- Transfer/separation 1 z
aration sec- unit
tion 50GA-260
2 Fusing Fusing sensor assy 1 z
section 50GA-544
Fuse holder assy 1 z
26NA-535
Fusing claw assy 1 z
50GA-533
Fusing input gear assy 1 z
50GA-546
9
3. PERIODIC CHECK Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
3.1.2 DF
A. Maintenance 1 (Every 250,000 prints (bizhub501/421) / Every 225,000 prints (bizhub361))
10
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. PERIODIC CHECK
bizhub 501/421/361
No. Unit Description Quantity Implementation classification Materials
classification Cleaning Check Lubrication Replacement Tools used
1 Paper feed Pick-up roller 1 z Actual: 200,000 faces
section 16EA56020
Feed roller 1 z Actual: 200,000 faces
45823014
Separation roller 1 z Actual: 200,000 faces
45823047
3.1.3 PC
A. Maintenance 1 (Every 250,000 prints (bizhub501/421) / Every 225,000 prints (bizhub361))
11
3. PERIODIC CHECK Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
3.1.4 LU
bizhub 501/421/361
3.1.5 FS
A. Maintenance 1 (Every 250,000 prints (bizhub501/421) / Every 225,000 prints (bizhub361))
12
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. PERIODIC CHECK
3.1.6 MT
bizhub 501/421/361
A. Maintenance 1 (Every 250,000 prints (bizhub501/421) / Every 225,000 prints (bizhub361))
3.1.7 SD
A. Maintenance 1 (Every 250,000 prints (bizhub501/421) / Every 225,000 prints (bizhub361))
3.1.8 RU
A. Maintenance 1 (Every 250,000 prints (bizhub501/421) / Every 225,000 prints (bizhub361))
13
3. PERIODIC CHECK Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
Note
• For the replacement procedure of periodically replaced parts, see "3.4 Maintenance procedure of
the external section" to "3.14 Maintenance procedure of the fusing section".
• The parts count No. given in the table below represents the number of the fixed parts number in
the Service mode.
A. Main body
No. Classification Part name Part number Qt. Actual replace- Parts count Page
ment cycle No. referred to
1 Photo con- Drum DR510 1 250,000 P.28
2 ductor section Cleaning blade assy 50GA-209 1 250,000 P.42
3 Drum unit (without drum) 50GA-200 1 750,000 P.27
4 Transfer/ Transfer/separation unit 50GA-260 1 500,000 P.34
separation
section
5 Developing Developer DV511 1 250,000 P.36
6 section Developing unit 50GA-300 1 750,000 P.35
7 Main body Filter mounting plate assy 50GA-336 1 250,000 P.39
8 Ozon filter 50GA1031 1 250,000 P.19
9 Suction filter /A assy 40LA-318 1 250,000 P.20
10 Filter cover assy A0R5A124 1 250,000 P.20
11 Suction cover /2 assy 50GA-311 2 250,000 P.40
12 Paper feed Pick-up roller 40303005 2 300,000 P.44
section P.51
13 Feed roller 40303005 2 300,000 P.44
P.51
14 Separation roller assy 40300151 2 300,000 P.49
(Tray 1, 2) P.58
15 Bypass tray Paper feed roller 41313001 1 200,000 P.66
16 section Separation roller assy 40340151 1 200,000 P.63
17 Registration Loop roller 50GA3865 1 1,250,000 P.70
18 section Registration roller /Rt 50GA3848 1 1,250,000 P.70
19 Registration bearing /Rt 26NA4536 2 1,250,000 P.70
20 Registration bearing /Lt 26NA4537 2 1,250,000 P.70
21 Loop bearing 26NA4082 1 1,250,000 P.70
22 Fusing Fusing roller 50GE5303 1 250,000 P.88
23 section Fusing pressure roller 50GA5304 1 250,000 P.88
24 Fusing web 50GA-540 1 250,000 P.82
25 Heat insulating sleeve /A 26NA5372 2 250,000 P.88
26 Fusing bearing /Up 26NA5371 2 250,000 P.88
27 Fusing bearing /Lw 50GA5359 2 250,000 P.88
14
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. PERIODIC CHECK
No. Classification Part name Part number Qt. Actual replace- Parts count Page
bizhub 501/421/361
ment cycle No. referred to
28 Fusing Fusing sensor assy 50GA-544 1 500,000 P.92
29 section Fuse holder assy 26NA-535 1 500,000 P.94
30 Fusing claw assy 50GA-533 1 500,000 P.79
31 Fusing driven roller /A assy 40400326 2 250,000 P.84
32 Fusing driven roller /B assy 40400328 2 250,000 P.84
33 Fusing input gear assy 50GA-546 1 500,000 P.88
34 Paper reverse Paper exit suction filter 50GA4406 1 250,000 P.22
section
35 Write section Write unit A0R5A300 1 1,250,000 P.23
B. Option
No. Classification Part name Part number Qt. Actual replace- Parts count Page
ment cycle No. referred to
1 DF Pick-up roller 16EA56020 1 200,000 *1
2 Feed roller 45823014 1 200,000 *1
3 Separation roller 45823047 1 200,000 *2
4 PC Pick-up roller 40303005 1 300,000 *3
5 Feed roller 40303005 1 300,000 *4
6 Separation roller assy 40300151 1 300,000 *5
7 LU Pick-up rubber 40LA4009 1 200,000 *6
8 Feed rubber 26NA4011 1 200,000 *6
9 Separation rubber 26NA4012 1 200,000 *7
15
3. PERIODIC CHECK Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
Note
• For the replacement procedure of periodically replaced parts, see "3.4 Maintenance procedure of
the external section" to "3.14 Maintenance procedure of the fusing section".
• The parts count No. given in the table below represents the number of the fixed parts number in
the Service mode.
A. Main body
No. Classification Part name Part number Qt. Actual replace- Parts count Page
ment cycle No. referred to
1 Photo con- Drum DR510 1 225,000 P.28
2 ductor section Cleaning blade assy 50GA-209 1 225,000 P.42
3 Drum unit (without drum) 50GA-200 1 675,000 P.27
4 Transfer/ Transfer/separation unit 50GA-260 1 450,000 P.34
separation
section
5 Developing Developer DV511 1 225,000 P.36
6 section Developing unit 50GA-300 1 675,000 P.35
7 Main body Filter mounting plate assy 50GA-336 1 225,000 P.39
8 Ozon filter 50GA1031 1 225,000 P.19
9 Suction filter /A assy 40LA-318 1 225,000 P.20
10 Filter cover assy A0R5A124 1 225,000 P.20
11 Suction cover /2 assy 50GA-311 2 225,000 P.40
12 Paper feed Pick-up roller 40303005 2 300,000 P.44
section P.51
13 Feed roller 40303005 2 300,000 P.44
P.51
14 Separation roller assy 40300151 2 300,000 P.49
(Tray 1, 2) P.58
15 Bypass tray Paper feed roller 41313001 1 200,000 P.66
16 section Separation roller assy 40340151 1 200,000 P.63
17 Registration Loop roller 50GA3865 1 900,000 P.70
18 section Registration roller /Rt 50GA3848 1 900,000 P.70
19 Registration bearing /Rt 26NA4536 2 900,000 P.70
20 Registration bearing /Lt 26NA4537 2 900,000 P.70
21 Loop bearing 26NA4082 1 900,000 P.70
22 Fusing Fusing roller 50GA5303 1 225,000 P.88
23 section Fusing pressure roller 50GA5304 1 225,000 P.88
24 Fusing web 50GA-540 1 225,000 P.82
25 Heat insulating sleeve /A 26NA5372 2 225,000 P.88
26 Fusing bearing /Up 26NA5371 2 225,000 P.88
27 Fusing bearing /Lw 50GA5359 2 225,000 P.88
28 Fusing sensor assy 50GA-544 1 450,000 P.92
29 Fuse holder assy 26NA-535 1 450,000 P.94
16
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. PERIODIC CHECK
No. Classification Part name Part number Qt. Actual replace- Parts count Page
bizhub 501/421/361
ment cycle No. referred to
30 Fusing Fusing claw assy 50GA-533 1 450,000 P.79
31 section Fusing driven roller /A assy 40400326 2 225,000 P.84
32 Fusing driven roller /B assy 40400328 2 225,000 P.84
33 Fusing input gear assy 50GA-546 1 450,000 P.88
34 Paper reverse Paper exit suction filter 50GA4406 1 225,000 P.22
section
35 Write section Write unit 50GA-650 1 900,000 P.23
B. Option
No. Classification Part name Part number Qt. Actual replace- Parts count Page
ment cycle No. referred to
1 DF Pick-up roller 16EA56020 1 200,000 *1
2 Feed roller 45823014 1 200,000 *1
3 Separation roller 45823047 1 200,000 *2
4 PC Pick-up roller 40303005 1 300,000 *3
5 Feed roller 40303005 1 300,000 *4
6 Separation roller assy 40300151 1 300,000 *5
7 LU Pick-up rubber 40LA4009 1 200,000 *6
8 Feed rubber 26NA4011 1 200,000 *6
9 Separation rubber 26NA4012 1 200,000 *7
17
3. PERIODIC CHECK Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
18
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. PERIODIC CHECK
bizhub 501/421/361
3.4.1 Replacing the ozone filter
A. Periodically replaced part/cycle
• Ozone filter : Every 250,000 prints *1
: Every 225,000 prints *2
*1 501/421
*2 361
B. Procedure
1. Remove the right cover /Up.
(See P.136)
2. Remove the ozone filter [1].
Note
• When removing the ozone filter, be sure to
pull it out by holding it at the section indicated
by [2].
[1]
[2]
50gaf2c014na
19
3. PERIODIC CHECK Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
3.4.2 Replacing the filter cover assy and the suction filter /A assy
bizhub 501/421/361
B. Procedure
1. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the filter
cover assy [2].
[1]
[2]
50gaf2c015nb
[1] 50gaf2c016na
20
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. PERIODIC CHECK
Note
bizhub 501/421/361
• Be sure to install the suction filter /A assy
with the white filter face [1] inside.
[1] 50gaf2c017na
21
3. PERIODIC CHECK Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
B. Procedure
1. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the paper
exit suction filter cover [2].
[1]
[2]
a0r5f2c001ca
50gaf2c019na
22
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. PERIODIC CHECK
bizhub 501/421/361
3.5.1 Replacing the write unit
Warning
• Be sure not to turn on the write unit with it shifted from its regular installation position.
• Be absolutely sure not to remove the write unit cover. Otherwise, laser beams get in your eyes and
you may suffer loss of sight.
• Be absolutely sure not to remove the write unit for about 2 minutes after you turn off the main
power switch (SW1) or the power switch (SW2).
B. Procedure
1. Remove the developing unit from the main body.
[1]
(See P.35)
2. Remove the drum unit from the main body.
(See P.27)
3. Pull out the dust-proof glass cleaning rod [1].
4. Remove the cleaning knob [4] from the dust-proof
glass cleaning rod [1] by rotating it in the arrow-
marked direction [3] with the section indicated by
[2] as a fulcrum.
5. Replace the dust-proof glass cleaning rod [1] to its
original position.
Note
[2] • Be sure to push in fully the dust-proof glass
cleaning rod [1] so that it does not come in
contact with the main body frame when
[4] removing the unit.
[3]
50gaf2c020na
23
3. PERIODIC CHECK Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
[2] [1]
write cover [2].
Note
• When installing the write cover, be sure to set
the projections of the positioning [3] at 2
places into each of the holes of the frame.
50gaf2c022na
Note
• When installing the write section mounting
member assy [2], be sure to install it so that
the spring [3] gets straight.
24
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. PERIODIC CHECK
bizhub 501/421/361
11. Remove the 3 screws [2] and then remove the
write unit [3].
Note
• When removing the write unit, be sure to
avoid touching the dust-proof glass.
[3] [2]
[1]
50gaf2c024na
Note
• When installing the write unit [1], be sure to
take note of the position into which the dust-
proof sheet /A [2] is inserted.
• When checking the insertion of the sheet, be
sure to check it with the drum unit removed.
[1] [2]
50gaf2c025na
25
3. PERIODIC CHECK Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
Note
bizhub 501/421/361
[2] 50gaf2c026na
26
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. PERIODIC CHECK
bizhub 501/421/361
3.6.1 Replacing the drum unit
Note
• When removing the drum unit, be sure to hold it at both ends.
• When removing the drum unit, be sure to avoid holding it at the separation claw unit section.
• Be sure to avoid touching the drum with bare hands, and also be careful not to damage it.
• Be sure to avoid turning the drum in any direction other than in the specified direction.
• When storing the drum unit, be sure to store it in the dark place with a drum cover attached.
B. Procedure
1. Open ADU.
(See P.136)
2. Pull the lock release lever [1] to open the convey-
ance unit [2].
50gaf2c028na
27
3. PERIODIC CHECK Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
Note
• Be sure to avoid touching the drum and the cleaning blade with bare hands, and also be careful
not to damage them.
• When storing the drum, be sure to store it in the dark place with a drum cover attached.
• When installing the drum and the cleaning blade, be sure to apply setting powder to the circumfer-
ence of the drum and the cleaning blade, regardless of these parts being new or used ones.
• When setting powder is applied to the drum, be sure to conduct the following operations before
installing the drum unit to the main body.
1) With the charging corona unit removed, rotate the drum one full turn (to prevent setting powder
from splashing onto the charging corona unit and the image from getting defective.)
2) When installing a new drum, be sure to reset the drum counter in the service mode. Failing to
reset it may result in image fogging and toner splashing. (See P.205)
28
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. PERIODIC CHECK
B. Procedure
bizhub 501/421/361
1. Remove the drum unit from the main body.
(See P.27)
2. Remove the C-clip [1] and pull out the cleaning
[1]
rod [2].
Note
• When installing the cleaning rod, be sure to
take note of the direction of the C-clip.
[2]
[3]
50gaf2c029na
29
3. PERIODIC CHECK Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
[1] [3]
[2]
50gaf2c030na
30
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. PERIODIC CHECK
bizhub 501/421/361
mounting plate [2].
NG OK 7. Pull out the drum shaft [3] for removal.
Note
• When installing the drum shaft, be sure to
[2] [2] insert the drum shaft until the shaft mounting
plate comes into contact firmly with it as
shown in the drawing.
[3] [3] 8. Remove the 2 screws [4] and then remove the
bearing [5].
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
50gaf2c031nb
31
3. PERIODIC CHECK Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
10. Hold the drum [3] at both ends and remove it.
Note
[1] • When removing the drum, be careful not to
damage the photosensitive surface.
• When removing the drum, be careful not to hit
it against the metal frame section [4] of the
cleaning blade.
[3]
[4]
[2]
50gaf2c032na
32
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. PERIODIC CHECK
Note
[1]
bizhub 501/421/361
• When installing the drum, using the attached
jig [2] with the drum unit cover [1] before
installing the charging corona unit, rotate the
drum 1 full turn in the arrow-marked direction
[2]
[3]. And then check to see if setting powder is
not scraped off, and also if the toner collec-
tion sheet and the cleaning blade do not
turned up.
[2]
[3]
50gaf2c033nb
33
3. PERIODIC CHECK Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
B. Procedure
1. Open ADU.
[3]
(See P.136)
2. Open the conveyance unit.
(See P.27)
3. Release the lock levers [1] and [2] and remove the
transfer/separation corona unit [3].
4. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
34
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. PERIODIC CHECK
bizhub 501/421/361
3.8.1 Replacing the developing unit
A. Periodically replaced part/cycle
• Developing unit : Every 750,000 prints *1
: Every 675,000 prints *2
*1 501/421
*2 361
B. Procedure
1. Open the front door [1].
2. Loosen the screw [2] and remove the developing
unit [3].
3. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
[3] [1]
[2]
50gaf2c035na
35
3. PERIODIC CHECK Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
B. Procedure
1. Remove the developing unit from the main body.
[2]
(See P.35)
2. Release the locks [1] at 2 places and remove the
developing unit cover /1 [2].
[1]
50gaf2c036na
36
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. PERIODIC CHECK
Note
bizhub 501/421/361
• When installing the developing unit cover /1
[1], be sure to install it so that the splash pre-
vention sheet [2] does not get caught into the
developing roller [3].
[3] [2]
50gaf2c037na
37
3. PERIODIC CHECK Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
[1] [4]
ing gear [2] in the arrow-marked direction [3] to
discharge thoroughly developer in the developing
unit [1].
4. Clean developer and toner that adhere to the
developing roller [4].
Note
• Be absolutely sure not to turn the developing
gear [2] in any direction other than in the
arrow-marked direction [3]. (Never rotate it
clockwise as seen from the direction indi-
cated by [5].)
• If there remains any used developer on the
developing roller, this may cause image fog-
ging.
[5] [3] [2] 50gaf2c041na
38
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. PERIODIC CHECK
bizhub 501/421/361
3.9.1 Replacing the filter mounting plate assy
A. Periodically replaced part/cycle
• Filter mounting plate assy : Every 250,000 prints *1
: Every 225,000 prints *2
*1 501/421
*2 361
B. Procedure
1. Remove the developing unit from the main body.
[2] [1]
(See P.35)
2. Open ADU.
(See P.136)
3. Open the conveyance unit.
(See P.27)
4. Remove the drum unit from the main body.
(See P.27)
5. Release the lock levers [1] at 2 places and remove
the filter mounting plate assy [2].
6. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
procedure in reverse.
[1] [2]
50gaf2c043na
39
3. PERIODIC CHECK Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
B. Procedure
1. Remove the developing unit from the main body.
(See P.35)
2. Open ADU.
(See P.136)
3. Open the conveyance unit.
(See P.27)
4. Remove the drum unit from the main body.
[3] (See P.27)
5. Remove the front cover from the main body.
(See P.142)
6. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the rail [2].
Note
• When installing the rail, be sure first to insert
the tip into the notch [3].
[2]
[1]
50gaf2c044na
40
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. PERIODIC CHECK
bizhub 501/421/361
[1]
8. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
50gaf2c045na
41
3. PERIODIC CHECK Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
Note
• Be sure to avoid touching the edge section of the cleaning blade assy with bare hands.
• When installing the cleaning blade assy, be sure to apply setting powder to the circumference of
the drum and the cleaning blade, regardless of these parts being new or used ones.
• When setting powder is applied to the drum, be sure to conduct the following operations before
installing the drum unit to the main body.
1) With the charging corona unit removed, rotate the drum 1 full turn (to prevent setting powder
from splashing onto the charging corona unit and the image from getting defective.)
B. Procedure
1. Remove the developing unit from the main body.
[1] (See P.35)
2. Open ADU.
(See P.136)
3. Open the conveyance unit.
(See P.27)
4. Remove the drum unit from the main body.
(See P.27)
5. Remove the drum from the drum unit.
[2] (See P.28)
50gaf2c046na
6. Remove the 2 screws [1] and then remove the
cleaning blade presser plate [2].
50gaf2c047na
42
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. PERIODIC CHECK
Note
bizhub 501/421/361
[1]
• When installing the cleaning blade assy [1], be
sure to insert the transparent sheet section
[2] of the unit the between the collection
screw [3] and the collection paddle [4].
[3] [2]
[4]
[1]
50gaf2c048na
43
3. PERIODIC CHECK Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
B. Procedure
1. Remove the front cover.
(See P.142)
2. Remove the tray 1.
(See P.159)
3. Remove the connector [1] and the 2 screws [2],
and then remove the paper feed unit /1 [3].
[2]
[1]
[3]
[2]
50gaf2c108na
44
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. PERIODIC CHECK
Note
bizhub 501/421/361
[3] [2]
• When installing the paper feed unit /1 [1], be
sure to set the shafts [2] and [3] to the holes
[4] and [5].
[5] [1]
[4] 50gaf2c109na
45
3. PERIODIC CHECK Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
[2] [3][4]
[1]
50gaf2c110na
[3]
[1]
[4]
50gaf2c111na
46
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. PERIODIC CHECK
bizhub 501/421/361
ing [2].
[1] 8. Detach the hook [4] of the spring [3] from the
oblong hole [5].
9. Remove the bearing [6] and then remove the
paper feed roller unit [7].
[2]
Note
• When attaching the spring, be sure to put the
hook into the oblong hole (not into the round
hole [8]).
[8] [7]
[5]
[4]
[6]
[3]
50gaf2c161na
10. Remove the E-ring [1] and then remove the bear-
[4] [1]
ing [2].
11. Remove the bearing [3] and then remove the feed
roller assy [4].
[2]
[3] 50gaf2c162na
47
3. PERIODIC CHECK Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
12. Remove the C-ring [1] and then remove the feed
bizhub 501/421/361
roller [2].
[1]
[2] 50gaf2c163na
[1] [2]
[1]
[3] [2] 50gaf2c164na
15. Remove the C-ring [1] and then remove the pick-
[2] [1] up roller [2].
16. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
50gaf2c113na
48
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. PERIODIC CHECK
bizhub 501/421/361
A. Periodically replaced part/cycle
• Separation roller assy : Every 750,000 prints (Actual replacement cycle: Every 300,000 prints) *1
: Every 675,000 prints (Actual replacement cycle: Every 300,000 prints) *2
*1 501/421
*2 361
B. Procedure
1. Remove the tray 1.
[1] (See P.159)
2. Remove the paper feed unit /1.
(See P.44)
3. Remove the separation roller unit /1.
(See P.44)
4. Remove the 2 screws [1] and then remove the
[2] [3] separation roller mounting plate assy [2].
50gaf2c117na
Note
• When installing the separation roller mount-
ing plate assy, be sure to fasten it with screws
while pressing it in the arrow-marked direc-
tion [3].
5. Remove the 2 C-rings [1] and pull out the shaft [2].
6. Remove the separation roller mounting plate [3].
[1]
Note
• When removing the separation roller mount-
[2] ing plate, be careful that the spring [4] does
[1] not get lost since it is apt to come off.
• When installing the separation roller mount-
ing plate, be sure to install it so that it comes
under the projection [5].
49
3. PERIODIC CHECK Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
[1] [3]
[2]
50gaf2c119na
50
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. PERIODIC CHECK
bizhub 501/421/361
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Feed roller : Every 750,000 prints (Actual replacement cycle: Every 300,000 prints) *1
: Every 675,000 prints (Actual replacement cycle: Every 300,000 prints) *2
• Pick-up roller : Every 750,000 prints (Actual replacement cycle: Every 300,000 prints) *1
: Every 675,000 prints (Actual replacement cycle: Every 300,000 prints) *2
*1 501/421
*2 361
B. Procedure
1. Remove the bypass unit.
(See P.60)
2. Pull out the tray 2 [1].
[1]
50gaf2c120na
[3]
51
3. PERIODIC CHECK Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
[1]
[1]
50gaf2c123na
52
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. PERIODIC CHECK
bizhub 501/421/361
[2]
8. Remove the 3 screws [2] and then remove the
paper feed unit /2 [3].
[1]
[3]
[2]
50gaf2c124na
53
3. PERIODIC CHECK Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
[3] [4]
[2] [3]
50gaf2c126na
54
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. PERIODIC CHECK
bizhub 501/421/361
13. Remove the C-ring [2] and then remove the feed
clutch /2 (CL5) [3].
Note
• When installing CL5, be sure to set the stop-
per [4] to the guide plate [5].
[3]
[2] [5]
[4]
[1]
50gaf2c127na
55
3. PERIODIC CHECK Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
14. Detach the hook [2] of the spring [1] from the
bizhub 501/421/361
[6]
[4]
[4] [5] 50gaf2c165na
17. Remove the E-ring [1] and then remove the bear-
[4] [1]
ing [2].
18. Remove the bearing [3] and then remove the feed
roller assy [4].
56
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. PERIODIC CHECK
19. Remove the C-ring [1] and then remove the feed
bizhub 501/421/361
roller [2].
[1]
[2] 50gaf2c167na
[1] [2]
[1]
[3] [2] 50gaf2c168na
22. Remove the C-ring [1] and then remove the pick-
[2] [1] up roller [2].
23. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
50gaf2c129na
57
3. PERIODIC CHECK Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
B. Procedure
1. Remove the bypass unit.
(See P.60)
2. Pull out the tray 2.
3. Remove the vertical conveyance door.
(See P.51)
4. Remove the conveyance roller cover.
(See P.51)
5. Remove the paper feed guide /2.
[1] [2] [1]
(See P.51)
6. Remove the paper feed unit /2.
(See P.51)
7. Remove the separation roller unit /2.
(See P.51)
8. Remove the 2 screws [1] and then remove the
separation roller mounting plate assy [2].
Note
[3] • When installing the separation roller mount-
50gaf2c133na
ing plate assy, be sure to fasten it with screws
while pressing it in the arrow-marked direc-
tion [3].
58
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. PERIODIC CHECK
9. Remove the 2 C-rings [1] and pull out the shaft [2].
bizhub 501/421/361
10. Remove the separation roller mounting plate [3].
[1]
Note
• When removing the separation roller mount-
[2] ing plate, be careful that the spring [4] does
[1] not get lost since it is apt to come off.
• When installing the separation roller mount-
ing plate, be sure to install it so that it comes
under the projection [5].
[1] [3]
[2]
50gaf2c135na
59
3. PERIODIC CHECK Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
[5]
60
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. PERIODIC CHECK
bizhub 501/421/361
5. Remove the screw [2] and then remove the
ground terminal [3].
6. Remove the 5 screws [4] and then remove the
bypass unit [5].
[5]
[4] 50gaf2c002na
61
3. PERIODIC CHECK Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
steps in reverse.
8. After installing the bypass unit, open the tray 2
paper feed guide [1] and the bypass feed guide [2]
in the arrow-marked direction [3] to check to see if
they operate smoothly.
50gaf2c003na
62
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. PERIODIC CHECK
bizhub 501/421/361
A. Periodically replaced part/cycle
• Separation roller assy : Every 750,000 prints (Actual replacement cycle: Every 300,000 prints) *1
: Every 675,000 prints (Actual replacement cycle: Every 300,000 prints) *2
*1 501/421
*2 361
Note
• When replacing the separation roller assy, be sure also to replace the feed roller at the same time.
B. Procedure
1. Remove the bypass unit.
[2] [2]
(See P.60)
2. Remove the 2 springs [1].
3. Remove the 5 screws [2].
[2]
[1] 50gaf2c004na
63
3. PERIODIC CHECK Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
4. Detach the hook [1] from the hole [2] and remove
bizhub 501/421/361
[1] [2]
50gaf2c005na
Note
[1] [3] [1]
• When installing the push-up plate assy, be
sure to install it while pressing the push-up
plate [3] so that each of the springs [1] does
not comes off each cross-headed boss [2].
64
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. PERIODIC CHECK
bizhub 501/421/361
separation roller fixing plate assy [2].
50gaf2c007na
Note
• When removing the holder [1], the spring [4]
provided under the holder is apt to come off.
Be careful that it does not get lost.
• When installing the holder [1], be sure to
install it so that it comes under the projection
[5].
[2] 50gaf2c008na
[2] 50gaf2c009na
65
3. PERIODIC CHECK Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
Note
• When replacing the feed roller, be sure also to replace the separation roller assy at the same time.
B. Procedure
1. Remove the bypass unit.
(See P.60)
2. Remove the push-up plate assy.
(See P.63)
3. Press the conveyance guide [1] in the arrow-
marked direction [2] to remove the support axis [3]
from the hole [4], and then remove the convey-
ance guide.
[1] 50gaf2c010na
66
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. PERIODIC CHECK
bizhub 501/421/361
then remove the paper roller cover [3].
Note
• When installing CL6, be sure to set the stop-
per [3] to the guide plate [4].
[4] 50gaf2c170na
[1] 50gaf2c171na
67
3. PERIODIC CHECK Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
ing [2].
8. Remove the bearing [3] and slide the shaft [4].
50gaf2c172na
Note
• When installing the feed roller, be sure to take
note of the direction of the arrow mark [4].
50gaf2c173na
68
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. PERIODIC CHECK
bizhub 501/421/361
3.13.1 Cleaning the paper dust removing brush
A. Periodic cleaning cycle
• Paper dust removing brush : Every 250,000 prints *1
: Every 225,000 prints *2
*1 501/421
*2 361
B. Procedure
1. Open ADU.
[2]
(See P.136)
2. Open the conveyance unit.
(See P.27)
3. Remove the developing unit from the main body.
(See P.35)
4. Remove the drum unit from the main body.
(See P.27)
5. Remove the suction cover /2 assy.
(See P.40)
6. With the lever [1] pulled, remove the paper dust
removing brush [2] and clean the paper dust
removing brush with a blower brush.
[1]
7. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
50gaf2c174na
steps in reverse.
69
3. PERIODIC CHECK Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
3.13.2 Replacing the loop roller, the loop bearing, the registration roller /Rt, and the registration
bizhub 501/421/361
B. Procedure
1. Open ADU.
(See P.136)
2. Open the conveyance unit.
(See P.27)
3. Remove the developing unit from the main body.
(See P.35)
4. Remove the drum unit from the main body.
(See P.27)
5. Remove the front cover from the main body.
(See P.142)
6. Remove the suction cover /2 assy.
(See P.40)
[1] 7. Remove the 2 connectors [1].
50gaf2c175na
70
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. PERIODIC CHECK
bizhub 501/421/361
ADU drive assy [2].
Note
• When installing the ADU drive assy, be sure to
set the stopper [4] of the registration clutch
(CL1) [3] to the guide plate [5].
[2] [1]
[3]
[1]
[3]
[4]
[5]
50gaf2c154nb
71
3. PERIODIC CHECK Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
Note
• When installing the 2 C-clips [6], be sure to
install them with their collars come face to
face each other.
13. Remove the C-clip [8] and then remove the bear-
ing [9].
[10] [3] [4] [7] 14. Remove the registration unit [10].
72
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. PERIODIC CHECK
bizhub 501/421/361
[6] [5] [4] [3]
16. Remove the E-ring [3] and then remove the loop
clutch (CL2) [4].
Note
• When installing CL2, be sure to set the stop-
per [5] to the screw [6].
17. Remove the screw [7] and then remove the regis-
tration main body assy [8].
[8]
50gaf2c156na
73
3. PERIODIC CHECK Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
bearings [2].
19. Remove the loop roller [3].
20. Remove the 2 loop bearings from the loop roller.
50gaf2c157nb
74
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. PERIODIC CHECK
bizhub 501/421/361
22. Remove the E-rings [2], 1 each, and then remove
the 2 registration bearings /Lt [3].
23. Remove the registration roller /Lt [4].
Note
• When attaching the spring, be sure to couple
the hook [5] of the spring at the position as
shown in the drawing left.
75
3. PERIODIC CHECK Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
[2] [1]
50gaf2c159nb
76
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. PERIODIC CHECK
bizhub 501/421/361
3.14.1 Removing/reinstalling the fusing unit
Caution
• Since the fusing section gets hot immediately after turning off the main power switch (SW1) or the
power switch (SW2), you may suffer a burn. Be sure to conduct the operations when the tempera-
ture goes down sufficiently.
A. Procedure
1. Open ADU.
[2] [1]
(See P.136)
2. Remove the right cover /Up.
(See P.136)
3. Open the conveyance unit.
(See P.27)
4. Loosen the screw [1] and remove the front auxil-
iary cover [2].
50gaf2c085nb
77
3. PERIODIC CHECK Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
[4] 6. Remove the screw [2] and then remove the filter
cover [3].
7. Remove the 2 screws [4].
[1]
8. Loosen the 2 screws [5]. And after sliding the
entire reverse unit [6] in the arrow-marked direc-
tion [7], tilt the front side in the arrow-marked
direction [8] for removal.
[4]
50gaf2c086na
78
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. PERIODIC CHECK
bizhub 501/421/361
fusing unit [2].
Note
• When lifting the fusing unit, be sure to hold it
at both ends.
• When installing/removing it, be careful not to
damage rollers.
[1] 50gaf2c087na
B. Procedure
1. Remove the fusing unit.
(See P.77)
2. Remove the C-clip [1].
3. Open the fusing front guide assy [2].
79
3. PERIODIC CHECK Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
[1] 50gaf2c089na
80
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. PERIODIC CHECK
bizhub 501/421/361
6. Remove the screw [2] and raise the fusing claw
assy [3].
7. Remove the connector [4] from the fusing claw
assy.
Note
• When installing the fusing claw assy, be care-
[1] ful not to neglect attaching the connector [4].
• When installing the fusing claw assy, be sure
to insert the positioning sections [6] at 2
places into each of the projections [7].
• When installing the fusing claw assy, be care-
ful not to damage the roller surface with the
tip of the claw.
[2] [5] [4] 8. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
50gaf2c091na
81
3. PERIODIC CHECK Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
B. Procedure
1. Remove the fusing unit.
[4] [2]
(See P.77)
2. Remove the fusing claw assy.
(See P.79)
3. Remove the screw [1].
4. Remove the 5 screws [2].
5. Apply pressure from the inside of the ducts [3] at 2
places to release the lock and remove the fusing
web [4].
Note
• When installing the fusing web, be sure to
[1] [5] [3] install the screw [1] first.
50gaf2c092na
Note
[2]
• When installing the fusing web, be sure to
insert the projections [1] at 2 places into the
positioning holes [2].
[1] 50gaf2c093na
82
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. PERIODIC CHECK
bizhub 501/421/361
guaranteed from the position at which a
brown line [2] is broken. When replacing the
fusing web, be sure to take up the fusing web
up to the position at which the distance [5]
from the nip section [4] of the fusing roller [3]
and the fusing web to the brown line becomes
0 to 10 mm or less.
• When taking up the fusing web, be sure to
[4] [3]
bring down the release lever [6] to release the
cleaner lock gear [7] and rotate the web drive
gear [8].
• When replacing the fusing web, be sure to
reset the fusing web counter in the service
mode.
(See P.205)
[1]
83
3. PERIODIC CHECK Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
B. Procedure
Note
[8] • When removing the fusing unit cover /Rr, be
careful that the internal gear does not fall
down.
Note
• When installing the fusing casing [8], be sure
to install first the screw [5] (upper side).
84
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. PERIODIC CHECK
bizhub 501/421/361
10. Remove the 2 fusing driven roller assy's /A [2] and
the 2 fusing driven roller assy's /B [3].
Note
• The gear [4] is not fixed. Take care when mov-
ing it.
[1]
[4]
50gaf2c096na
85
3. PERIODIC CHECK Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
Note
• Be careful not to touch the lamp sections of L2 and L3 with bare hands. When touched, be sure to
clean them with a roller cleaner.
A. Procedure
1. Remove the fusing unit.
[1]
(See P.77)
2. Remove the fusing claw assy from the fusing unit.
(See P.79)
3. Remove the fusing web from the fusing unit.
(See P.82)
4. Remove the fusing casing.
(See P.84)
5. Remove the fastons [1] and [2], 2 each.
Note
• When removing the faston, be sure to remove
it by holding the connector section. Be abso-
lutely sure not to pull out by holding the wiring
harness section.
[2] 50gaf2c097na
86
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. PERIODIC CHECK
[8] [1]
6. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the lamp
bizhub 501/421/361
fixing plate /Fr [2].
7. Pull out the fusing heater lamps /1 (L2) [3] and /2
(L3) [4] in the arrow-marked direction [5] and
remove them.
Note
• When installing each of the fusing heater
lamps, be sure to set the projections [6] of
each lamp to the notch [7] of the lamp fixing
plate /Fr [2].
• After installing each of the fusing heater
lamps, be sure to check to see if it is not in
touch with the inner face of the fusing roller
[8].
[5] [3] [2] • Be sure to install the fusing heater lamp L2 [3]
(main) on the upper side with L3 [4] (sub) on
the lower side.
Note
• When installing the fusing heater lamp, be
sure to take note of the direction of installa-
tion.
Lamp Destination
North America Europe/Others
[7] [6] [4] 50gaf2c098na
Fr Rr Fr Rr
L2 Red Red Blue Blue
L3 Red Black Blue Black
87
3. PERIODIC CHECK Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
3.14.6 Replacing the fusing roller, the fusing pressure roller, the heat insulating sleeve /A, the fusing
bizhub 501/421/361
bearings /Up and /Lw and the fusing input gear assy
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Fusing roller : Every 250,000 prints *1
: Every 225,000 prints *2
• Fusing pressure roller : Every 250,000 prints *1
: Every 225,000 prints *2
• Heat insulating sleeve /A : Every 250,000 prints *1
: Every 225,000 prints *2
• Fusing bearing /Up : Every 250,000 prints *1
: Every 225,000 prints *2
• Fusing bearing /Lw : Every 250,000 prints *1
: Every 225,000 prints *2
• Fusing input gear assy : Every 500,000 prints *1
: Every 450,000 prints *2
*1 501/421
*2 361
88
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. PERIODIC CHECK
B. Procedure
bizhub 501/421/361
1. Remove the fusing unit.
[7] [8] [6] [5] (See P.77)
2. Remove the fusing claw assy from the fusing unit.
(See P.79)
3. Remove the fusing web from the fusing unit.
(See P.82)
4. Remove the fusing casing.
(See P.84)
[1] [4] 5. Remove the fusing heater lamps /1 (L2) and /2
(L3).
(See P.86)
6. Remove the 2 screws [1] and then remove the
lamp fixing plate /Rr [2].
7. Remove the 2 screws [3] and then remove the
fusing input gear assy [4].
Note
• When installing the fusing input gear assy, be
sure to set the D cut section [6] of the shaft
[5] to the D cut hole [8] of the frame [7].
[9] 50gaf2c099na
89
3. PERIODIC CHECK Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
[2].
10. Remove the heat insulating sleeve /A [3] and the
fusing bearing /Up [4].
Note
• When installing the heat insulating sleeve /A
and the fusing bearing /Up, be sure to install
[4] [3] [10]
them with their respective collar [5] outside.
• When installing the heat insulating sleeve /A,
be sure to apply Multemp FF-RM to its inside
and outside peripheries.
11. Remove the C-ring [6] and then remove the heat
insulating sleeve /A [7] and the fusing bearing /Up
[8].
Note
• When installing the heat insulating sleeve /A
[12] [11] [7] [8] and the fusing bearing /Up, be sure to install
them with their respective collar [9] outside.
• When installing the heat insulating sleeve /A,
be sure to apply Multemp FF-RM to its inside
and outside peripheries.
[1] 50gaf2c101na
90
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. PERIODIC CHECK
bizhub 501/421/361
fusing pressure roller [1].
Note
• When installing the fusing bearing /Lw, be
sure to install it with its collar section [3]
inside. Coat the cored bar section with
grease.
[1] 50gaf2c102na
91
3. PERIODIC CHECK Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
Caution
• After installing the fusing sensor assy, be sure to check to see if it is in touch with the fusing roller.
B. Procedure
1. Remove the fusing unit.
[1] [3] [2]
(See P.77)
2. Remove the fusing claw assy from the fusing unit.
(See P.79)
3. Remove the fusing web from the fusing unit.
(See P.82)
4. Remove the fusing casing.
(See P.84)
5. Remove the fusing heater lamps /1 (L2) and /2
(L3).
(See P.86)
6. Remove the fusing roller and the fusing pressure
roller.
[4] (See P.88)
7. Remove the faston [1].
Note
• When removing the faston, be sure to remove
it by holding its base section. Be absolutely
sure not to pull it out by holding the wiring
harness section.
50gaf2c104na
92
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. PERIODIC CHECK
bizhub 501/421/361
the fusing sensor assy [2].
Note
• When installing the fusing sensor assy, be
careful not to deform the sensor section.
• After installing the fusing sensor assy, be sure
to check to see if the wiring harness is not in
touch with the fusing roller.
Caution
• After installing the fusing sensor assy, be sure
[1] 50gaf2c105na
to check to see if the thermistors /1 (TH1) and
/2 (TH2) are in touch with the fusing roller.
Note
[1]
• The fusing sensor assy is made up of TH1 and
TH2. The sections of TH1 and TH2 have been
adjusted when they were assembled, and be
absolutely sure not to loosen the screw [1].
50gaf2c106na
93
3. PERIODIC CHECK Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
Caution
• After installing the fuse holder assy, be sure to check to see if it is in touch with the fusing roller.
B. Procedure
1. Remove the fusing unit. (See P.77)
[1] [4] [3]
2. Remove the fusing claw assy from the fusing unit.
(See P.79)
3. Remove the fusing web from the fusing unit.
(See P.82)
4. Remove the fusing casing. (See P.84)
5. Remove the fusing heater lamps /1 (L2) and /2
(L3). (See P.86)
6. Remove the fusing roller and the fusing pressure
roller. (See P.88)
7. Pull out the web support assy /2. (See P.92)
8. Remove the faston [1].
[2] 50gaf2c107na
Note
• When removing the faston, be sure to remove
it by holding its base section. Be absolutely
sure not to pull it out by holding the wiring
harness section.
Note
• When installing the fuse holder assy, be care-
ful not to deform the thermostat section.
• After installing the fuse holder assy, be sure
to check to see if the wiring harness is not in
touch with the fusing roller.
Caution
• After installing the fuse holder assy, be sure
to check to see if the thermostat (TS) [4] is in
touch with the fusing roller.
94
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 4. SERVICE TOOLS
4. SERVICE TOOLS
bizhub 501/421/361
4.1 Service material list
Material No. Name Shape Remark
000V-19-0 Setting powder 25 g
95
4. SERVICE TOOLS Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
96
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 4. SERVICE TOOLS
bizhub 501/421/361
00VE-1005 Tester 1
4.3 Materials
A. Item
97
5. FIRMWARE VERSION UP Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
5. FIRMWARE VERSION UP
bizhub 501/421/361
5.1 ISW
5.1.1 Outline
A. ISW (In-System Writer)
The operation to rewrite firmware stored in the flash ROM that is built in each control board in the main body
with the board left built in the main body is called an ISW. Executing ISW allows you to upgrade the firmware ver-
sion without replacing the board, or install the latest firmware when replacing the board. ISW can be executed
by both ways; USB ISW using local USB memory and Internet ISW using the internet.
USB memory Overall control board (OACB) Printer control board (PRCB) DF control board (DFCB)
Network FS control board (FSCB)
FAX control board (FK-502)
When executing the ISW over the entire system, be sure to execute it in the order given below. (To minimize the
occurrence of troubles resulting from the mismatch of the firmware version)
Note
• When replacing the OACB, be sure to conduct the ISW of the MFP controller first. When the firm-
ware of the MFP controller is not contained in the OACB, no display is shown on the touch panel.
• The finisher above refers to the FS-522. The ISW of the FS-523 is conducted by changing the
EPROM.
98
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 5. FIRMWARE VERSION UP
C. When writing the firmware afresh (When replacing the board or when failed in rewriting the firm-
bizhub 501/421/361
ware)
For the overall control board (OACB), when something is wrong with the firmware or no firmware is written, the
normal start-up cannot be made. In a case like this, when the power switch is ON, the power LED turns ON with
nothing shown on the touch panel, and the system is placed in the firmware stand-by mode. In this case, con-
tact the service manager of the authorized distributor.
For other boards, when the firmware of the MFP controller is normal and something is wrong with other firm-
ware, an ISW error is shown on the touch panel section when the power is turned ON.
Item Specifications
Board to be rewritten Overall control board (OACB), Printer control board (PRCB), FAX control
board (FK-502), FS control board (FSCB), DF control board (DFCB)
Rewritable firmware MFP controller
Operation panel message data
Image controller
FAX board controller 1
FAX board controller 2
Finisher
ADF
Note
• For boards other than the above, ROM replacement is required.
99
5. FIRMWARE VERSION UP Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
5.2.1 Outline
Conduct the ISW locally by connecting the USB memory to the USB port of the main body.
5.2.2 SPECIFICATIONS
A. Parts required to conduct the USB ISW
• USB memory : 1 pcs
Note
• Create the bizhub501, bizhub421 or bizhub361 folder directly under the USB memory route.
• When copying the firmware to the memory, be sure to copy ".bin" file and ".sum" file at the same
time.
• Be sure to copy the files of each firmware to the USB memory in the configuration of the folders
shown in the below.
• If the copying is not completed correctly, a message " The data is not found" is displayed on the
panel when the ISW files are selected.
100
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 5. FIRMWARE VERSION UP
bizhub 501/421/361
This mode is used when the OACB operates properly.
Note
• To execute the ISW, be sure to turn ON the Main power switch (SW1) of the main body and the
Sub-power switch (SW2). If the power were turned ON after the connection had done while the
power OFF, USB Memory may not be recognized.
Step Operation
1 Enter the Service mode.
2 Press the [Firmware Version] in "Service mode screen".
3 Indication of "Firmware Version screen"
101
5. FIRMWARE VERSION UP Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
B. ISW execution
bizhub 501/421/361
Step Operation
1 Insert the USB memory into the USB port /1 [1] or 2 [2] at the rear side of the main body.
[1]
[2]
a0r5f2c002ca
[1]
a0r5f2e001ca
102
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 5. FIRMWARE VERSION UP
Step Operation
bizhub 501/421/361
5 Press [ISW].
6 "ISW screen"
Press the [Board Type Selection].
103
5. FIRMWARE VERSION UP Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
Step Operation
bizhub 501/421/361
104
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 5. FIRMWARE VERSION UP
Step Operation
bizhub 501/421/361
10 Press the [Execution Check screen].
Note
• Press [OK] to stop the ISW.
Note
• When the message "Writing data. Do not turn off the power source" displayed and
flashing the data lamp (blue) during executing the ISW, never turn OFF the Main power
switch (SW1) and Sub-power switch (SW2). It may damage the firmware in the ROM.
105
5. FIRMWARE VERSION UP Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
Step Operation
bizhub 501/421/361
13 To execute the ISW of other firmware, press [OK] and repeat steps 6 to 12.
14 Turn OFF Main power switch (SW1) and wait 10 seconds, and then turn ON again.
106
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 5. FIRMWARE VERSION UP
bizhub 501/421/361
After executing the ISW, check each firmware is updated.
About the firmwares of MFP Controller and Operation Panel Message Data, check the [Check Sum] to see if the
ROM has been rewritten normally.
Step Operation
1 Enter the Service mode.
2 Press the [Firmware Version] in "Service mode screen".
3 Indication of "Firmware Version screen"
Check the version information and press [Check Sum].
4 Check whether the checksum value of 4 digits is same as the alphanumeric code shown in the
PRI (Program Release Information).
[1]
a0r5f2e002ca
Note
• The checksum value of the MFP controller is always same regardless of the destination.
• The checksum value of the operation panel message data varies according to the destina-
tion.
107
5. FIRMWARE VERSION UP Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
108
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 5. FIRMWARE VERSION UP
bizhub 501/421/361
5.3.1 Outline
• Internet ISW is the function which enables the main body to acquire the firmware for rewriting automatically
from the program server through the Internet when the updating is ordered from the operation panel.
By using Internet ISW, the firmware can be updated at the customer without taking firmware data.
The "Internet ISW" will not operate under the following conditions.
• Main power switch(SW1) is set to OFF.
• Sub-power switch(SW2) is set to OFF.
• When the following setting is set to "ON":
[Administrator Setting] → [Security Setting] → [Enhanced Security Mode]
• The main body has the job currently performing.
• In case of not attaching Option Harddisk(HD-509).
• When HDD Encryption is set.
• When HDD Lock password is set.
a0r5f2e003ca
109
5. FIRMWARE VERSION UP Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
Note
bizhub 501/421/361
• Settings such as Server setting, etc. will be available by selecting "ON" on this setting.
• When the following setting is set to "ON", "ON" cannot be selected on this setting.
[Administrator Setting] → [Security Setting] → [Enhanced Security Mode]
110
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 5. FIRMWARE VERSION UP
B. Protocol Setting
bizhub 501/421/361
• It performs the setting concerning the Protocol (ftp or http) for connecting to the Internet ISW.
• When connecting to the Program Server using a proxy server, perform the setting for a Proxy Server.
1. Select the [Server Address], and set the Proxy Server Address by IP addressing scheme or
FQDN scheme.
2. Select [Port Number], and set the Port Number for the Proxy Server from 1 through 65535.
*PASV Mode:
This mode is for transferring the file with FTP
under the condition where communication is
restricted such as inside the Firewall. Since
with PASV mode, the client with restriction
sets the Port Number, data transmission port
can be secured to enable the file transmis-
sion.
5 Connection Time-Out -
• Select [Connection Time-Out], and set the
time for the Connection Time Out between
30 and 300 seconds.
111
5. FIRMWARE VERSION UP Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
• To make the access setting for the Program Server which stores the Firmware data.
1. Select [Internet ISW] which is available from [Service Mode] → [System 2].
2. Press [Forwarding Access Setting].
a0r5f2e004ca
3. Select [User ID], and enter the user ID which is necessary for connecting to the Program Server on the on-
screen keyboard, and press [END].
4. Select [Password], and enter the Password which is necessary for connecting to the Program Server on the
on-screen keyboard, and press [END].
5. Select [URL], and enter the directory which stores the Program Server Address and the Firmware on the on-
screen keyboard by URL method, and press [END].
Note
• Enter the URL which matches to the Protocol to be used.
When connecting to http http://(host name or IP address)/directory name
or https://(host name or IP address)/directory name
When connecting to ftp ftp://(host name or IP address)/directory name
6. Select [File Name], and enter the file name of the Firmware data to be downloaded on the on-screen key-
board, and press [END].
7. Press [END] to finish setting.
112
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 5. FIRMWARE VERSION UP
bizhub 501/421/361
Note
• When performing the Internet ISW, ask the administrator for permission beforehand.
• Do not turn OFF Main power switch(SW1) and Sub-power switch(SW2) while downloading.
a0r5f2e005ca
a0r5f2e006ca
113
5. FIRMWARE VERSION UP Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
bizhub 501/421/361
4. The main body automatically start running, and it starts accessing the server.
a0r5f2e007ca
114
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 5. FIRMWARE VERSION UP
bizhub 501/421/361
1. The message to indicate the status is displayed on the screen while connecting or transferring data.
C. Completed or failed
(1) Firmware updated normally
1. When the Firmware is normally updated, restart the main body in auto mode to display the outcome, and
press [OK] to return to the Main screen.
a0r5f2e008ca
115
5. FIRMWARE VERSION UP Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
1. When updating failed to complete due to the trouble on connecting to the network, an error code and the
message is displayed.
2. The main body is automatically rebooted and displays the result screen, then press [OK]. It can be used with
the Firmware Version before conducting updating.
a0r5f2e009ca
3. Check the settings for the network by error codes, and try updating again.
Note
• For error codes, refer to "5.3.5 Error Code List for the Internet ISW".
1. Once Firmware updating has started, the ROM in the main body is deleted.
When it failed right after updating has started, restart the main body, and shift to the standby screen to retry
downloading.
2. When updating on the control panel, press [settings] on the standby screen, and check the Network settings
again.
Press [Download], and restart the Internet ISW.
Note
• Return to the standby screen without fail after turning the Main power OFF/ON if the Firmware is
not updated.
116
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 5. FIRMWARE VERSION UP
bizhub 501/421/361
• When a trouble occurred while conducting the Internet ISW and it was not normally connected, the mes-
sage on the status and the error code will be displayed on the control panel.
When updating with CS Remote Care, the error code will be sent to the CS Remote Care center.
117
5. FIRMWARE VERSION UP Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
Control panel
0x00001### FTP error • Check to see if FTP server normally
• Reply code when it failed to be operates.
connected • Check the IP address, User's name,
etc.
0x00002### FTP error • Check to see if FTP server operates
• Error reply code for the User normally.
command or Pass command
0x00003### FTP error
• Error reply code for CWD com-
mand
0x00004### FTP error • Check to see if FTP server operates
• Error reply code for the TYPE normally.
command
0x00005### FTP error
• Error reply code for the PORT
command
0x00006### FTP error • Check to see if FTP server operates
• Error reply code for the PASV normally.
command • Set the PASV mode to "Invalid", and try
it again.
0x00007### FTP error • Check to see if FTP server operates
• Error rely code for the RETR normally.
command • Wait for about 30 minutes and try it
again.
0x10000100 • It cannot be accepted because • Wait for the current job to be com-
of the job currently being exe- pleted and try it again.
cuted.
• ISW being executed by other
method.
0x10000101 • It cannot be accepted because • Turn sub-power ON and try it again.
the sub-power is OFF.
0x10000102 • The Internet ISW is already • Wait for the current Internet ISW to be
being executed. completed.
0x10000103 • It failed to prohibit the job. (It • Check if the following setting is set to
failed to lock the operation.) "Valid".
→ It failed to lock the job [Service Mode] → [System 2] → [Inter-
because the operation is already net ISW] → [Internet ISW setting]
locked with PSWC, etc. • If the above process does not solve the
0x10000104 • There is no space for F/W data problem, inform the corresponding
to be downloaded. error code to the KONICA MINOLTA.
0x10000106 • Check sum error
118
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 5. FIRMWARE VERSION UP
bizhub 501/421/361
Control panel
0x10000107 File access error • Check to see if the downloaded F/W is
• The file downloaded has an of the correct type.
error.
• The header of the file which has
been read has an error.
• The size of the file to be down-
loaded is too large.
• When it is identified to be the
different type of F/W.
0x10000108 • The area F/W is stored is • Wait until ISW is automatically exe-
destroyed, and another ISW is cuted on the main body side.
necessary.
0x20000000 The temporary error when running
the subset
• When starting the Internet ISW
in a normal program, the
rebooting will start and the Inter-
net ISW will be executed with
the subset program.
During the process by the sub-
set program, it has to be in the
"Failed" status unless the Inter-
net ISW is successfully con-
ducted. This code is used
temporarily to make it in error
status.
Note
• If the above process does not solve the problem, inform the corresponding errorcode to the KON-
ICA MINOLTA.
119
5. FIRMWARE VERSION UP Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
• By using this setting, the Firmware stored in the Server can be downloaded over internet for upgrading.
Functions • To set whether or not to enable each setting for Internet ISW.
Use • To use when upgrading the Firmware by Internet ISW.
• Each setting such as Server setting will be valid by setting this to "ON".
Note
• When the following setting is set to "ON", this setting will automatically be
set to "OFF" and cannot be changed.
[Administrator Setting] → [Security Setting] → [Enhanced Security Mode]
Setting/ • The default setting is "OFF".
Procedure ON "OFF"
Functions • To set whether or not to enable downloading using the HTTP Protocol.
Use • To use when accessing the Server using the HTTP Protocol.
• Setting on the Proxy Server will be valid when this setting is "ON".
Setting/ • The default setting is "OFF".
Procedure ON "OFF"
B. Connect Proxy
Functions • To set whether or not to connect via Proxy Server when accessing the Server.
Use • To use when accessing the Server via Proxy Server.
Setting/ • The default setting is "OFF".
Procedure ON "OFF"
120
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 5. FIRMWARE VERSION UP
C. Proxy Server
bizhub 501/421/361
Functions • To set the Address and the Port Number for the Proxy Server.
Use • To use when accessing the Server via Proxy Server.
Setting/ <Server Address>
Procedure • Enter the IP Address using the Version 4 method / Version 6 method or FQDN
method.
<Port Number>
• Enter the value between 1 and 65535 using the 10-key pad.
D. Proxy Authentication
Functions • To set the Login name or Password when Authentication is necessary for accessing
the Proxy Server.
Use • To use when Authentication is necessary for accessing the Proxy Server.
Setting/ <Authentication>
Procedure • The default setting is "OFF".
ON "OFF"
<Log-in Name>
• Enter the Login name (up to 32 one-byte characters) on the on-screen keyboard.
<Password>
• Enter the Password (up to 32 one-byte characters) on the on-screen keyboard.
E. Connection Time-Out
Functions • To set the time for the Timeout for accessing the Server.
Use • To use when changing the time for the Timeout for accessing the Server.
Setting/ • The default setting is "60 sec".
Procedure 30 to 300 sec
121
5. FIRMWARE VERSION UP Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
B. Connect Proxy
bizhub 501/421/361
Functions • To set whether or not to access the Server via Proxy Server.
Use • To use when accessing the Server via Proxy Server.
Setting/ • The default setting is "OFF".
Procedure ON "OFF"
C. Proxy Server
Functions • To set the Address and the Port No. of the Proxy Server.
Use • To use when accessing the Server via Proxy Server.
Setting/ <Server Address>
Procedure • Enter the IP Address using the Version 4 method / Version 6 method or FQDN
method.
<Port Number>
• Enter the value between 1 and 65535 using the 10-key pad.
D. Connection Setting
Functions • To set the Port No. and the time for Timeout when accessing the FTP Server, and
also to set whether or not to enable PASV Mode.
Use • To use when accessing the FTP Server.
• To use when connecting by the PASV (passive) Mode (FTP Server side will inform the
connection port before connecting).
Setting/ <Port Number>
Procedure • Enter the value between 1 and 65535 using the 10-key pad.
<PASV Mode>
• The default setting is "OFF".
ON "OFF"
122
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 5. FIRMWARE VERSION UP
bizhub 501/421/361
A. User ID
Functions • To register the User ID for accessing the Program Server where Firmware is to be
Use stored.
Setting/ 1. Select [User ID].
Procedure 2. Enter the User ID (up to 64 one-byte characters) on the on-screen keyboard.
B. Password
Functions • To register the Password for accessing the Program Server where Firmware is to be
Use stored.
Setting/ 1. Select [Password].
Procedure 2. Enter the Password (up to 64 characters) on the on-screen keyboard.
C. URL
Functions • To register the Address and Directory of the Program Server where the Firmware is to
Use be stored in URL.
Setting/ 1. Select [URL].
Procedure 2. Enter the URL (up to 256 one-byte characters) on the on-screen keyboard.
Note
• Enter the URL which format suits the Protocol to be used.
When connecting to http http:// (Host name or IP Address)/ Directory name
or https:// (Host name or IP Address)/Directory name
When connecting to ftp ftp:// (Host name or IP Address) / Directory name
D. FileName
123
5. FIRMWARE VERSION UP Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
5.4.5 Download
bizhub 501/421/361
Functions • Access the Program Server according to the Internet ISW setting, and download the
Firmware.
Use • To use when updating the Firmware via network.
Setting/ 1. Select [Download].
Procedure 2. Select the board type.
3. Press [ISW Start] to start downloading the Firmware.
4. The message to show the status will be displayed on the screen while connecting
and transferring data.
Note
• When it failed to connect to the Program Server, or failed to download, the
error code and the message will be displayed. Check the cause of the error
by the error code, and follow the message for resetting.
Refer to "5.3.5 Error Code List for the Internet ISW" for the error codes. (See
P.117)
5. When the Firmware is normally upgraded, the main body automatically is restarted to
complete the Internet ISW.
124
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 6. OTHERS
6. OTHERS
bizhub 501/421/361
6.1 Items not allowed to be disassembled and adjusted
6.1.1 Scanner section
A. CCD unit
(1) Parts not allowed to be removed
• 7 screws that are used to assemble the CCD unit.
• 4 attaching screws of the lens reference plate assy
[3] [1]
[5]
[2]
[2]
125
6. OTHERS Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
126
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 6. OTHERS
bizhub 501/421/361
A. Write section cover
(1) Parts not allowed to be removed
• 4 attaching screws of the write section cover
[1]
[2]
50gaf2c138na
127
6. OTHERS Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
[2]
[1]
[1] [1]
50gaf2c139na
128
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 6. OTHERS
bizhub 501/421/361
(1) Parts not allowed to be removed
• 2 attaching screws of the developer restriction blade
• 1 fixing screw of the magnet adjustment plate
• Ds adjustment screws
Developing unit at 2 places (inside the cover)
[6]
[4] [5]
[3]
129
6. OTHERS Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
[1]
50gaf2c188na
130
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 6. OTHERS
bizhub 501/421/361
(1) Parts not allowed to be removed
• 2 screws of registration unit fixing plate.
[2]
[1]
a0r5f2c003ca
[1] Screws not allowed to be removed [2] Registration unit fixing plate
131
6. OTHERS Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
Note
• This list shows the explanation of the disassembly and reassembly of the parts which are consid-
ered necessary to replace (other than periodically replaced parts). However, these parts except for
the covers are not required to be disassembled while in normal service operations.
• For the method of replacing the periodically replaced parts, see "3.4 Maintenance procedure of
the external section" to "3.14 Maintenance procedure of the fusing section".
132
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 6. OTHERS
bizhub 501/421/361
Caution
• When disassembling or assembling the parts, be sure the power cord has been unplugged from
the power outlet.
[2]
[2] [1] 50gaf2c050na
133
6. OTHERS Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
[1] 50gaf2c051na
Note
• The screw [1] is attached with the washer [2].
Be careful that it does not get lost.
[1][2]
[4] [3] 50gaf2c052na
134
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 6. OTHERS
bizhub 501/421/361
A. Procedure
1. Remove 2 screws [1] and turn to the arrow-
marked direction [2], and then remove the rear
cover /4 [3].
2. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
[5] [4]
steps in reverse.
Note
• When installing the rear cover /4, be sure first
to fit the installation hole [4] to the projection
[5].
135
6. OTHERS Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
A. Procedure
1. Open the bypass tray.
(See P.137)
2. Pull the ADU release lever [1] to open ADU [2].
[2]
[1] 50gaf2c053nb
[1] [2] 3. Remove the 2 screws [1] and then remove the
right cover /Up [2].
4. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
50gaf2c054na
136
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 6. OTHERS
bizhub 501/421/361
A. Procedure
1. Open the bypass tray [1].
2. Remove the 2 screws [2] and then remove the
right cover /Lw [3].
3. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
[1]
[3]
[2] 50gaf2c055na
[2]
[1] 50gaf2c056nb
137
6. OTHERS Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
A. Procedure
1. Open the front door [1].
2. Remove the front cover.
(See P.142)
3. Remove the screw [2] and then remove the sup-
port plate [3] and the front door at the same time.
[5]
Note
• When installing the front door, be sure first to
[4]
fit the installation hole [4] to the shaft [5].
[1]
[2]
[3]
50gaf2c057na
138
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 6. OTHERS
bizhub 501/421/361
A. Procedure
[1]
1. Remove the 6 screws [1] and then remove the
upper cover /Rt [2].
[2]
a0r5f2c005ca
[1] [2]
a0r5f2c006ca
139
6. OTHERS Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
[5]
attaching plate /Lw [2].
4. Loosen the screw [3] and slide the glass holding
plate [4].
5. Remove the original glass [5].
Note
• When removing the original glass, be careful
not to stain the position to which the shading
correction plate [6] is attached.
[2]
[3]
[4]
a0r5f2c007ca
Note
[1] [3]
• When installing the original glass [1], be sure
to fix first the glass attaching plate /Lw [2]
while pressing it against the original glass
and then fix the glass holding plate [3] while
also pressing it against the original glass.
[2] a0r5f2c008ca
140
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 6. OTHERS
bizhub 501/421/361
A. Procedure
1. Remove the original glass.
[2] [5] [1] (See P.139)
2. Loosen the 2 screws [1].
3. Remove the 2 screws [2]
4. Push up the lock levers [3] at 2 places from its
lower position and release it from the holes [4],
and then remove the upper cover /Fr [5].
5. Remove the connector [6] and then remove the
upper cover /Fr [5].
Note
• When reinstalling the upper cover /Fr [5], be
[6] sure to insert the lock levers [3] at 2 places
into the holes [4] securely.
[5] [4]
[3]
a0r5f2c009ca
[3]
a0r5f2c010ca
141
6. OTHERS Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
A. Procedure
1. Remove the original glass.
[2]
(See P.139)
2. Remove the upper covers /Fr and /Lt.
(See P.141)
3. Remove DF from the main body.
4. Remove the 4 screws [1] and then remove the
upper cover /Rr [2].
5. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
[1] 50gaf2c063na
Note
• When reinstalling the front cover [5], be sure
to insert the lock levers [4] at 2 places into the
[2] 2 holes [6] securely.
142
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 6. OTHERS
bizhub 501/421/361
A. Procedure
1. Remove the front cover.
[1] [2]
(See P.142)
2. Remove the front door.
(See P.138)
3. Insert the edge of flat blade screwdriver into the
hole [1], and remove the wiring harness cover [2].
4. Remove the 2 screws [3] and then remove the
front cover /Up1 [4].
[3]
[4] a0r5f2c012ca
143
6. OTHERS Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
[4] [3]
a0r5f2c013ca
144
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 6. OTHERS
bizhub 501/421/361
connector [2].
8. Remove the 6 screws [3] and then remove the
operation panel [4].
Note
[3] [2] [1]
• When installing the operation panel [1], be
sure to insert the projection [2] into the hole
[3].
a0r5f2c015ca
145
6. OTHERS Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
A. Procedure
1. Remove the original glass.
[2] [1]
(See P.139)
2. Remove the 2 screws [1] and the remove the lens
light blocking cover assy [2].
3. Remove the connector [3].
4. Remove the 8 screws [4] and then remove the
lens light blocking cover [5].
5. Remove the 3 screws [6] and then remove the rib-
bon cable cover [7].
Note
• Be careful not to damage the scanner wire.
146
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 6. OTHERS
Note
bizhub 501/421/361
• When removing the ribbon cable [1], be sure
to bring down the lock lever [3] of the connec-
tor [2] in the arrow-marked direction to
release the lock and pull out the ribbon cable.
147
6. OTHERS Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
Note
• After installing the CCD unit, be sure to con-
duct the image adjustment in the service
mode. (See P.180, P.181, P.182, P.183, P.184,
P.185)
148
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 6. OTHERS
bizhub 501/421/361
Note
• Be careful not to touch the lamp section of the exposure lamp (L1) with bare hands.
A. Procedure
1. Remove the original glass. At this time, remove
[3] [2] [1]
also the glass attaching plate /Lw.
(See P.139)
2. Remove the connector [1].
3. Remove the harness clamp [2].
4. Remove the 2 screws [3] and slide the exposure
lamp (L1) [4] for removal.
5. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
[4]
[3]
50gaf2c073na
149
6. OTHERS Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
Note
• When installing the exposure unit, be sure to use the optics unit positioning jig.
• When installing the exposure unit, be sure to conduct the image adjustment in the service mode.
(See P.180, P.181, P.182, P.183, P.184, P.185)
[1] [2]
[3]
[5]
a0r5f2c016ca
150
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 6. OTHERS
bizhub 501/421/361
connector [2].
8. Remove the screw [3] and remove the exposure
unit.
[3]
a0r5f2c017ca
Note
• Be sure to insert the optics unit positioning jig
[10]
from the front side and pass it through the V-
mirror unit.
[6] 3. Insert the optics unit positioning jig [5] into the
exposure unit positioning hole [4].
4. Hit the exposure unit [6] against the optics unit
positioning jig [5].
5. Install the exposure unit to the exposure unit
mounting plates /Fr [7] and /Rr [8] with the screws
[9] and [10].
6. Pull off the 2 optics unit positioning jigs.
7. For the parts to be installed in the succeeding
steps, be sure install them following the removal
steps in reverse.
[9]
[7]
a0r5f2c018ca
151
6. OTHERS Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
Note
• Be sure to wind the scanner wire around the pulley closely with no scanner wire overlapping each
other.
• When restretching or replacing the scanner wire, be sure to use the optics unit positioning jig.
• When restretching or replacing the scanner wire, be sure to conduct the image adjustment in the
service mode. (See P.180, P.181, P.182, P.183, P.184, P.185)
A. Procedure
1. Remove the original glass. At this time, remove
[4] [3] [5] [4] also the glass attaching plate /Lw.
(See P.139)
2. Remove the upper covers /Fr and /Lt.
(See P.141)
3. Remove the upper cover /Rr.
(See P.142)
4. Remove six screws [1] and remove the wiring
harness cover [2].
5. Remove the wiring harness [3] from the wiring
[6] [1] [2] harness clamp.
a0r5f2c019ca
6. Remove five screws [4] and remove the right side
plate of the scanner [5].
Note
• When removing the right side plate of the
scanner [5], change the direction of the oper-
ation panel and loosen the wiring harness [6].
Note
• Be sure to insert the optics unit positioning jig
[3] from the operation panel side and pass it
through the V-mirror unit.
152
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 6. OTHERS
bizhub 501/421/361
[8] [7] [6] [1] drive pulley on the side so that the drive pulley [1]
can rotate freely against the pulley shaft [2].
10. Drop the metal ball [5] provided at the intermedi-
ate section of the scanner wire [4] into the drive
[3] pulley installation hole and, with this as a starting
point, wind the wire 6 turns [6] outwards and 5
[4]
[11] turns [7] inwards.
[5] [9]
Note
[2] • The scanner wires are color-coded. Be sure
to use the one painted black on the front side
[12] with the one with no paint on the rear side.
• For each scanner wire that is wound around
the pulley, be sure to use on the outside the
one at the end of which the metal ball [8] is
[12]
provided and on the inside the one at the end
of which the screw thread [9] is provided.
• For each scanner wire, be sure to pull out the
[1] [6] [7] [8]
one that is wound on the outside in the paper
[10]
feed direction [10] from the upper side of the
drive pulley and the one wound on the inside
in the paper exit direction [11] from the upper
[3]
side of the drive pulley.
[4]
11. After completion of the winding of the scanner
[9] [5] wire, be sure to fix it with the tape [12] so that it
does not come off.
50gaf2c077na
12. Pass the scanner wire [2] provided with the metal
[1] ball [1] through the pulley [4] on the paper exit side
[3] [4] [8] after passing through under the V-mirror unit [3],
[6] [2] and pass further through the pulley [5] inside the
V-mirror unit. And then hook it to the notch [6] of
the frame.
13. Pass the scanner wire provided with the screw
[5]
[2] thread through the pulley [7] on the paper feed
side. And then pass it from above through the pul-
ley [8] on the outside of the V-mirror unit and fur-
[7]
ther through under the V-mirror unit and, with the
[4] nut [9] and the washer [10], fix it at the tension of
1.3 kg to 1.7 kg.
[5]
[10] [9]
[8] 50gaf2c078na
153
6. OTHERS Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
Note
bizhub 501/421/361
Note
• Be sure to slide the exposure unit and check
to see if it operates smoothly.
Note
• Be sure to remove the toner bottle in advance.
A. Procedure
1. Remove the original glass.
[1] (See P.139)
2. Remove the upper covers /Fr and /Lt.
(See P.141)
3. Remove the upper cover /Rr.
(See P.142)
4. Remove the right cover /Up.
(See P.136)
5. Remove the rear cover /4.
(See P.135)
6. Remove the rear cover /1.
(See P.133)
7. Remove the 9 screws [1] and then remove the
system unit cover [2].
[1] [2]
a0r5f2c021ca
154
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 6. OTHERS
bizhub 501/421/361
8. Remove the connector [1].
[3] [2]
9. Remove 3 screws [2] and remove the wiring har-
ness cover [3].
Note
• Be sure to leave the removed wiring harness
cover [3] as installed to the cable [4].
[1]
a0r5f2c022ca
155
6. OTHERS Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
[5] [1] [2] [5] 10. Remove the 2 screws [1] and then remove the rib-
bizhub 501/421/361
[5]
a0r5f2c023ca
156
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 6. OTHERS
bizhub 501/421/361
15. Remove the 3 screws [2] and then remove the
ozone filter mounting assy [3].
[2] [3]
[1]
50gaf2c082na
[2]
[3]
[1]
[4] 50gaf2c083na
157
6. OTHERS Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
[2] [1]
20. Remove the 5 screws [2] and then remove the
toner supply unit [3].
21. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
[3] [2]
[2]
50gaf2c084na
158
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 6. OTHERS
bizhub 501/421/361
Note
• The trays 1 and 2 are of the same form and of the same mechanism. The procedure given here
shows mainly the operations employed for the tray 1.
• When there remains paper in the tray, be sure to remove it thoroughly before starting operations.
A. Procedure
1. Pull out the tray 1 [1].
2. Remove the screw [2] and then remove the stop-
per [3].
[6]
Note
• When installing the stopper, be sure to set the
positioning hole [4] to the projection [5].
Note
• When installing the tray 1, be sure to check to
see if the tray can be pulled out and pushed in
smoothly.
• When installing the tray 1, be sure to check to
see if the tray is not thoroughly pulled out.
[1]
[4] [5]
[3]
[2]
50gaf2c141na
159
6. OTHERS Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
[1] Cover [2] Mounting [3] Key [4] Counter [5] Screws [6] Screws [7] Screws
plate counter socket for the for the for the
cover counter mounting
socket plate
Key counter kit 4* z z z z z z z
Key counter z z z z
mounting kit*
Key counter z
* In the kit, parts (such as a mounting plate, mylar, wire saddle and screws) that are not used for 501/421/
361 are included.
160
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 6. OTHERS
bizhub 501/421/361
1. Remove the upper cover /Rt.
(See P.141)
2. Remove the split cover [1] of the upper cover /Rt.
3. Put the harness [2] for the key counter through the
upper cover /Rt.
[1] 4. Install the upper cover /Rt.
[2]
50gaf2c184na
[4]
[3]
50gaf2c185nb
[5] [6]
50gaf2c186nb
[8]
[7]
50gaf2c187nb
161
6. OTHERS Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
bizhub 501/421/361
Blank page
162
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 7. HOW TO USE THE ADJUSTMENT/SETTING SECTION
ADJUSTMENT/SETTING
bizhub 501/421/361
7. HOW TO USE THE ADJUSTMENT/SETTING SECTION
7.1 Composition
This part "ADJUSTMENT/SETTING" describes items to be adjusted and the method of adjustment that is
required by this machine, it also gives detailed explanations.
163
8. UTILITY MENU Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
8. UTILITY MENU
bizhub 501/421/361
164
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 8. UTILITY MENU
UTILITY MENU
bizhub 501/421/361
[2] User Settings [5] Printer Settings [1] Basic Settings
[2] Paper Setting
[3] PCL Setting [1] Font Setings
[2] Symbol Set
[3] Font Size
[4] Line/Page
[5] CR/LF Mapping
[4] PS Setting
[5] XPS Settings
[6] TIFF Image Paper Setting
[7] Print Reports
[8] Image Shift Settings
[9] Stamp settings [1] Date/Time Print Position
[2] Date/Time Text Size
[3] Page Number Print Position
[4] Page Number Text Size
[6] Change Password
[7] Canege E-Mail Address
[3] Administrator Set- [1] System Settings [1] Power Save Settings
tings [2] Output Settings [1] Print/Fax Output Settings
[2] Output Tray Settings
[3] Shift Output Each Job
[3] Date/Time Settings
[4] Daylight Saving Time
[5] Weekly Timer [1] Weekly Timer ON/OFF Settings
Settings [2] Time Settings
[3] Date Settings
[4] Select Time for Power Save
[5] Password for Non-Business Hours
[6] Restrict User [1] Copy Program Lock Settings
Access [2] Delete Saved Copy Program
[3] Restrict Access to Job Settings
[4] Restrict Operation
[7] Expert Adjust- [1] Density for Original Type
ment [2] Erase Adjustment
[3] Finisher Adjustment
[8] List/Counter [1] Management List [1] Job Settings List
[2] Paper Size/Type Counter
[3] Sales Counter List
[9] Reset Setting [1] System Auto Reset
[2] Auto Reset
[3] Job Reset
165
8. UTILITY MENU Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
UTILITY MENU
bizhub 501/421/361
[3] Administrator Set- [1] System Setting [9] Reset Setting [4] System Auto Reset for Proof Copy
tings [0] User Box Set- [1] Delete Unused User Box
tings [2] Delete Secure Print Documents
[3] Auto Delete Secure Document
[4] Encrypted PDF Delete Time
[5] Touch & Print Delete Time
[6] Document Hold Setting
[7] External Memory Function Settings
[1] Standard Size Setting
[2] Stamp settings [1] Header/Footer Settings
[2] Fax TX Settings
[3] Blank Page Print Settings
[4] Page Number Print Position
[5] Job Skip Setting
[2] Administrator/ [1] Administrator Registration
Machine Settings [2] Input Machine Address
[3] One-Touch/User [1] Create One- [1] Address Book [1] E-Mail
Box Registration Touch Destination [2] User Box
[3] Fax
[2] Group
[3] E-Mail [1] E-Mail Subject
[2] E-Mail Body
[2] Create User Box [1] Public/Personal Use Box
[2] Bulletin Board User Box
[3] Relay User Box
[4] Annotation User Box
[3] One-Touch/User [1] Address Book List
Box Registration [2] Group List
List [3] Program List
[4] E-Mail Subject/Text List
[4] Maximum Number of User Boxes
[4] User Authenti- [1] General Settings
cation/Account [2] User Authentication Settings
Track [3] Account Track Settings
[4] Print without Authentication
[5] Print Counter List
[6] External Server Settings
[7] Limiting Access [1] Create Group
to Destinations [2] Apply Levels/Groups to Destinations
[3] Apply Levels/Groups to Users
[8] Authentication Device Setting
166
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 8. UTILITY MENU
UTILITY MENU
bizhub 501/421/361
[3] Administrator Set- [5] Network Set- [1] Network Setting
tings tings [2] TCP/IP Settings
[3] Netware Set- [1] IPX Settings
tings [2] NetWare Print Settings
[3] User Authentication Setting (NDS)
[4] HTTP Server Settings
[5] FTP Settings [1] FTP TX Settings
[2] FTP Server Settings
[6] SMB Settings [1] Client Settings
[2] Print Settings
[3] WINS Settings
[4] Direct Hosting Setting
[7] LDAP Settings [1] Enabling LDAP
[2] Setting Up LDAP
[3] Default LDAP Server Setting
[8] E-Mail Settings [1] E-Mail TX (SMTP)
[2] E-Mail RX (POP)
[3] S/MIME Communication Settings
[9] SNMP Settings
[0] AppleTalk Settings
[1] Bonjour Setting
[2] TCP Socket [1] TCP Socket
Settings [2] TCP Socket (ASCII Mode)
[3] Network Fax [1] Network Fax Function Settings
Settings [2] SMTP TX Settings
[3] SMTP RX Settings
[4] WebDAV Client Settings
[6] Web Service [1] Web Service Common Settings
Settings [2] Printer Settings
[3] Scanner Settings
[7] Detail Settings [1] Device Setting
[2] Time Adjustment Setting
[3] Status Notification Setting
[4] Total Counter Notification Settings
[5] PING Confirmation
[6] SLP Setting
[7] LPD Setting
[8] Prefix/Suffix Setting
[9] Action for Invalid Certificate
[6] Copier Settings
[7] Printer Settings
167
8. UTILITY MENU Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
UTILITY MENU
bizhub 501/421/361
168
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 9. LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS
bizhub 501/421/361
After completion of PM
Page referred to
Replacement of
sure/mirror unit
NVRAM board
to paper feed
Developer
Write unit
CCD unit
Slit glass
CF card
Drum
Adjustment/setting items
DF
Machine Print Print Positioning: Leading Edge P.174 h e {
er Print Positioning: Side Edge P.175 i f {
Area Paper Feed Direction Adj. P.176 g d c {
Printer Resist Loop P.178 c {
Bypass Tray Adjustment P.179
Scan Image Position: Leading Edge P.180 d f {
Area Image Position: Side Edge P.181 f g {
Cross Direction Adjustment P.182 e e {
Feed Direction Adjustment P.183 c g d {
Lead Edge Erase Adjustment P.184 j {
Non-Image Area Erase Check P.185 {
Imaging TCR Adjustment P.186 c {
Process Toner Density Adjustment P.187 d c {
Adjust- Laser Diameter Adjustment P.188 e d {
ment LD1 Offset Adj. P.189 d f e {
LD2 Offset Adj. e g f {
Counter Present Parts Life (Reset) P.196 { {
PM Counter (Reset) P.207 { c { {
PM Counter (Set) {
ADF Paper Feed Direction P.230 d h {
Lead Edge P.231 e i {
Side Edge P.232 g j {
Resist Loop Adj. P.233 c {
Original Size Adj. P.233 h {
Density Adj. P.234 { j k {
Scan Position Adjustment P.235 g f {
Sensor Auto Adjustment P.236 i {
Finisher Center Staple Position P.237 {
Half-Fold Position P.238 {
Punch Horizontal Position P.239 {
Punch Resist Loop P.240 {
Secu-
rity Set- Initialize Flash memory Lock PW P.299 {
ting
ISW MFP controller {
Note
• After changing developer, be sure to avoid the printing operation before completion of the TCR
adjustment.
• When replacing the NVRAM board (NRB), be sure to conduct the TCR adjustment after changing
developer.
• When replacing the overall control board (OACB) due to the board being damaged, the NRB and
CF card that have been provided on the damaged OACB should be reused on a new OACB in prin-
ciple. When the NRB ans the data in the CF card are considered to be damaged, be sure to refer to
the support division of the authorized distributor.
169
10. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
170
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 10. SERVICE MODE
bizhub 501/421/361
System 1 Initialization Service Mode Setting Image Process Adj. Data P.194
(Adj.) Data
Machine and ADF
Adjustment Data
Counter Data Drum Counter
Fixing Counter
All History Data
Machine State LED Setting P.195
Counter Total Service P.197
Fax Communication Error P.197
Mode P.197
ADF Counter P.199
Service Call P.199
JAM P.201
Present Parts Life P.205
Optional Parts Life P.196
PM P.207
Reuse P.202
Each Size P.204
Pape Jam History P.202
Jam Counter History P.201
Time Series Trouble (SC) P.201
Each Section Trouble (SC) P.199
State Confirmation Sensor Check P.208
Load Check P.216
Memory/HDD Condition P.223
Memory/HDD Adjust- Memory Check P.223
ment HDD R/W Check P.223
HDD Format P.224
Adj. Data Table P.224
ADF Paper Feed Direction P.230
ADF Adjustment:Lead Edge P.231
ADF Adjustment:Side Edge P.232
Resist Loop Adj. P.233
Original Size Adj. P.233
Density Adj. P.234
Scan Position Adjustment P.235
Sensor Auto Adjustment P.236
Finisher Center Staple Position P.237
Half-Fold Position P.238
Punch Horizontal Position P.239
Punch Resist Loop P.240
Firmware Version P.241
CS Remote Care P.242
System 2 Data Capture P.264
171
10. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
172
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 10. SERVICE MODE
bizhub 501/421/361
This machine is provided with a service mode for various types of adjustments/settings. Data adjusted and/or
set in this mode are stored in the NVRAM board (NRB).
NOTE
• When the CE password is set, a password is required to input to enter the service mode.
5. "Service Mode screen"
The service mode is in the start-up condition.
6. Select an item to set.
The setup screen of each item is displayed.
7. Conduct required operations, and press [END/OK] after completion of the operations.
The setting made at step 6 becomes effective.
8. "Service Mode screen"
Press [Exit] to return to the regular copy screen.
1. While pressing the Utility/Counter key, turn ON the power switch (SW2).
2. Trouble reset screen appears.
3. Press the [Trouble reset].
4. On the Operation panel, press the following keys.
Stop → 0 → 0 → Stop → 0 → 1
5. Service Mode screen appears.
NOTE
• When the CE password has been set, you must enter the password to enter the service mode.
6. Press the key for an item you want to configure.
The setting screen for each item appears.
7. Conduct necessary operations and turn OFF the SW2 after completion of operations.
8. The new settings become effective after restart.
173
10. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
Note
• Be sure to complete the Paper Feed Direction Adj. (Printer Area) before starting this adjustment.
(See P.176)
A. Procedure
NOTE
• When [Batch] is pressed, no test copy is available.
5. "Test Copy screen"
With paper set in the tray selected, press the Start key to output the test pattern (No. 16).
When paper is fed from the bypass feed, set the corresponding type of paper. And then press the Start
key to output the test pattern (No. 16).
6. Press [END].
7. Measure the leading edge timing with a scale.
[1]
Standard value [1]: 20 ± 0.5 mm
50gaf3c001na
174
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 10. SERVICE MODE
bizhub 501/421/361
Changes the laser write timing and also changes the image position on the drum in the main scan direction to
adjust the mis-centering of the printer image.
For each paper feed (each tray, bypass feed, ADU) and for each paper size (common, small size, large size), the
adjustment can be made.
Note
• Be sure to complete the Cross Direction Adjustment (Scan Area) before making this adjustment.
(See P.176)
A. Procedure
NOTE
• When [Batch] is pressed, no test copy is available.
5. "Test Copy screen"
With paper set in the tray selected, press the Start key to output the test pattern (No. 16).
6. Press [END].
7. Fold the output paper into two in the main scan direction to check it for any discrepancy against the
center line of the print.
Standard value: 0 ± 1.5 mm or less
8. "Print Positioning: Side Edge screen"
Enter a value through the [+]/[–] or numeric keys and press [Setting].
Setting range: – 4.77 (image: to the rear) to + 4.77 (image: to the front) mm
1 step = 0.09 mm
Press [Restore] to return to a value before change.
9. Repeat steps 4 to 8 until it gets within the standard value.
10. Press [END].
175
10. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
A. Printer
Adjusts the magnification of the printer in the sub scan direction.
This adjustment is used to change uniformly the process speed of the drum and the registration roller and
change the magnification in the sub scan direction of the image on the drum.
The adjustment can be made for each type of paper (normal paper, OHP, thick paper, envelope, label and cus-
tom paper)
Note
• The background of the test pattern to be output is fogging. However, this is not abnormal.
• For thin paper, the setting of normal paper is applicable.
(1) Procedure
[1]
50gaf3c002na
176
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 10. SERVICE MODE
bizhub 501/421/361
Makes appropriate a paper feed loop amount between the registration roller and the fusing roller to prevent the
transfer slippage at the position about 26 mm from the trailing edge of the transfer paper.
The adjustment can be made for each type of paper (normal paper, OHP, thick paper, envelope, label, custom
paper and user paper).
Note
• This adjustment checks copy image to see if there occurs no transfer jitter. When it is difficult to
check transfer jitter at copy image, be sure to set "1" for DipSW37-2 before adjustment. By this
setting, test pattern will be printed.
• Printer magnification in the paper through direction: The adjustment of the printer should have
been completed. (See P.176)
• For thin paper, the setting of normal paper is applicable.
(1) Procedure
1. "Service Mode screen"
Press [Machine].
2. "Machine Adjust screen"
Press [Printer Area].
3. "Printer Area screen"
Press [Paper Feed Direction Adj.]
4. "Paper Feed Direction Adj. screen"
Press [Fixing Motor Clock].
5. Select an item for the type of paper and press [Test Copy].
6. "Test Copy screen"
• Place the original onto the original glass.
• Set A3 (for metric) or 11 x 17 (for inch) paper that is the type of paper selected. With the print count set at
5, press the Start key.
7. Press [END].
8. Check all of the 5 output sheets ; copy or print, of
paper to see if there occurs no transfer jitter.
Approx.26mm
50gaf3c018na
177
10. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
Adjusts the paper loop amount at the registration roller section to adjust a paper skew, wrinkles, or a jam at the
registration section.
The adjustment can be made for each paper feed (each tray, bypass feed and ADU) and for each paper size
(large size, intermediate size and small size). And for the bypass feed, it is also possible to make an adjustment
for each type of paper (normal paper, thick paper, thin paper, OHP, envelope, and label).
A. Procedure
NOTE
• When [Batch] is pressed, no test copy is available.
4. "Test Copy screen"
With the paper selected set in the tray, press the Start key to output the test pattern (No. 16).
5. Press [END].
6. Check to see if there occurs no paper skew, wrinkle, or jam at the registration section.
7. "Printer Resist Adjustment screen"
Enter a value through the [+]/[–] or numeric keys and press [Setting].
Setting range:
For bypass feed thick paper (large/small), bypass feed thin paper (large/small), bypass feed OHP (large/
small), bypass feed envelope and bypass feed label (large/small):
– 16.64 (smaller) to + 16.51 mm (larger)
1 step = 0.13 mm
178
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 10. SERVICE MODE
bizhub 501/421/361
Conduct this adjustment when the paper size of the bypass tray is not detected correctly.
A. Procedure
179
10. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
Adjusts the leading edge timing while in the scan in the platen mode.
This adjustment is used to adjust the position at which the read is started in the sub scan direction while the
original is being scanned by the exposure unit.
A. Procedure
180
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 10. SERVICE MODE
bizhub 501/421/361
Adjusts the mis-centering of the image in the main scan direction while in the scan in the platen mode.
Note
• Be sure that the adjustment of the Print Position: Side Edge has been completed.
(See P.175)
A. Procedure
181
10. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
Adjusts the magnification of the image in the main scan direction while in the scan in the platen mode and in the
DF mode.
A. Procedure
50gaf3c003na
182
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 10. SERVICE MODE
bizhub 501/421/361
Adjusts the magnification of the image in the sub scan direction while in the scan on the original glass.
This adjustment is used to change the scan speed of the exposure unit.
A. Procedure
[1]
50gaf3c004na
183
10. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
A. Procedure
50gaf3c005na
184
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 10. SERVICE MODE
bizhub 501/421/361
When installing this machine, or when moving its installation location, check to see if the non-image area erase
check mechanism of the copy applied setting operates correctly in its installation location, and adjust automati-
cally the sensitivity with which the non-image area is detected.
Pre-arrangements:
• Open DF fully to the limit.
• Avoid putting anything on the original glass.
• Clean the original glass.
A. Procedure
(1) Error 1
Countermeasure - 1
When the non-image area erase function is not used very frequently, or when copy originals that have a dark
background are not copied very frequently in non-image area erase, the copier can be used in the current instal-
lation location. However, when copy originals that have a dark background are frequently copied, install the
copier in a location where less external light gets in (darker) than the present location, and check the non-image
area erase check mode again.
(2) Error 2
Countermeasure - 2
When the non-image area erase function is not used very frequently, the copier can be used in the current instal-
lation location. However, if the non-image area erase function is frequently used, install the copier in a location
where less external light gets in (darker) than the present location, and check the non-image area erase check
mode again. At this time, when there is a bright light source such as a fluorescent light installed directly above
the copier, reconsider the installation location, or take some measures to shield the light source and check the
mode again.
185
10. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
Note
• When changing developer, be sure not to conduct the copy operation before completion of the
TCR adjustment.
A. Procedure
NOTE
• The adjustment is completed in about 180 seconds.
• When there occurs a TCR adjustment error due to the developer agitating operation not com-
pleted successfully, the message "operating ..." disappears and an error code is displayed.
(See P.327)
5. Press [OK].
186
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 10. SERVICE MODE
bizhub 501/421/361
This adjustment can be used to increase and/or decrease the toner density of developer.
Use this adjustment when an image fogging occurs due to the increased toner density of developer and you
want to decrease the toner density.
A. Procedure
NOTE
• The set value is a value relative to the present set value. When the set value is set to "0," this
returns the toner density back to the normal level.
4. Press the Start key.
5. While in the adjustment, a message "operating ..." is displayed. And after completion of the adjustment, it
disappears.
NOTE
• The toner density is automatically adjusted according to a value set.
• When an error code is displayed while in the toner density adjustment, be sure to check the
expected defective parts given in the error code list and then conduct again the toner density
adjustment.
(See P.327)
6. Press [OK].
187
10. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
The MPC value can be corrected by entering a set value to change the image density (dot diameter).
A. Procedure
NOTE
• When an adjustment is made in the denser direction, this increases the dot diameter with the
toner consumption also increased.
4. Press the Start key.
5. While in the adjustment, a message "operating ..." is displayed. And after completion of the adjustment, it
disappears.
6. Press [OK].
188
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 10. SERVICE MODE
bizhub 501/421/361
Adjusts the 2 laser beam amount (LD1/LD2) equally.
Be sure to make this adjustment when replacing the write unit, drum and developer.
Note
• Make sure that the TCR adjustment, the toner density adjustment and the dot diameter adjust-
ment have been completed.
A. Procedure
50gaf3c006na
189
10. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
10.5 System 1
bizhub 501/421/361
• Fax Target:
US (America), CA (Canada), JP (Japan), AU (Australia), NZ (New Zealand), EU (Europe), DE (Germany), GB
(England), FR (France), CH (Switzerland), NL (Netherlands), BE (Belgium), AT (Austria), NO (Norway), SE (Swe-
den), FI (Finland), IE (Ireland), DK (Denmark), IT (Italy), ES (Spain), PT (Portuguese), PL (Poland), ZA (South
Africa), TW (Taiwan), SA (Saudi Arabia), CN (China), MY (Malaysia), SG (Singapore), KR (Korea), HK (Hong Kong),
BR (Brazil), AR (Argentine), OT (General)
A. Procedure
190
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 10. SERVICE MODE
bizhub 501/421/361
Sets the telephone number and the fax number of the service station that are displayed on the screen when a
service call occurs.
These telephone and fax numbers are also displayed as the service center contact of the basic screen help of
the user screen.
A. Procedure
NOTE
• Pressing the Clear key erases all the figures of the items selected.
Caution
• Be absolutely sure not to change the serial numbers of the main body set when installing them.
Otherwise, a fusing temperature abnormality may result.
A. Procedure
191
10. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
When each function (device) is in trouble, isolating a trouble allows the limited use of this machine.
A. Procedure
10.5.5 No Sleep
Sets the availability/unavailability of the sleep while in the administrator mode.
A. Procedure
A. Procedure
192
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 10. SERVICE MODE
bizhub 501/421/361
Sets the detection size of the original size on the original glass and ADF.
A. Procedure
A. Procedure
193
10. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
A. Procedure
10.5.10 Initialization
Initializes the setting/adjustment data controlled in non-volatile memory to the value set when shipped from the
factory.
Data that can be initialized are as follows.
194
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 10. SERVICE MODE
A. Procedure
bizhub 501/421/361
1. "Service Mode screen"
Press [System 1].
2. "System Input screen"
Press [Initialization].
3. "Initialize screen"
Press either one of the data items in the data classification.
4. "Utility / Administrator Setting Data" / "Destination Storage Data" / "CS Remote Care Setting Data" /
"Service Mode Setting (Adj.) Data" / "Counter Data" / "All History Data"
Select a data to initialize.
Pressing [All Select] selects all the data items in the data classification.
5. Pressing the Start key initializes the data selected of the data classification selected.
6. When initializing the data of each classification, repeat steps 3 to 5.
7. Press [OK].
195
10. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
10.6 Counter
bizhub 501/421/361
• Total Service
• Fax Communication Error
• Mode
• ADF Counter
• Service call
• JAM
• Present parts life
• Optional parts life
• PM
• Reuse
• Each size
• Paper Jam History
• Jam counter history
• Time series trouble (SC)
• Each section trouble (SC)
A. Procedure
NOTE
• For the individual data check screens of "JAM Counter History" and "Each Section Trouble
(SC)," [Clear Counter] is displayed.
Pressing [Clear Counter] displays "Clear Counter Check screen" and pressing [Yes] clears the block data.
Pressing [No] returns to the previous screen with no block data cleared. While in the visit to the user for the
PM execution, clear these data to check the JAM and SC counts that have occurred since the previous
visit.
4. Press [OK].
196
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 10. SERVICE MODE
B. Total Service
bizhub 501/421/361
Displays the total copy count printed in the service mode and the user mode.
Note
• The maximum count is 99,999,999.
Note
• The maximum count is 999,999.
D. Mode
Displays the use condition for each of the modes used by the copier/scanner/printer/FAX.
Note
• The maximum count is 99,999,999.
197
10. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
(F1)
7 09 BOX Housing: Copy – BOX Hold 1 count for each completion of a job.
8 0A BOX Housing: Print – Proof Print
9 0B BOX Housing: Print – BOX Hold
10 0C BOX Housing: Print
– Classified Document
11 0D BOX Housing: Scanner – BOX Hold
12 0F BOX Housing: FAX RX
– Distribute by F-Code
13 10 BOX Housing: FAX RX – Distribute by TSI
14 11 BOX Housing: FAX RX – BOX Hold 1 count for each completion of a job. F
code and other than TSI.
15 12 Output from Box: Copy Image – Print 1 count for each completion of a job.
Except for the print for checking.
16 13 Output from Box: Copy Image 1 count for each completion of a job.
– E-Mail TX
17 14 Output from Box: Copy Image – FTP TX
18 15 Output from Box: Copy Image – SMB TX
19 16 Output from Box: Print Image 1 count for each completion of a job.
– Print (Except Proof Print) Except for the print for checking.
20 17 Output from Box: Print Image – E-Mail TX 1 count for each completion of a job
21 18 Output from Box: Print Image – FTP TX
22 19 Output from Box: Print Image – SMB TX
23 1A Output from Box: Scan Image – Print 1 count for each completion of a job.
(Except Proof Print) Except for the print for checking.
24 1B Output from Box: Scan Image 1 count for each completion of a job
– E-Mail TX
25 1C Output from Box: Scan Image – FTP TX
26 1D Output from Box: Scan Image – SMB TX
27 1E Output from Box: FAX Scan Image 1 count for each completion of a job.
– Print (Except Proof Print) Except for the print for checking.
28 1F Output from Box: FAX Scan Image 1 count for each completion of a job
– FAX/IFAX TX
29 20 Output from Box: FAX Scan Image
– E-Mail/IFAX TX
30 21 Output from Box: FAX RX Image – Print 1 count for each completion of a job.
(Except Proof Print) Except for the print for checking.
31 22 Output from Box: FAX RX Image 1 count for each completion of a job
– FAX TX
32 23 Output from Box: FAX RX Image
– E-Mail/IFAX TX
198
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 10. SERVICE MODE
E. ADF Counter
bizhub 501/421/361
Displays the number of the paper through by modes of ADF.
Note
• The maximum count is 99,999,999.
• 1 count for the single sided copy and 2 counts for the double sided copy.
F. Service Call
Displays troubles that have occurred for each SC.
Note
• The maximum count is 9,999.
• The block trouble count is not available for CSRC.
• When the service mode DipSW3-1 is set to "1" (latched), SC34, 35 and 36 make no count.
199
10. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
200
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 10. SERVICE MODE
bizhub 501/421/361
parameter parameter parameter
(E0) (E0) (E0)
175 E7 D3 02 195 BC E0 8A 215 D0 E0 9E
176 EA D3 03 196 BD E0 8B 216 D1 E0 9F
177 E8 D4 01 197 BE E0 8C 217 D2 E0 A0
178 E9 D5 01 198 BF E0 8D 218 D3 E0 A1
179 AC E0 01 199 C0 E0 8E 219 D4 E0 A2
180 AD E0 02 200 C1 E0 8F 220 D5 E0 A3
181 AE E0 03 201 C2 E0 90 221 D6 E0 A4
182 AF E0 04 202 C3 E0 91 222 D7 E0 A5
183 B0 E0 05 203 C4 E0 92 223 D8 E0 A6
184 B1 E0 06 204 C5 E0 93 224 D9 E0 A7
185 B2 E0 07 205 C6 E0 94 225 DA E0 A8
186 B3 E0 81 206 C7 E0 95 226 DB E0 A9
187 B4 E0 82 207 C8 E0 96 227 DC E0 AA
188 B5 E0 83 208 C9 E0 97 228 DD E0 AB
189 B6 E0 84 209 CA E0 98 229 DE E0 AC
190 B7 E0 85 210 CB E0 99 230 DF E0 AD
191 B8 E0 86 211 CC E0 9A 231 E0 E0 AE
192 B9 E0 87 212 CD E0 9B 232 E1 E0 AF
193 BA E0 88 213 CE E0 9C 233 E2 E0 B0
194 BB E0 89 214 CF E0 9D 234 E3 E0 B1
Note
• Press the corresponding SC item to display a firmware version.
Note
• The maximum count is 999,999.
• The jam code is a code that is displayed when DipSW10-7 is set at "1."
No. CSRC Jam cord No. CSRC Jam cord No. CSRC Jam cord
parameter Upper Lower parameter Upper Lower parameter Upper Lower
(J0) (J0) (J0)
01 00 10 0 07 06 13 2 13 0C 13 11
02 01 11 0 08 07 13 5 14 0D 14 0
03 02 12 0 09 08 13 6 15 0E 14 1
04 03 12 1 10 09 13 7 16 0F 15 0
05 04 13 0 11 0A 13 8 17 10 15 1
06 05 13 1 12 0B 13 9 18 11 20 1
201
10. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
No. CSRC Jam cord No. CSRC Jam cord No. CSRC Jam cord
bizhub 501/421/361
J. Reuse
Displays the accumulated hours of the parts and the number of occurrences of the job that uses the parts.
Note
• The maximum count is 99,999,999.
202
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 10. SERVICE MODE
bizhub 501/421/361
(F5)
4 03 WUP time Accumulated hours during which the
fusing heater turns on in the warm-up
condition. 1 count for 1 second.
5 04 Print operating time (single sided mode) Accumulated hours from start to stop
of the print. 1 count for 1 second (not
including the time period during which
the counter stops due to a jam).
6 05 Print operating time (double sided mode) Accumulated hours from start to stop
of the print. 1 count for 1 second (not
including the time period during which
the counter stops due to a jam).
7 06 Correction operation count Number of counts the image stabiliza-
tion control (the fusing temperature
lower than 50 °C) is executed. 1 count
for each execution.
8 07 APS sensor ON time Accumulated hours during which the
APS sensor turns ON. 1 count for 1
second.
9 08 Platen scan count Counts the number of occasions in
which the scan is made in the platen
mode.
10 09 The number of occurrences of the stop Counts the number of occasions in
due to toner running out. which the system stops due to no
toner.
11 0A Polygon stop operation time
12 0B The number of occurrences of the Main Counts the number of NMI's.
Power OFF
13 0C The number of occurrences of the feed 1 count is made each time the feed
door closed door is closed.
14 0D The number of starting all print jobs
15 0E Tray 1 paper feed count 1 count is made when paper is fed
from the tray 1 each time 1 sheet of
paper is exited.
16 0F Tray 2 paper feed count 1 count is made when paper is fed
from the tray 2 each time 1 sheet of
paper is exited.
17 10 Tray 3 paper feed count 1 count is made when paper is fed
from the tray 3 each time 1 sheet of
paper is exited.
18 11 Tray 4 paper feed count 1 count is made when paper is fed
from the tray 4 each time 1 sheet of
paper is exited.
19 12 The number of prints made by selecting 1 count is made when paper is fed
the bypass paper feed tray from the bypass tray each time 1 sheet
of paper is exited.
203
10. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
(F5)
20 13 The number of prints made by selecting 1 count is made when paper is fed
the LCT paper feed tray from LCT each time 1 sheet of paper is
exited.
K. Each Size
Displays the number of print of each paper size.
Note
• The maximum count is 99,999,999.
• 1 count each time paper is exited (0 count for a blank sheet and 2 counts for the double sided
print).
204
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 10. SERVICE MODE
bizhub 501/421/361
Displays the counter of an intended part.
And, when replacing an intended part, the counter of the replaced part is reset to manage the service history.
205
10. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
parameter
(Z1)
25 18 Fusing unit Fusing roller 50GA5303
26 19 Fusing pressure roller 50GA5304
27 1A Fusing cleaner assy 50GA-540
28 1B Heat insulating sleeve /A 26NA5372
29 1C Fusing bearing /Up 26NA5371
30 1D Fusing bearing /Lw 50GA5359
31 1E Fusing sensor assy 50GA-544
32 1F Fuse holder assy 26NA-535
33 20 Fusing claw assy 50GA-533
34 21 Fusing driven roller A assy 40400326
35 22 Fusing driven roller B assy 40400328
36 31 Fusing input gear assy 50GA-546
37 23 Reverse unit Paper exit suction filter 50GA4406
38 24 Write unit Write unit 50GA-650
39 25 LU-203 Pick-up rubber 40LA4009
40 26 Paper feed rubber 26NA4011
41 27 Separation rubber 26NA4012
42 28 DF-613 Pick-up roller 16EA56020
43 29 Paper feed roller 45823014
44 2A Separation roller 45823047
45 2B PC-206 (tray 3/tray 4) Tray 3 pick-up roller 40303005
46 2C PC-407 (tray 3 only) Tray 3 paper feed roller 40303005
47 2D Tray 3 separation roller 40300151
48 2E Tray 4 pick-up roller 40303005
49 2F Tray 4 paper feed roller 40303005
50 30 Tray 4 separation roller 40300151
206
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 10. SERVICE MODE
10.6.3 PM
bizhub 501/421/361
Sets the PM execution cycle or resets the PM counter.
Note
• The PM cycle setting has been input in advance and be sure not to change this setting normally.
207
10. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
A. Procedure
B. List of sensors
Multi code
Symbol
ON OFF
Code
Name
208
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 10. SERVICE MODE
Classification
bizhub 501/421/361
Multi code
Symbol
ON OFF
Code
Name
209
10. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
Multi code
Symbol
ON OFF
Code
Name
16 10 PS13 Lower limit sensor (PC-407) Lower limit Not at lower limit
Paper feed
home position
2 PS31 APS timing sensor DF close DF open
2 — — — —
3 PS1 Paper full sensor Full Other than full
210
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 10. SERVICE MODE
Classification
bizhub 501/421/361
Multi code
Symbol
ON OFF
Code
Name
TH2 mistor /2
211
10. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
Multi code
Symbol
ON OFF
Code
Name
212
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 10. SERVICE MODE
Classification
bizhub 501/421/361
Multi code
Symbol
ON OFF
Code
Name
213
10. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
Multi code
Symbol
ON OFF
Code
Name
*3 ON/OFF combination of remaining paper sensor /1 (PS154) and /2 (PS151) represents an amount of
paper remained in LU.
214
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 10. SERVICE MODE
*4 The combination of the ON/OFF of the paper size sensors /BP1 (PS19), /BP2 (PS20), /BP3 (PS21) and
bizhub 501/421/361
/BP4 (PS22) is shown in 4-bit data (0 to 15).
*5 The combination of the ON/OFF of the paper size boards and the paper size detection boards (4 in all) is
shown in 4-bit data (0 to 15).
Sensor check display State of each of the 4 sensors on the paper size boards
17-2 (tray 1), 17-3 (tray 2), /1 (PSB /1) and /2 (PSB /2) and the paper size detect
17-4 (tray 3), 17-5 (tray 4) boards /3 (PSDB /3) and /4 (PSDB /4)
1 2 3 4
0 OFF OFF OFF OFF
1 ON OFF OFF OFF
2 OFF ON OFF OFF
3 ON ON OFF OFF
4 OFF OFF ON OFF
5 ON OFF ON OFF
6 OFF ON ON OFF
7 ON ON ON OFF
8 OFF OFF OFF ON
9 ON OFF OFF ON
10 OFF ON OFF ON
11 ON ON OFF ON
12 OFF OFF ON ON
13 ON OFF ON ON
14 OFF ON ON ON
15 ON ON ON ON
215
10. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
This machine is provided with an input/output check function as a self-diagnostic function. For the load check,
the check and adjustment (output check) of the load operation can be made.
A. Procedure
B. List of loads
High voltage/image Classification
Multi code
Symbol
Code
0 0 L1 Exposure lamp
1 0 M4, Toner supply motor, toner solenoid Same as 55-003
SD5 turn ON at the same time
216
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 10. SERVICE MODE
bizhub 501/421/361
Multi code
Symbol
Code
Name Restrictive conditions
217
10. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
Multi code
Symbol
Code
Name Restrictive conditions
23 3 M124 Paper lift motor /3 (PC-206) The upper limit sensor /3 (PS114)
turns ON, or it is stopped by the stop
button.
4 M125 Paper lift motor /4 (PC-206) The upper limit sensor /4 (PS123)
turns ON, or it is stopped by the stop
button.
5 M151 Paper lift motor (LU) The upper limit sensor (PS152) turns
ON, or it is stopped by the stop but-
ton.
6 M9, Feed motor, pick-up solenoid /BP turn Valid only when the paper empty sen-
SD1 ON at the same time sor/BP (PS18) detects a no paper
condition.
25 1 CL1 Registration clutch
2 CL2 Loop clutch
3 CL3 Vertical conveyance clutch
4 CL151 Feed clutch (LU)
29 0 SD2 Drum claw solenoid ON
31 1 M2, L1 Scanner motor, exposure lamp After home position search, A3
Optical device
218
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 10. SERVICE MODE
bizhub 501/421/361
Multi code
Symbol
Code
Name Restrictive conditions
219
10. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
Multi code
Symbol
Code
Name Restrictive conditions
2 — — —
3 M4, After alignment motor /Rr, /Fr opera-
M5 tion, home position search
4 — — —
5 M11 Tray lift motor up Stops when the upper limit sensor
(PS15) turns ON after the tray posi-
tion sensor (PS3) detects the tray 2.
220
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 10. SERVICE MODE
FS-522 Classification
bizhub 501/421/361
Multi code
Symbol
Code
Name Restrictive conditions
70 6 M11 Tray lift motor initial operation After the tray goes down, it goes up
when the lower limit sensor (PS14)
turns ON and it stops when PS15
turns ON. It becomes valid after exe-
cuting the load check 70-5.
7 M12 Shutter close/open operation once At the same time, the paper exit roller
release/pressure operation is made
by the paper exit roller release motor
(M6).
8 — — —
9 — — —
10 — — —
11 M6 Release/press operation of exit roller
once
12 M9 Open/close operation once of paper
exit opening (SD)
13 — — —
14 — — —
15 — — —
16 — — —
17 M7 After 2-staple positioning, home posi-
tion search
18 — — —
19 — — —
20 — — —
21 — — —
22 — — —
23 M10, Folding once (SD)
M14
24 to 52 — — —
53 M1, Exit motor (1 second ON), stacker
SD1 paddle solenoid ON/OFF
54 M1, Exit motor (1 second ON), exit paddle
SD2 solenoid ON/OFF
55 to 77 — — —
78 M1 Punching once (PU)
79 M2 Switching the number of punches Inch only
221
10. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
ADU/Reverse Classification
bizhub 501/421/361
Multi code
Symbol
Code
Name Restrictive conditions
222
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 10. SERVICE MODE
bizhub 501/421/361
Displays the memory capacity and the hard disc capacity (total/free space).
A. Procedure
A. Procedure
A. Procedure
223
10. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
Formats HDD.
Note
• When formatting HDD, all the data stored in HDD gets lost and becomes unrecoverable.
A. Procedure
NOTE
• The following data are stored in each partition.
1 : Data related to Ptinter (Fonts/spooling space)
2 : Data related to the box (System/User box)
3 : Reserved space (for next expansion of functions)
• When selecting [Erase Mode], the lock password which is set to HDD is canceled and the HDD
formatting is executed for all partitions. When the HDD lock password is not set, only the HDD
formatting for each partition is executed.
5. Turn OFF the power switch (SW2) and the main power switch (SW1) in this order.
6. After waiting for 10 seconds or more, turn ON SW1 and SW2 in this order.
Note
• Turning ON SW1 not waiting for 10 seconds or more after turning it OFF may damage HDD. Be
sure to turn ON SW1 10 seconds or more after turning it OFF.
A. Procedure
224
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 10. SERVICE MODE
bizhub 501/421/361
Display Adjustment item
1/28 Print position adjustment: leading edge (tray 1)
Print position adjustment: leading edge (tray 2)
Print position adjustment: leading edge (tray 3)
Print position adjustment: leading edge (tray 4)
Print position adjustment: leading edge (LCT)
Print position adjustment: leading edge (bypass (normal paper))
Print position adjustment: leading edge (bypass (thick paper: large))
2/28 Print position adjustment: leading edge (bypass (thick paper: small))
Print position adjustment: leading edge (bypass (thin paper))
Print position adjustment: leading edge (bypass (OHP))
Print position adjustment: leading edge (bypass (envelope))
Print position adjustment: leading edge (bypass (label: large))
Print position adjustment: leading edge (bypass (label: small))
Print position adjustment: leading edge (ADU)
3/28 Print position adjustment: side edge (tray 1 (common))
Print position adjustment: side edge (tray 1 (small size))
Print position adjustment: side edge (tray 1 (large size))
Print position adjustment: side edge (tray 2 (common))
Print position adjustment: side edge (tray 2 (small size))
Print position adjustment: side edge (tray 2 (large size))
Print position adjustment: side edge (tray 3 (common))
4/28 Print position adjustment: side edge (tray 3 (small size))
Print position adjustment: side edge (tray 3 (large size))
Print position adjustment: side edge (tray 4 (common))
Print position adjustment: side edge (tray 4 (small size))
Print position adjustment: side edge (tray 4 (large size))
Print position adjustment: side edge (LCT)
Print position adjustment: side edge (ADU (common))
5/28 Print position adjustment: side edge (ADU (small size))
Print position adjustment: side edge (ADU (large size))
Print position adjustment: side edge (bypass (common))
Print position adjustment: side edge (bypass (small size))
Print position adjustment: side edge (bypass (large size))
Magnification in the printer feed direction (printer: normal paper)
Magnification in the printer feed direction (printer: OHP (large))
225
10. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
226
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 10. SERVICE MODE
bizhub 501/421/361
12/28 Printer registration loop amount (bypass (label: large))
—
Printer registration loop amount (ADU (small))
Printer registration loop amount (ADU (large))
Tray adjustment (maximum width)
Tray adjustment (minimum width)
Scan area (scanning position: leading edge)
13/28 Scan area (scanning position: side edge)
Magnification in the scanner feed crossover direction
Magnification in the scanner feed direction
Printer leading edge erasure amount adjustment
Charging main manual
Transfer manual
Separation AC manual
14/28 Separation DC manual
Carging grid manual
Developing grid manual
TCR
Toner density
Dot diameter
LD1 offset (normal paper)
15/28 LD1 offset (thick paper)
LD2 offset (normal paper)
LD2 offset (thick paper)
LD1 bias (normal paper)
LD1 bias (thick paper)
LD2 bias (normal paper)
LD2 bias (thick paper)
16/28 Magnification in the ADF feed direction (single sided: 50%)
Magnification in the ADF feed direction (single sided: 100%)
Magnification in the ADF feed direction (single sided: 200%)
Magnification in the ADF feed direction (single sided: 400%)
Magnification in the ADF feed direction (double sided: 50%)
Magnification in the ADF feed direction (double sided: 100%)
Magnification in the ADF feed direction (double sided: 200%)
17/28 Magnification in the ADF feed direction (double sided: 400%)
ADF leading edge (single sided)
ADF leading edge (double sided (front side))
ADF leading edge (double sided (back side))
ADF side edge (single sided)
ADF side edge (double sided (front side))
ADF side edge (double sided (back side))
227
10. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
228
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 10. SERVICE MODE
bizhub 501/421/361
24/28 DipSW No.05
DipSW No.06
DipSW No.07
DipSW No.08
DipSW No.09
DipSW No.10
DipSW No.11
25/28 DipSW No.12
DipSW No.13
DipSW No.14
DipSW No.15
DipSW No.16
DipSW No.17
DipSW No.18
26/28 DipSW No.19
DipSW No.20
DipSW No.21
DipSW No.22
DipSW No.23
DipSW No.24
DipSW No.25
27/28 DipSW No.26
DipSW No.27
DipSW No.28
DipSW No.29
DipSW No.30
DipSW No.31
DipSW No.32
28/28 DipSW No.33
DipSW No.34
DipSW No.35
DipSW No.36
DipSW No.37
DipSW No.38
DipSW No.39
229
10. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
10.8 ADF
bizhub 501/421/361
Note
• Make sure that the adjustment of the magnification in the printer paper feed direction has been
completed.
(See P.176)
A. Procedure
230
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 10. SERVICE MODE
bizhub 501/421/361
Adjusts the position at which the image read is started while in the DF original scan.
This adjustment adjusts the leading edge position of the image by changing the image read start timing after the
leading edge of the original passes through the read position.
The adjustment is made for each mode (1-Sided, 2-Sided (Front/Back)).
A. Procedure
231
10. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
Adjusts the mis-centering of the image in the main scan direction while in the DF original scan.
The adjustment is made for each mode (1-Sided, 2-Sided (Front/Back)).
Note
• Make sure that the adjustment of the printer position: side edge has been completed.
(See P.175)
A. Procedure
232
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 10. SERVICE MODE
bizhub 501/421/361
Adjusts the original loop amount (1-Sided or 2-Sided) at the registration roller section of DF to adjust a paper
skew, wrinkles or an original jam at the registration section.
This adjustment adjusts the re-start timing of the DF registration roller.
A. Procedure
A. Procedure
233
10. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
Prearrangements
• Clean the slit glass.
• Check the whole area of the white chart to see if it is not soiled.
A. Procedure
NOTE
• Be sure to set the white chart in the A4 direction.
4. Press the Start key.
When the white chart is scanned and the auto adjustment of density is completed successfully, "OK" is
displayed.
5. When an error message is displayed, turn OFF and ON the power switch (SW2) of the main body and
repeat steps 3 to 4 until it is completed successfully.
6. Press [OK].
234
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 10. SERVICE MODE
bizhub 501/421/361
Adjusts the read start position of the exposure unit in the sub scan direction.
A. Procedure
50gaf3c012na
235
10. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
This adjustment is made when an erroneous detection occurs with the reflective sensor, or after the DF control
board (DFCB) and each of the reflective sensors are replaced. Conducting this adjustment backs up the sensi-
tivity value of each of the reflective sensors to RAM in DFCB.
Prearrangement
• Clean each of the reflective sensors of DF.
Note
• After conducting [Initialization + Auto Adjust], the value of the original size VR (VR1) is reset. Be
sure to conduct [Original Size Adjustment].
A. Procedure
236
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 10. SERVICE MODE
10.9 Finisher
bizhub 501/421/361
10.9.1 Center Staple Position (SD-507)
Adjusts the stapling position in the sub scan direction while in the stitch-and-fold by SD-507.
Note
• Before conducting this adjustment, make sure that the adjustment of the half-fold position has
been completed.
(See P.238)
A. Procedure
4511f3c005na
237
10. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
A. Procedure
4511f3c006na
NOTE
• When there occurs a shift shown at step 7, enter a value on the minus (–) side.
9. Repeat steps 3 to 8 until it gets inside the standard value.
10. Press [OK].
238
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 10. SERVICE MODE
bizhub 501/421/361
Adjusts the position of the punch holes by PU-501 in the sub scan direction.
A. Procedure
4512f3c003na
239
10. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
A. Procedure
4512f3c004na
NOTE
• When a jam occurs in the punch mode, set a value to the minus (–) side.
• When the line of punch holes is slanted, set a value to the plus (+) side.
8. Repeat steps 3 to 7 until it gets inside the standard value.
9. Press [OK].
240
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 10. SERVICE MODE
10.10Firmware Version
bizhub 501/421/361
Displays the version of the firmware (main body and optional).
• MFP Controller
• Image Controller
• Operation Panel Message Data
• Finisher
• ADF
• Fax board controller 1
• Fax board controller 2
• Image Controller BOOT Program
A. Procedure
241
10. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
10.11.1 Outlines
• CS Remote Care enables the machine and the computer at CS Remote Care center to exchange data
through telephone/fax line or e-mail in order to control the machine.
• CS Remote Care enables the machine to call the computer at the center when trouble occurs. It also ena-
bles the computer at the center to contact the machine for the necessary data.
• Data which CS Remote Care handles can be divided into the following groups.
a. Data which show the status of use of the machine such as Total count, PM count.
b. Data which show the abnormal situation on the machine such as where and how often errors occur.
c. Data on adjustment
d. Data on setting
Note
• It cannot be set when the following setting is set to “ON”.
[Administrator Setting] → [Security Setting] → [Enhanced Security Mode]
Note
• For resetting up the machine which CS Remote Care has already been set up, clear the RAM for
CS Remote Care before resetting.
For clearing RAM, see "(3) RAM Clear" in "C. Detail Setting" in "10.11.8 Detail on settings".
(See P.254)
• When using the telephone line for connection, use the recommended modem.
(For recommended modem, contact responsible person of KONICA MINOLTA.)
• When using a telephone line modem for connection, use the data modem which is based on the
ITU-T recommendations V.34/V.32 bis/V.32 and AT command.
Step Procedure
Using the telephone line Using the Fax line Using E-mail
modem modem *1
0 Register the device ID to the application at CS Remote Care Center.
The initial connection is not available unless the device ID is registered.
1 Connecting the Be sure to remove the Be sure to remove the telephone line modem
modem telephone line modem when e-mail is used.
Turn the power for the when the fax line is
modem OFF. Connect used.
the machine and the
modem with a modem
cable. Connect the
modem and the wall
jack with a modular
cable.
* For connecting the
modular cable, see the
manual for the modem.
242
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 10. SERVICE MODE
Step Procedure
bizhub 501/421/361
Using the telephone line Using the Fax line Using E-mail
modem modem *1
2 Clearing the RAM
1. Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remove Care], and press [Detail Setting].
2. Press [RAM Clear].
3. Select Set, and press [OK].
(See P.254)
3 Selecting the CS Selecting the CS Selecting the CS Remote Care function
Remote Care function Remote Care function Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care] →
Select [Service Mode] Select [Service Mode] [System Setting], and press [E-Mail 1] or [E-Mail
→ [CS Remove Care] → [CS Remove Care] 2].
→ [System Selection], → [System Selection],
and press [Modem]. and press [Fax].
4 Inputting the ID Code
1. Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care] → [ID Code], and press [ID Code].
2. Input the seven digits ID of the service person, and press [ID Code] again.
(See P.252)
5 Setting the date and time for CS Remote Care
1. Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care], and press [Detail Setting].
2. Press [Date & Time Setting].
3. Input the date, time and the time zone using the 10-Key Pad, and press [Set].
(See P.254)
6 Setting the Center ID
1. Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care], and press [Detail Setting].
2. Press [Machine Setting] → [Center ID], and input the Center ID (five digits).
(See P.253)
7 Proceed to step 8. Encryption setting
1. Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care],
and press [Detail Setting].
2. Press [Basic Setting] and select either
Encryption or No Encryption.
243
10. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
Step Procedure
bizhub 501/421/361
Using the telephone line Using the Fax line Using E-mail
modem modem *1
9 Inputting the Device telephone number Proceed to Step 10.
1. Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care],
and press [Detail Setting].
2. Press [Machine Setting] → [Device Telephone
Number].
3. Input the Device telephone number using the
10-Key Pad and [P], [T], [W], [-].
(See P.253)
10 Inputting the AT com- Proceed to step 11. Setting the E-mail address
mand for initializing the 1. Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care],
modem and press [Server Set].
1. Select [Service 2. Press [Server for RX], and set POP3 server
Mode] → [CS address, POP3 Login name, POP3 pass-
Remote Care] → word and POP3 port number.
and press [Detail (See P.255)
Setting]. 3. Press [Receive], and set the E-Mail address,
2. Press [AT Com- Mail Check, Connection Time Out and
mand]. APOP Authentication.
3. Input AT Com- (See P.256)
mand. 4. Press [Send], and set the SMTP server
NOTE address, SMTP port number, Connection
• Change this Com- Time Out, and APOP Authentication.
mand only when it (See P.257)
is necessary. 5. Press [TX/RX Test], and press Start key to
(They do not need carry out a transmission/reception test. If it
to be changed in fails to exchange messages, see the error
normal condition.) message to take necessary measure, and
• For details on AT try again.
Command, see (See P.258)
the manual for the
modem.
(See P.253)
11 Setting the DIPSW for CS Remote Care Proceed to Step 12.
NOTE
• This setting is not normally necessary.
Take this step only when necessary in a
specific connecting condition.
244
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 10. SERVICE MODE
Step Procedure
bizhub 501/421/361
Using the telephone line Using the Fax line Using E-mail
modem modem *1
12 Executing the initial transmission Receiving the initial connection E-mail message
1. Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care], Sending the initial connection E-mail message
and press [Detail Setting]. from the Center to the address of the Copier.
2. Press [initial transmission] key on the right NOTE
bottom of the screen to start initial transmis- • When receiving the initial connection E-
sion. mail message from the Center while CS
3. When the machine is properly connected with Remote Care-related screen is being
the Center, CS Remote Care setting screen displayed, the current setting informa-
will be displayed. tion will be deleted, and CS Remote
NOTE Care setting will be displayed.
• The initial transmission key at the right • For sending the initial connection E-
bottom of the screen will be displayed mail, see the manual for CS Remote
only when the Center ID, the Device ID, Care Center.
Telephone number of the Center and the • Messages can be exchanged only
Device telephone number have been between the Center with initial connec-
input. tion and the Copier.
(See P.253) • The initial connection from the Center
will be carried out, and the E-mail
address of the Center will be stored in
the Copier.
• When the initial registration is complete,
the E-mail address of the Center will be
displayed by selecting [Service Mode] →
[CS Remote Care] → [Detail Setting],
[Basic Setting] → [E-Mail address].
*1: This procedure is available only when the optional Fax kit (FK-502) is mounted.
245
10. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
Note
• SW bits data are written into the NVRAM every time a change is made. In case you changed bit
data by accident, be sure to restore the previous state.
A. Input procedure
1. Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care] → [Detail Setting], and press [Software Switch Setting].
2. Press [Switch No.], and input the SW number (two digits) using the 10-Key Pad.
3. Press [Bit Assignment], and select SW bit number using the arrow keys, and input 0 or 1 using the 10-Key
Pad.
(For setting by hexadecimal numbers, press [HEX Assignment] key, and input using the 10-Key Pad or A
to F keys.)
4. Press [Fix].
Note
• About functions of each switch, see to "B. List of software SW for CS Remote Care".
Note
• Do not change any bit not described on this table.
246
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 10. SERVICE MODE
bizhub 501/421/361
SW 04 0 to 7 Reservation — — 0
SW 05 0 Modem redial interval *2 *2 1
1 *2 *2 1
2 *2 *2 0
3 *2 *2 0
4 to 7 Reservation — — 0
SW 06 0 Modem redial times *3 *3 0
1 *3 *3 1
2 *3 *3 0
3 *3 *3 1
4 *3 *3 0
5 *3 *3 0
6 *3 *3 0
7 Reservation — — 0
SW 07 0 Redial for response time out Do not redial Redial 1
1 to 7 Reserved — — 0
SW 08 0 Retransmission interval on E-Mail deliv- *4 *4 0
1 ery error *4 *4 1
2 *4 *4 1
3 *4 *4 0
4 to 7 Reservation — — 0
SW 09 0 Retransmission times on E-Mail *5 *5 0
1 delivery error *5 *5 1
2 *5 *5 0
3 *5 *5 1
4 *5 *5 0
5 *5 *5 0
6 *5 *5 0
7 Reservation — — 0
SW 10 0 to 7 Reservation — — 0
SW 11 0 Timer 1 *6 *6 0
1 RING reception → CONNECT *6 *6 0
2 reception *6 *6 0
3 *6 *6 0
4 *6 *6 0
5 *6 *6 1
6 *6 *6 0
7 *6 *6 0
247
10. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
SW 12 0 Timer 2 *7 *7 0
1 Dial request completed → CONNECT *7 *7 0
2 reception *7 *7 0
3 *7 *7 0
4 *7 *7 0
5 *7 *7 0
6 *7 *7 1
7 *7 *7 0
SW 13 0 to 7 Reservation — — 0
SW 14 0 Timer 4 *8 *8 0
1 Line connection → Start request *8 *8 0
2 telegram delivery *8 *8 0
3 *8 *8 0
4 *8 *8 0
5 *8 *8 1
6 *8 *8 0
7 *8 *8 0
SW 15 0 Timer 5 *9 *9 0
1 Wait time for other side's response *9 *9 1
2 *9 *9 1
3 *9 *9 1
4 *9 *9 1
5 *9 *9 0
6 *9 *9 0
7 *9 *9 0
SW 16 0 to 7 Reservation — — 0
SW 17 0 to 7 Reservation — — 0
SW 18 0 Attention display Do not call Call 1
To set weather to give the alarm display
when using the modem but the power
for the modem is OFF.
1 to 7 Reservation — — 0
SW 19 to SW 0 to 7 Reservation — — 0
40
*1 Baud rate
248
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 10. SERVICE MODE
bizhub 501/421/361
Mode 05-3 05-2 05-1 05-0
1 minute 0 0 0 1
2 minutes 0 0 1 0
"3 minutes" 0 0 1 1
4 minutes 0 1 0 0
5 minutes 0 1 0 1
6 minutes 0 1 1 0
7 minutes 0 1 1 1
8 minutes 1 0 0 0
9 minutes 1 0 0 1
10 minutes 1 0 1 0
249
10. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
250
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 10. SERVICE MODE
bizhub 501/421/361
• Follow the steps below to make sure that CS Remote Care has been properly set up.
Note
• For transmitting data of the machine by calling the center on the specified date and time, refer to
the manual for CS Remote Care Center.
1. Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care], and press [Detail setting].
2. Press [Communication Log Print].
3. Load Tray 1 or Bypass tray with A4S paper.
4. Press the Start key to output transmission log.
251
10. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
A. System Selection
B. ID Code
252
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 10. SERVICE MODE
C. Detail Setting
bizhub 501/421/361
(1) Basic Setting
Functions • Execute the basic setting.
Use • Use to change the set contents.
• Use to register the machine to the CS Remote Care Center.
Setting/ 1. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
Procedure 2. Press [CS Remote Care].
3. Touching the [Detail Setting] will display the basic setting.
Basic Setting
• Set the Center ID and the phone No.
• When e-mail is selected for system and all setup procedures are completed, E-mail
address of the Center is displayed.
* When entering the phone No, 10-Keys and keys on the screen have following meanings.
[–] Pose : Waits to start transmitting after dialing
[W] Wait : Detects the dial tone of the other end
[T] Tone dial : Carry out tone dialing
[P] Pulse dial : Carry out pulse dialing
[*], [#] : To be used as necessary
NOTE
• Multiple items of data can be selected and sent at one time. However, be sure
that only EKC data cannot be sent together with other items of data.
Initial Transmission
• Touching the Initial Transmission key will sent the information to the CS Remote Care
Center to register the machine.
(Only when the Modem or Fax is selected on the system Input.)
253
10. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
NOTE
• If RAM Clear is selected during transmission, RAM clear processing will be
implemented at the time the transmission is completed regardless of whether it
is done properly or not.
Setting/ • The default setting is “Unset.”
Procedure
Set “Unset”
254
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 10. SERVICE MODE
bizhub 501/421/361
Functions • It sets the intervals for resending E-Mails when transmission error occurred.
• It can be set only when [E-Mail] is selected by System Setting.
Use • To use when changing the intervals for resending E-Mails when transmission error
occurred.
Setting/ • The default setting is 60 minute.
Procedure
“60 minute” (10 to 1440)
(7) AT Command
D. Server Setting
• Server Setting can be set only when [E-Mail] is selected by System Setting.
<Input FQDN>
• Enter the domain name.
<POP3 password>
Functions • To set the logon password for the POP3 server used for the CS Remote Care.
Use • To set the logon password for the POP3 server.
Setting/ • The default setting is No.
Procedure • Up to 15 characters (alphanumeric characters and symbols) can be used.
255
10. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
Functions • To set the POP3 port number used for the CS Remote Care.
Use • To set the port number for the POP3 server.
Setting/ • The default setting is 110.
Procedure “110” (1 to 65535)
(2) Receive
<E-mail Address>
Functions • To set the e-mail address used for the CS Remote Care.
Use • To set the e-mail address.
Setting/ • The default setting is No.
Procedure • Up to 129 characters (alphanumeric characters and symbols) can be used.
<Mail Check>
Functions • To set whether or not to use Mail Check and the time interval for the POP server
used for the CS Remote Care.
Use • To set whether or not to use Mail Check and the time interval for the POP server
used for the CS Remote Care.
• To change the time interval for Mail Check.
Setting/ • The default setting is No.
Procedure “No” (1 to120 min., No)
<Connection timeout>
Functions • To set the timeout period for connection during reception.
Use • To change the timeout period for connection during reception.
Setting/ • The default setting is 60 Sec.
Procedure “60 Sec” (30 to 300 Sec)
<APOP Authentication>
Functions • To set whether or not to authenticate the APOP during reception.
Use • To authenticate the APOP during reception.
Setting/ • The default setting is No.
Procedure Yes “No”
256
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 10. SERVICE MODE
(3) Send
bizhub 501/421/361
<SMTP server>
Functions • To set the SMTP sever address for transmission used for the CS Remote Care.
Use • To set the SMTP server address
• SMTP server address can be set by the IP address or the domain name.
Setting/ <Input IP Address>
Procedure • IP Address Version 4 format
[0 to 255].[0 to 255].[0 to 255].[0 to 255]
<Input FQDN>
• Enter the domain name.
<Authentication Setting>
Functions • To set whether or not to authenticate during transmission via SMTP server.
Use • To use when authenticating during transmission.
Available authentication mode: POP Before SMTP, SMTP authentication
Setting/ • The default setting is OFF.
Procedure
“OFF” POP Before SMTP SMTP Authentication
* Setting to “POP Before SMTP” will set the time for POP Before SMTP.
* When setting to SMTP authentication, press the “Setting Check” key for authentica-
tion.
User ID : Enter the User ID for SMTP authentication.
Password : Enter the password for SMTP authentication.
Domain name : Enter the domain name for SMTP authentication.
257
10. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
Functions • To determine the correct transmission and reception using CS Remote Care.
Use • Use to determine the correct transmission and reception using CS Remote Care.
Setting/ • Press the Start key to let the machine start the transmission and reception test.
Procedure • The test procedure and result will be displayed on the screen.
258
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 10. SERVICE MODE
bizhub 501/421/361
A. When Connecting by Modem
259
10. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
0018 Machine ID has already been registered • Set the initial registrations
(Request telegram 2 (SET-UP) comes from the again for all including the
main unit that has already registered Machine host side.
ID.)
0019 Center ID Error • Check Center ID setting of
(Center ID of the host is not identical with the the main unit side.
one of start request telegram.) • Check Center ID setting of
the main unit side.
001A Device ID inconsistency • Check Device ID setting of
(Device ID of the host is not identical with the the main unit side.
one of start request telegram.) • Check the setting of the
host side.
001B Device ID Unregistered • Check Device ID setting of
(Request telegram 2 (Constant data transmit- the main unit side.
ting, Emergency call) comes from the main unit • Check the setting of the
that has not registered Machine ID yet.) host side.
001E Impossible to change (During printing) • Try again when the machine
(Setting cannot be changed because the setting is not printing.
change is made during the machine is printing or
starts printing.)
0020 Timeout of Telegram Delivery • Try communication again.
(At waiting mode of telegram delivery the
machine fails to receive the telegram in a given
time.)
0027 Transmission / Receiving collision • Try communication again.
(Receiving is detecting during transmitting pro-
cessing)
Note
• When a code other than the ones listed above is displayed, contact KMBT and inform the error
code.
260
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 10. SERVICE MODE
bizhub 501/421/361
1062 Modifying not available due to the copy job cur- • Ask the host to send
rently performing another instruction mail for
• When informing the host that it cannot be modifying.
modified due to the copy job currently per-
forming.
1081 Frame No. error • Check the status of the
• The last frame has not been received. Machine registration on host
• There are missing frame No. side.
1084 Date expired • Ask the host to send
• Expiration date for data modification com- another instruction mail for
mand has passed. modifying.
1092 Received an error mail when Center setup is not • Check the status of the
complete Machine registration on host
side.
2039 Socket is not connected. • Check the SMTP Server and
• LAN cable on the Copier side is detached. POP3 Server on User side.
203E Network is down. • Check the connection
• LAN cable on the Copier side is detached. between the Copier on the
User’s side and the Network
connector.
• Check the Network environ-
ment on the User’s side.
3000 POP3_AUTHORIZATION_ERR • Check the POP3 Server
environment on User’s side.
3001 POP3_TRANSACTION_ERR • Check the POP3 Server
environment on User’s side.
3002 POP3_CONNECT_ERR • Check the POP3 Server
environment on User’s side.
3003 POP3_TIMEOUT_ERR • Check the POP3 Server
environment on User’s side.
3004 POP3_FORMAT_ERR • Check the POP3 Server
environment on User’s side.
3005 POP3_MEMORY_ERR • Check the POP3 Server
environment on User’s side.
3006 POP3_JOBID_ERR • Check the POP3 Server
environment on User’s side.
3007 POP3_NO_DATA_ERR • Check the POP3 Server
environment on User’s side.
3008 POP3_DELETE_FAIL_ERR • Check the POP3 Server
environment on User’s side.
3009 POP3_MAILBOX_FULL • Check the POP3 Server
environment on User’s side.
4103 Not Ready • Wait for a while and try
• Tried to transmit or receive an E-Mail when transmitting again.
the machine was not yet in the E-Mail receiv-
ing status after power was turned ON.
261
10. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
4104 SMTP Channel Not Ready • Wait for a while and try
transmitting again.
4105 POP3 Channel Not Ready • Wait for a while and try
transmitting again.
4106 Not Ready other than the ones listed above. • Wait for a while and try
transmitting again.
Note
• When a code other than the ones listed above is displayed, contact KMBT and inform the error
code.
Note
• When a code other than the ones listed above is displayed, see the FK-502 Service Manual.
262
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 10. SERVICE MODE
bizhub 501/421/361
If communication is not done properly, check the condition by following the procedures shown below.
1. Shift the screen in the order of [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care] → [Detail Setting].
At this time, in the cases of Initial transmitting / Administrator transmitting / Maintenance Start transmitting
/ Maintenance Finish transmitting, the communication result will be displayed at the top of the screen.
* For the communication result, the following message will be displayed based on its success or failure.
263
10. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
10.12 System 2
bizhub 501/421/361
A. Procedure
Note
• Be sure not to change the setting of DipSW that is not given in this service manual.
A. Procedure
264
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 10. SERVICE MODE
bizhub 501/421/361
Note
• Be sure not to change bits with no particular reference made of the function.
265
10. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
266
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 10. SERVICE MODE
bizhub 501/421/361
Japan Inch Metric
DipSW9 0 Copy quantity limit *4 *4 0 0 0
1 *4 *4 0 0 0
2 *4 *4 0 0 0
3 *4 *4 0 0 0
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 — — — 0 0 0
DipSW10 0 — — — 0 0 0
1 — — — 1 1 1
2 — — — 1 1 1
3 — — — 0 0 0
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 Downloaded font display set- *5 *5 0 0 0
6 ting *5 *5 0 0 0
7 Jam code display Not displayed Displayed 1 1 1
DipSW11 0 — — — 0 0 0
1 — — — 1 1 1
2 — — — 0 0 0
3 — — — 0 0 0
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 — — — 0 0 0
DipSW12 0 — — — 0 0 0
1 — — — 0 0 0
2 — — — 0 0 0
3 Print count setting up to the *6 *6 0 0 0
4 print inhibition when getting at *6 *6 0 0 0
5 PM *6 *6 0 0 0
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 — — — 0 0 0
DipSW13 0 — — — 0 0 0
1 — — — 0 0 0
2 — — — 0 0 0
3 Jaggy filter selection OFF ON 0 0 0
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 Discrimination level of the non- *7 *7 1 1 1
7 image auto erase mode *7 *7 0 0 0
267
10. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
268
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 10. SERVICE MODE
bizhub 501/421/361
Japan Inch Metric
DipSW18 0 Separation of a defective part Normal Separated 0 0 0
from the tray 1 (upper stage of
the main body)
1 Separation of a defective part Normal Separated 0 0 0
from the tray 2 (lower stage of
the main body)
2 Separation of a defective part Normal Separated 0 0 0
from the bypass feed
3 — — — 0 0 0
4 Separation of a defective part Normal Separated 0 0 0
from the tray 3 (PC-206 upper
stage/PC-407)
5 Separation of a defective part Normal Separated 0 0 0
from the tray 4 (PC-206 lower
stage)
6 Separation of a defective part Normal Separated 0 0 0
from the tray 5 (LU)
7 — — — 0 0 0
DipSW19 0 Separation of a defective part Normal Separated 0 0 0
from the printer controller (IC)
1 Separation of a defective part Normal Separated 0 0 0
from the FAX kit (FK)
2 — — — 0 0 0
3 Separation of a defective part Normal Separated 0 0 0
from HDD
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 Separation of a defective part Normal Separated 0 0 0
from DF
DipSW20 0 Separation of a defective part Normal Separated 1 1 1
from the network
1 Separation of a defective part Normal Separated 0 0 0
from IEEE1284
2 Separation of a defective part Normal Separated 0 0 0
from USB
3 — — — 0 0 0
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 Separation of a defective part Normal Separated 0 0 0
from SD
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 — — — 0 0 0
269
10. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
270
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 10. SERVICE MODE
bizhub 501/421/361
Japan Inch Metric
DipSW24 0 — — — 0 0 0
1 — — — 0 0 0
2 — — — 0 0 0
3 — — — 0 0 0
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 Stop setting between jobs in *12 *12 0 0 0
the continuous print operation
of small jobs.
DipSW25 0 — — — 0 0 0
1 — — — 0 0 0
2 — — — 0 0 0
3 Switchover of the TSL control Normally All OFF 0 0 0
ON/OFF
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 Image rotation when stapling is Not rotate rotate to 180° 0 0 0
not selected
7 — — — 0 0 0
DipSW26 0 Polygon motor stop timer 15 seconds 30 seconds 0 0 0
1 — — — 0 0 0
2 — — — 0 0 0
3 Reference image position for At the center On the rear 0 0 0
bypass custom paper side of paper
4 RS-232C I/F setting Valid Invalid 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 — — — 0 0 0
DipSW27 0 — — — 0 0 0
1 — — — 0 0 0
2 — — — 0 0 0
3 — — — 0 0 0
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 — — — 0 0 0
DipSW28 0 — — — 0 0 0
1 — — — 0 0 0
2 — — — 0 0 0
3 — — — 0 0 0
271
10. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
272
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 10. SERVICE MODE
bizhub 501/421/361
Japan Inch Metric
DipSW33 5 — — — 0 0 0
6 — — — 0 0 0
7 — — — 0 0 0
DipSW34 0 System ON/OFF while in the ON OFF 1 1 1
sleep or the power switch
(SW2) OFF
1 FS-522 paper exit tray position *18 *18 0 0 0
2 *18 *18 0 0 0
3 *18 *18 0 0 0
4 Print start permission when Permit Prohibit 0 0 0
SD-507 is supplied with paper.
5 — — — 0 0 0
6 — — — 1 1 1
7 — — — 0 0 0
DipSW35 0 Custom original support *19 *19 0 0 0
1 *19 *19 0 0 0
2 — — — 0 0 0
3 — — — 0 0 0
4 — — — 0 0 0
5 Address book password Valid Invalid 0 0 0
export permission setting
6 Address setting after sending Reset Not reset 0 0 0
through the scanner
7 — — — 0 0 0
DipSW36 0 — — — 1 1 1
1 Telnet used or not used Not used Used 0 0 0
2 Fusing temperature setting *20 *20 0 0 0
3 when normal paper is selected *20 *20 0 0 0
4 Fusing temperature setting *21 *21 0 0 0
when thick paper, envelope or
label is selected
5 Fusing temperature setting *22 *22 0 0 0
when thin paper is selected.
6 Fusing temperature setting *23 *23 0 0 0
7 when OHP is selected. *23 *23 0 0 0
273
10. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
274
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 10. SERVICE MODE
bizhub 501/421/361
Set the copy count that is printed until the print oper-
After 0 print or its equiva- 0 0
ation is terminated from the toner near empty is dis-
lent
played after the toner level sensor (PZS) detects toner
After 100 print or its 0 1
empty for a certain period of time.
equivalent
After 200 print or its 1 0
equivalent
After 500 print or its 1 1
equivalent
*2 Print stop condition after the toner supply display Mode 4-3 4-2
Set the copy count that is printed until the print is pro-
100 prints or its equiva- 0 0
hibited after a message set by DipSW4-0/1 is dis-
lent
played.
400 prints or its equiva- 0 1
lent
700 prints or its equiva- 1 0
lent
1000 prints or its equiva- 1 1
lent
275
10. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
No limit 0 0 0 0
1 print 0 0 0 1
3 prints 0 0 1 0
5 prints 0 0 1 1
9 prints 0 1 0 0
10 prints 0 1 0 1
20 prints 0 1 1 0
30 prints 0 1 1 1
50 prints 1 0 0 0
99 prints 1 0 0 1
250 prints 1 0 1 0
No limit 1 0 1 1
No limit 1 1 0 0
No limit 1 1 1 0
No limit 1 1 1 1
*6 Setting of the print count made up to the time of Mode 12-5 12-4 12-3
the print inhibition when gettint to PM
1000 prints 0 0 0
When getting at DipSW8-2PM with the print inhibition
2000 prints 0 0 1
set to "1”, the print stops after getting at the PM
3000 prints 0 1 0
count shown on the right.
4000 prints 0 1 1
5000 prints 1 0 0
276
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 10. SERVICE MODE
bizhub 501/421/361
Set the fusing temperature while in the low power
The fusing heater lamps /1 (L2) and /2 0 0
mode.
(L3) turn on when the thermistors /1
(TH1) and /2 (TH2) are respectively at
70 °C, and turn OFF when they are at
80 °C.
The fusing heater lamps /1 (L2) and /2 0 1
(L3) turn ON when the thermistors /1
(TH1) and /2 (TH2) are respectively at
120 °C, and turn OFF when they are at
130 °C.
The fusing heater lamps /1 (L2) and /2 1 0
(L3) turn ON when the thermistors /1
(TH1) and /2 (TH2) are respectively at
150 °C, and turn OFF when they are at
160 °C.
The fusing heater lamps /1 (L2) and /2 1 1
(L3) turn ON when the thermistors /1
(TH1) and /2 (TH2) are respectively at
70 °C, and turn OFF when they are at
80 °C.
8 /4 x 13
1 0 0 1
8 /8 x 13
1
0 1 0
8 x 13 0 1 1
*11 Platen small size (81/2 x 11/A4 or less) setting Mode 21-5
Default setting is "1" for inch and "0" for metric.
A notice is made in a size detected by 0
APS.
277
10. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
*13 Selection of the transfer/separation output of the Mode 29-2 29-1 29-0
user paper (tray)
Normal paper (Japan) 0 0 0
Set the transfer/separation output that is applicable
Normal paper (inch) 0 0 1
when selecting the user paper in [Paper type] of [Util-
ity menu]. Normal paper (metric) 0 1 0
Thick paper 0 1 1
Thin paper 1 0 0
Recycled paper 1 0 1
*14 TSL control of the user paper (tray) Mode 29-4 29-3
Set the TSL control that is applicable when selecting
Normal ON control 0 0
the user paper in [Paper type] of [Utility menu]. When
All OFF 0 1
selecting "Switch over depending on the environ-
ment," conduct the TSL control by switching over Switching over depending 1 0
*15 Selection of the transfer/separation output of the Mode 30-2 30-1 30-0
user paper (bypass)
Normal paper (Japan) 0 0 0
When selecting the bypass tray, set the transfer/sep-
Normal paper (inch) 0 0 1
aration output that is applicable when the user paper
is selected in [Specialty paper] of "Change Tray set- Normal paper (metric) 0 1 0
*16 TSL control of the user paper (bypass) Mode 30-4 30-3
When selecting the bypass tray, set the TSL control
Normal control 0 0
that is applicable when the user paper is selected in
All OFF 0 1
[Specialty paper] of "Change Tray settings" or when it
is selected in [Paper type] of [Utility menu]. Switching over depending 1 0
278
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 10. SERVICE MODE
*17 Switchover of the punch hole number (PU) Mode 33-1 33-0
bizhub 501/421/361
While in the use of PU-501, set the number of punch
2 holes (Japan) 0 0
holes to be displayed on the operation board. This
3 holes (inch) 0 1
can be set regardless of the destination of the main
4 holes (metric) 1 0
body.
Default setting is 3 holes for inch and 4 holes for met- 4 holes (Sweden) 1 1
ric.
*18 FS-522 paper exit tray position Mode 34-3 34-2 34-1
Set the stop position of the paper exit tray.
Not fixed 0 0 0
Tray 1 0 0 1
Tray 2 0 1 0
Tray 3 0 1 1
Folding/stitch-and-fold 1 0 0
tray (SD)
Not fixed 1 0 1
1 1 0
1 1 1
*20 Fusing temperature setting while in the selection Mode 36-3 36-2
of plain paper
Standard 0 0
When there occurs a problem (insufficient fusing,
Standard + 10 °C 0 1
large paper curl) with fusibility while in the selection of
plain paper, change the fusing set temperature. Standard + 5 °C 1 0
• Countermeasure Standard – 10 °C 1 1
1) Increase the temperature: To suppress a jam
due to an insufficient fusing and the wind-up of
paper around the roller.
2) Decrease the temperature: To suppress a
paper curl and the undulation of paper.
279
10. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
bizhub 501/421/361
*23 Fusing temperature setting while in the selection Mode 36-7 36-6
of OHP
Standard 0 0
When there occurs a problem (insufficient fusibility
Standard + 10 °C 0 1
and large paper curl) with fusibility while in the selec-
tion of OHP, change the fusing set temperature. (For Standard – 20 °C 1 0
*24 Switchover of the original glass and the ADF size Mode 37-4 37-3
detection
No setting 0 0
This setting is to support the originals of other than
Size detection setting of 0 1
the standard size.
81/2 x 131/2
(for Hong-Kong area)
Detection setting of 1 0
81/2 x 14
(for Europe area)
Setting is prohibited
Note
• The size conversion of the small size originals which
are undetectable can be set with Dipsw21-5.
*26 Operation at setting paper onto the bypass feed Mode 38-4 38-3
tray
Reset size with selecting 0 0
Set the operation when setting paper onto the
the bypass feed tray
bypass feed tray.)
Does not reset size with 0 1
selecting the bypass feed
tray
Reset size without select- 1 0
ing the bypass feed tray
Reset size without select- 1 1
ing the bypass feed tray
280
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 10. SERVICE MODE
*27 Set the resolution when using the Scan To HDD Mode 39-5
bizhub 501/421/361
Set the converting resolution of the scanner.
Specify the resolution when scanning 0
Convert the resolution with software 1
after scanning
Note
• When set to “0”, the image is converted at the res-
olution specified with the press panel. However
with the default setting (200dpi), the performance
speed is high but the image quality is degrated.
• When set to “1”, the image is scanned at 600dpi.
• When set to “1”, the resolution is converted with
the software so that the performance speed is
slowed down.
Note
• When “1” is selected for this setting, Media Type is
supported but print abnormality may occur.
281
10. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
10.12.4 ISW
bizhub 501/421/361
10.12.5 Option
Let the main body recognize the installing condition of the optional HDD and FAX.
A. Procedure
A. Procedure
282
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 10. SERVICE MODE
bizhub 501/421/361
After completion of the handling of a trouble related to the fusing system, release the trouble.
Note
• When a trouble related to the fusing system occurs, the software DipSW3-1 (SC latch) is set to "1"
("0" for default). This adjustment is used to return this to the default condition (normal operation).
• When an SC code is displayed on the touch panel, you cannot enter the service mode. Accord-
ingly, the following shows the method for resetting a trouble from the power-off condition.
A. Procedure
283
10. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
10.13List Output
bizhub 501/421/361
A. Procedure
284
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 10. SERVICE MODE
10.14Test Mode
bizhub 501/421/361
10.14.1 Test pattern list
The following test patterns can be output.
• Full Image Halftone (No. 1)
• Gradation Pattern (No. 2)
• Gradation Pattern (No. 3)
• Gradation Pattern (No. 5)
• Beam Gap Check (No. 11)
• Line Check Pattern (No. 16)
Note
• Be sure not to output a test pattern that is not given in this service manual.
285
10. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
bizhub 501/421/361
[Check item]
• When the density is set at 70 (halftone)
When there are white stripes or black stripes, check to see if an abnormality is found with the scanner
system or process system
[Recommended sections to be checked]: Developing unit, cleaning glass, charging corona, transfer/sep-
aration corona, scanner mirror, slit glass and original glass
• When the density is set at 0 (white)
When an image fogging occurs, check the process system to see if an abnormality is found with it.
[Recommended sections to be checked]: Charging corona, and the contact of a high voltage power
source
• When the density is set at 255 (black)
When the density is thin, check the process system to see if an abnormality is found with it.
[Recommended sections to be checked]: Write unit
Test pattern
When the density is set at 70. When the density is set at 0. When the density is set at 255.
50gaf3c007na
286
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 10. SERVICE MODE
bizhub 501/421/361
No.2 Gradation pattern
[Check item]
When fogging appears or density is thin, check the process system and the gamma correction to see if which
is defective.
Regardless of this test pattern being normal, any trouble is found with the print image, the image processing
system or scanner system is considered defective.
Test patterns
50gaf3c013na
287
10. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
bizhub 501/421/361
[Check item]
• Check to see if the laser output of LD1/LD2 is uniform and if the gradation is reproduced without a break.
[Recommended sections to be checked]: Write unit, and LD offset adjustment
* For LD offset adjustment, see "10.4.11 LD1 Offset Adj. / LD2 Offset Adj.".
(See P.189)
Test pattern
LD1 LD2
50gaf3c008na
288
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 10. SERVICE MODE
bizhub 501/421/361
No.5 Gradation pattern (8-bit output)
[Check item]
• Check the pattern to see if the laser output of LD1/LD2 is uniform with the gradation continuously repro-
duced.
[Recommended checkpoints]: Write unit, LD offset adjustment
* For LD offset adjustment, see "10.4.11 LD1 Offset Adj. / LD2 Offset Adj.".
(See P.189)
Test pattern
LD1 LD2
50gaf3c009na
289
10. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
bizhub 501/421/361
[Check item 1]
• Check to see if there is a difference in density found with the solid black pattern in the main scan and sub
scan directions.
[Recommended sections to be checked]: Charging corona, transfer/separation corona, developing unit,
and write dust-proof glass.
[Check item 2]
• Check to see if an image crawling occurs with the gradation pattern at the leading edge and/or trailing
edge of the test pattern in the sub scan direction.
[Recommended sections to be checked]: Transfer/separation corona
Test pattern
[1]
[2]
50gaf3c010na
290
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 10. SERVICE MODE
bizhub 501/421/361
No.16 Linearity evaluation pattern (1-bit error diffusion output)
[Check item]
Judge from this test pattern whether the scanner system or the printer system is abnormal.
Items that can be checked include main scan magnification, sub scan magnification, image skew, and leading
edge timing of the printer system. If the copy image is defective despite no abnormality being visible on the
test pattern, the scanner system is defective.
Test pattern
[1]
31mm 237mm
20mm
[1]
190mm
m
0m
28
205.7mm
28
0m
m
190mm
190mm 50gaf3c011na
291
10. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
There are two methods provided for the test pattern output.
• Output it by selecting the item of each test pattern. (Procedure A)
• Output it by specifying the test pattern number. (Procedure B)
Note
• Be sure not to output a test pattern that is not given in this service manual.
292
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 10. SERVICE MODE
bizhub 501/421/361
Conduct a continuous print operation test.
In this mode, the following items can be selected.
• Paperless Mode
With no paper fed and none of the paper detection/jam detection made, the print operation is made nearly at
the same timing as the usual operation.
A. Procedure
293
10. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
10.15Fax setting
bizhub 501/421/361
294
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 10. SERVICE MODE
10.16Enhanced Security
bizhub 501/421/361
10.16.1 Enhanced Security function setting procedure
A. Procedure
B. Exiting
295
10. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
10.16.3 CE Password
bizhub 501/421/361
NOTE
• When the following setting leads to the Password Rules [ON], the password
with the same letters as well as the password which is same as the previous
one cannot be changed.
[Administrator Settings] → [Security Settings]
• NEVER forget the CE password. When forgetting the CE password, call
responsible person of KMBT.
NOTE
• When the following setting leads to the Password Rules [ON], the password
with the same letters, the password which is same as the previous one and
the password of less than eight digits cannot be changed.
[Administrator Settings] → [Security Settings]
296
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 10. SERVICE MODE
bizhub 501/421/361
Functions • Set the range of settings which are available to administrator.
Use • When [Level2] is selected on this function, the functions shown below can be set by
the administrator.
10.16.6 CE Authentication
• When the "ON" is selected in [Password Rules] or [Enhanced Security Mode] of [Utility] → [Administrator
Settings] → [Security Settings], this function is not displayed.
Functions • Set the CE Password authentication when enter the Service mode.
Use • Use to activate the authentication with CE Password when enter the Service mode.
Setting / • Default setting is “OFF”
Procedure ON “OFF”
NOTE
• In case ”Valid” is suitable for [Password Rules] or [Enhanced Security Mode]
of [Utility] → [Administrator Settings] → [Security Settings], be sure to set the
CE Authentication ”ON” in advance.
Also be sure to change in advance the CE Password from default setting.
297
10. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
Functions • To set the time that elapses before the machine releases an access lock that is acti-
vated after the CE password authentication.
Use • To set the period of time that elapses before the machine releases the access lock,
which aims to prevent the unintentional release of the access lock.
• After the CE password authentication, if the access lock is activated, the lock
release timer starts to operate by input the Stop → 0 → 9 → 3 → 1 → 7 in [Meter
Count] → [Check Details] after the main power switch is turned OFF and On. When
the timer reaches the time specified in this setting, the access lock is released.
Setting / • The default setting is 1 (minutes).
Procedure
1 - 60 (minutes)
NOTE
• When Enhanced Security Mode is set to ON in [Administrator Settings] →
[Security Settings] → [Enhanced Security Mode], the period of time that can be
set in this setting is 5 minutes or more.
Functions • To release an access lock that is activated after an administrator password authen-
tication.
Use • To release the access lock with service authority when an administrator password
authentication fails and the access lock is activated.
• When the main power switch is turned OFF and ON or the period of time set in the
Release Time Settings elapses, the machine releases the access lock that is acti-
vated after the administrator password authentication.
In addition to these operations, this setting provides another way to release the
access lock.
Setting / 1. Press [Administrator unlocking].
Procedure 2. Press [unlocking] to release an access lock.
3. When [OK] is displayed, press [OK].
298
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 10. SERVICE MODE
bizhub 501/421/361
If the CF card is replaced for any reason when the Flash memory lock password is specified, the following two
misalignments may occur.
• The misalignment of the Flash memory lock password between the CF card and the NVRAM board (NRB)
• The misalignment of the HDD model type and the HDD serial number between the installed HDD and the
• data of CF card. (In case HDD is installed.)
When the misalignments above are caused by replacing the CF card, use F Memory Lock PW Initialize function
to initialize or reset the items shown below.
2) HDD resetting
When the HDD model type and the HDD serial number are misaligned between the installed HDD and the data
of CF card, HDD is not recognized and the machine behaves as described below according to the setting of
enhanced security mode.
• When [Enhanced Security Mode] is specified to "Valid" : Stops due to C-D001 ("HDD error")
• When [Enhanced Security Mode] is specified to "Invalid" : Starts without recognizing HDD.
This function is arranged to specify the model and the serial number of installed HDD to the CF card to make
available the HDD which once failed to be recognized.
Note
• When the HDD model type and HDD serial type specified to CF card are different from ones of
installed HDD, the HDD resetting does not function to prevent the fraud use of HDD. HDD resetting
works only when the HDD model type and the HDD serial number are not specified to CF card.
299
10. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
Note
• When the CF card is replaced for any reason, the stored data is not guaranteed. Therefore when
executing this function, be sure to use the CF card which has been formatted normally.
• As the flash memory lock password is canceled after executing this procedure, be sure to tell
users to reconfigure the Flash memory lock password.
1. Turn OFF the power switch (SW2) and the main power switch (SW1).
2. Remove the four screws [1] to remove the cover [2], then replace the CF card inserted to CF card
slot [3] with another CF card which has been formatted normally.
[2]
[3]
[1]
a0r5f3c001ca
NOTE
• When inserting the CF card, be sure to fully insert with its top side to the front side of the
main body.
3. Turn ON the main power switch (SW1) and the power switch (SW2), and after startup the main
body, check that the malfunction code "C-D303" is displayed.
4. Enter the security mode.
5. "Enhanced Security screen"
Press [Initialize Flash Memory Lock PW].
6. To initialize the Flash memory lock password, press [Yes].
Press [No] when not initialize.
7. Turn OFF and ON again the power switch (SW2) and the main power switch (SW1) to start the main
body.
8. Reconfigure each user information.
300
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 10. SERVICE MODE
bizhub 501/421/361
Be sure to prepare the CF card formatted normally in advance.
Note
• When the CF card is replaced for any reason, the stored data is not guaranteed. Therefore when
executing this function, be sure to use the CF card which has been formatted normally.
• As the flash memory lock password is canceled after executing this procedure, be sure to tell
users to reconfigure the flash memory lock password.
1. Turn OFF the power switch (SW2) and the main power switch (SW1).
2. Remove the four screws [1] to remove the cover [2], then replace the CF card inserted to CF card
slot [3] with another Flash memory card which has been formatted normally.
[2]
[3]
[1]
a0r5f3c001ca
Note
• When inserting the CF card, be sure to fully insert with its top side to the front side of the
main body.
• For information about procedure for formatting CF card, contact the support section of BJ.
3. Turn ON the main power switch (SW1) and the power switch (SW2), and after startup the main
body, check that the malfunction code "C-D303" is displayed.
4. Enter the service mode.
5. "Service Mode screen"
Press [Installed] in [System2] → [Option] → HDD to reset the HDD to installed condition.
6. Turn OFF and ON the main power switch (SW1) and the power switch (SW2), and after startup the
main body, check that the malfunction code "C-D303" is displayed again.
7. Enter the security mode.
8. "Enhanced Security screen"
Press [Initialize Flash Memory Lock PW].
9. To initialize the Flash memory lock password and reset the HDD, press [Yes].
Press [No] when not initialize.
301
10. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
10. Turn OFF and ON again the power switch (SW2) and the main power switch (SW1) to restart the
bizhub 501/421/361
main body.
11. Back up the address and image information.
NOTE
• Be sure to back up the address as PSDA/PSWC.
• The image information needs be printed to back up.
12. Enter the service mode.
13. "Service Mode screen"
Press [State Confirmation] → [Memory/HDD Adjustment] → [HDD Format].
14. Press [All] → [Yes] to format the HDD and align with the status of CF card.
15. Restore the data which is backed up at step 11 to the HDD.
16. Reconfigure each user information.
302
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 10. SERVICE MODE
10.17Billing Setting
bizhub 501/421/361
10.17.1 Billing Setting function setting procedure
A. Procedure
B. Exiting
303
10. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
Functions • To set the counting method for the total counter and size counter.
• To set the size regarded as the large size (2 counts.)
Use • Use to change the counting method for the counters.
Setting/ Total Counter
Procedure • Default setting is”Mode1”.
Mode1:1 count per 1 copy cycle (Default: Others4, Japan)
Mode2: Large size is double counts (Default: US, Europe, Others1, Others2, Others3)
NOTE
• The content of this setting is reflected in the count method with the key
counter.
Size Counter
• A3/11 x 17 :When it exceeds 279 mm in the main scan
direction and 420 mm in the sub scan direc-
tion (exceeds 399 mm at fax scan), it is
regarded as the large size.
• A3/B4/11 x 17/81/2 x 14 :When it exceeds 215 mm in the main scan
direction and 355 mm in the sub scan direc-
tion (exceeds 337 mm at fax scan), it is
regarded as the large size.
• A3/11 x 17/B4/81/2 x 14/Foolscap :When it exceeds 203 mm in the main scan
direction and 330 mm in the sub scan direc-
tion (exceeds 313 mm at fax scan), it is
regarded as the large size (However the size in
the main scan direction changes according to
the foolscap size setting.)
• Not counted (Default: Others 4, Japan)
• A3 and 11 x 17 (Default: US)
• A3, B4, 11 x 17, and 81/2 x 14 (Default: Europe, Others 1, Others 2, Others 3)
• A3, B4, Foolscap, 11 x 17, 11 x 14, and 81/2 x 14
*Count-up List
304
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 10. SERVICE MODE
bizhub 501/421/361
• To set whether or not the following items are to be mounted.
Key Counter, Management Device (Data controller), Authentication Device, or Vendor
Note
• It will not be displayed when the following setting is set to "ON".
[Administrator Settings] → [Security Setting] → [Enhanced Security Mode]
• When the setting shows that [Management Device 1], [Management Device 2] or [Vendor 2] is
mounted, the following applications will be invalid. PC FAX transmission / HDD TWAIN / PS Box
Operator / PS Scan Direct / PS Job Spooler Also, the following setting will be set to "Disable".
[Administrator Settings] → [Security Setting] → [Management Function Setting] → [Network Function
Setting]
Functions
Use
• Not used
Setting /
Procedure
B. Authentication Device 1
C. Authentication Device 2
305
10. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
• When [Mode 2] is set on [Total Counter Mode] after selecting [Billing Setting] →
[Counter setting] and large size is selected on [Large Size Counter Mode]
Mode 1: 2 counts per 1 copy cycle
Mode 2: 4 counts per 1 copy cycle
Mode 3: 6 counts per 1 copy cycle
Mode 4: 8 counts per 1 copy cycle
Mode 5: 10 counts per 1 copy cycle
• When [Mode 2] is set on [Total Counter Mode] after selecting [Billing Setting] →
[Counter setting] and sizes other than large size are selected on [Large Size Counter
Mode]
Mode 1: 1 count per 1 copy cycle
Mode 2: 2 counts per 1 copy cycle
Mode 3: 3 counts per 1 copy cycle
Mode 4: 4 counts per 1 copy cycle
Mode 5: 5 counts per 1 copy cycle
Setting/ ✽ Message
Procedure Select the message type when the administrative unit is mounted.
Type 1: Message for key counter
Type 2: Message for card scanning
Type 3: Message for ID management
Type 4: Message for remote SW
✽ Confirmation copy
• Set whether to allow a confirmation copy when a key counter is installed.
• The default setting is Ban.
License “Ban”
License “Ban”
NOTE
• The setting is available only when user authentication and account track are
set “OFF” with [Administrator Settings] → [User Authentication/Account
Track] → [General Setting].
306
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 10. SERVICE MODE
E. Management Device 1
bizhub 501/421/361
Functions • To set whether or not the management device 1 is installed.
Use • Set when the management device 1 is mounted.
Setting/ NOTE
Procedure • The setting is available only when user authentication is set “OFF” and
account track is set “Off” or “Account Name + Password” with [Administra-
tor Settings] → [User Authentication/Account Track] → [General Settings].
F. Management Device 2
NOTE
• The setting is not available when either “External Server” of user authentica-
tion, “Password Only” of account track, “Do not synchronize” of user
authentication and account track or “Allow” of public user access has been
set with [Administrator Settings] → [User Authentication/Account Track] →
[General Settings].
G. Vendor 1
Functions
Use
• Not used.
Setting/
Procedure
307
10. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
bizhub 501/421/361
H. Vendor 2
NOTE
• When using the vendor along with the key counter, inserting the key counter
will set it to the “Key Counter Mode” and removing it will set it to the “Ven-
dor Mode”.
Setting/ • Select color mode and message of key counter.
Procedure (Only for key counter, the type of the color mode and message are same after
mounting.)
✽ Confirmation copy
• Set whether to allow a confirmation copy when a key counter is installed.
• The default setting is Ban.
License “Ban”
License “Ban”
✽ Message
Type 1: Message for key counter
Type 2: Message for card scanning
Type 3: Message for ID management
NOTE
• The setting is available only when user authentication and account track are
set “OFF” with [Administrator Settings] → [User Authentication/Account
Track] → [General Setting].
308
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 10. SERVICE MODE
Note
bizhub 501/421/361
• Performing the setup for each unit to be mounted will internally change the setting values below. It
needs resetting when cancelling the setting in order to set back to “not mounted” because the
setting value will remain.
Fax Active
Rx Display [Yes] ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
Screen
Scan/Fax
Settings Direct Input ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
Default Tab
Left Panel
Display [Job List] ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
Default
Each Func- Copy, PC Copy, PC Copy will be Copy, PC
tion Setting print, Send print, Send set to “ON”. print, Send
(When IC- Data, and Data, and PC print, Data, and
207 is not Print others Print others ⎯ Send Data, Print others
mounted) will be set to will be set to and Print will be set to
“ON”. “ON”. others will be “ON”.
set to “OFF”.
Each Func-
tion Setting
Administrator Settings
309
10. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
set to “OFF”.
AppleTalk
⎯ OFF ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
Setting
SMB Setting Scan Set-
ting, Print
⎯ Setting will ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
be set to
“OFF”.
E-mail TX E-mail TX
(SMTP) Setting,
Scan to E-
mail, E-mail
⎯ Notification, ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
Meter Count
Notification
will be set to
“Restrict”.
WebDAV Cli- WebDAV Cli-
ent Settings ent Settings
⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
will be set to
“OFF”.
Web Service Printer Setting and Scanner Printer Setting and Scanner
Settings setting will be set to “OFF”. setting will be set to “OFF”.
Printer set- ⎯
ting/Scanner
setting
310
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 10. SERVICE MODE
bizhub 501/421/361
Device 1 Device 1 Device 2
Administrator Settings Status Notifi- All setting
cation Set- items will be
ting ⎯ set to “OFF”. ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
Notification
Item Setting
Image Log
Transfer Set- [No] ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
tings
311
11. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
A. Procedure
1. Pull out the tray [1].
2. If there remains any paper, remove it thoroughly.
3. When the paper guide [2] is set to the small size
position, expand it.
4. Loosen the 2 screws [3].
5. Move the paper guide [2] and adjust the center
position with the marking-off [4] as a guide.
6. Tighten the 2 screws [3].
[1] 50gaf3c014na
50gaf3c015na
312
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 11. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
bizhub 501/421/361
This adjustment is made when there occurs a mis-centering that cannot be adjusted in the service mode.
A. Procedure
1. Open the bypass tray [1].
2. If paper is set, remove it.
3. When the paper guide [2] is set to the small size
position, expand it.
4. Loosen the 2 screws [3].
5. Move the paper guide [2] and adjust the center
[4] position with the marking-off [4] as a guide.
6. Tighten the 2 screws [3].
[2] [1]
[2] [3]
50gaf3c016na
50gaf3c017na
313
11. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
bizhub 501/421/361
Blank page
314
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 12. JAM CODE
TROUBLESHOOTING
bizhub 501/421/361
12. JAM CODE
12.1 Jam code list
does not turn ON within a specified sheet of paper the bypass tray and
period of time after the feed clutch being printed remove jammed paper
/BP (CL6) turns ON. when a jam if any.
Tray 1 J-1100 The registration sensor (PS1) does occurs, the main Open the vertical con-
not turn ON within a specified period body completes veyance door and ADU
of time after the feed clutch /1 (CL4) the paper exit and remove jammed
turns ON. before stopping paper if any.
Tray 2 J-1200 The vertical conveyance sensor (PS2) operations. Pull out the tray and
does not turn ON within a specified remove jammed paper
period of time after the feed clutch /2 if any.
(CL5) turns ON.
J-1201 The registration sensor (PS1) does
not turn ON within a specified period
of time after the vertical conveyance
sensor (PS2) turns ON.
PC-206 J-1300 The vertical conveyance sensor /3 Open the right door of
(PS117) does not turn ON a specified PC and the vertical
period of time after the paper feed conveyance door of the
motor /3 (M122) turns ON. main body and remove
PC-407 The vertical conveyance sensor (PS2) jammed paper if any.
does not turn ON a specified period Pull out the tray and
of time after the paper feed motor remove jammed paper
(M1) turns ON. if any.
PC-206 J-1301 The vertical conveyance sensor (PS2)
of the main body does not turn ON
within a specified period of time after
the vertical conveyance sensor /3
(PS117) of PC-206 turns ON.
PC-407 J-1302 The vertical conveyance sensor (PS2)
of the main body does not turn ON
within a specified period of time after
the vertical conveyance sensor (PS2)
of PC-407 turns ON.
J-1305 The paper feed sensor (PS1) does not
turn ON within a specified period of
time after the paper feed motor (M1)
turns ON.
315
12. JAM CODE Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
operation
PC-407 J-1306 The paper feed sensor (PS1) does not If there is a Open the right door of
During operation
turn OFF within a specified period of sheet of paper PC and the vertical
time after the PS1 turns ON. being printed conveyance door of the
J-1307 The vertical conveyance sensor (PS2) when a jam main body and remove
does not turn ON within a specified occurs, the main jammed paper if any.
period of time after the paper feed body completes Pull out the tray and
sensor (PS1) turns ON. the paper exit remove jammed paper
J-1308 The paper feed sensor (PS2) does not before stopping if any.
turn OFF within a specified period of operations.
time after the PS2 turns ON.
J-1309 When a paper feed start signal is sent
out to PC-407 from the main body, a
recieve signal from PC-407 is not sent
out within a specified period of time
after that.
J-1311 The shift position sensor (PS11) does
not turn ON within a specified period
of time after shift home sensor (PS12)
turns OFF.
PC-206 J-1400 The vertical conveyance sensor /4
(PS126) does not turn ON within a
specified period of time after the
paper feed motor /4 (M123) turns ON.
J-1401 The vertical conveyance sensor /3
(PS117) does not turn ON within a
specified period of time after the verti-
cal conveyance sensor /4 (PS126)
turns ON.
LU J-1500 The LU exit sensor (PS155) does not Open the upper door of
turn ON within a specified period of LU and the vertical
time after the feed clutch (CL151) conveyance door of the
turns ON. main body and remove
J-1501 The vertical conveyance sensor (PS2) jammed paper if any.
of the main body does not turn ON
within a specified period of time after
the LU exit sensor (PS155) turns ON.
Other J-2001 Emergency stop jam of the system The main body Remove jammed paper
J-2002 While in the print, the vertical convey- and the optional if any from optional
ance door opens. device stop device / main body.
J-2003 The ADU door is opened while in immediately.
printing.
J-2004 The ADU is opened while in printing.
PC J-2005 While in the print, the right door
opens.
316
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 12. JAM CODE
bizhub 501/421/361
operation
FS J-2006 While in the print, the front door The main body Remove jammed paper
During operation
opens. and the optional if any from optional
FS-522 J-2007 While in the print, the guide plate device stop device / main body.
switch (SW4) turns OFF. immediately.
FS-523 While in the up drive operation of the
tray, the shutter switch (SW2) turns
ON.
J-2008 While in the print, FS-523 comes off
from the main body.
RU J-2009 While in the print, the front door
opens.
FS-523 J-2010 While in the print, the upper door
opens.
MT While in the print, the right door
opens.
SD While in the print, the saddle-stitching
section opens.
Conveyance J-3000 The registration sensor (PS1) does The printer sec- Open ADU and remove
not turn OFF within a specified period tion stops jammed paper if any.
of time after the registration clutch immediately.
(CL1) turns ON.
J-3100 The fusing exit sensor (PS3) does not
turn ON within a specified period of
time after the registration clutch (CL1)
turns ON.
Fusing J-3200 The fusing exit sensor (PS3) does not
turn OFF within a specified period of
time after the PS3 turns ON.
Reversing J-3300 The reverse sensor (PS27) does not
turn ON within a specified period of
time after the fusing exit sensor (PS3)
turns ON.
J-3400 The reverse sensor (PS27) does not
turn OFF within a specified period of
time after the PS27 turns ON.
Other J-5001 A print start signal is not sent out from The main body Open the right door of
the overall control board (OACB) and the optional PC, the vertical convey-
within a specified period of time after device stop ance door of the main
the registration sensor (PS1) turns immediately. body and ADU and
ON. remove jammed paper
if any.
317
12. JAM CODE Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
operation
DF J-6001 The DF open/close switch (SW3) The DF stops Open the open/close
During operation
turns OFF while in the DF operation. immediately. If cover and remove
J-6002 The cover open/close sensor (PS7) there is paper jammed paper if any.
turns OFF while in the DF operation. being trans-
J-6101 While in the single sided mode, the ferred or having
original feed sensor (PS6) does not been trans-
turn ON within a specified period of ferred, the main
time after the original feed motor (M1) body completes
turns ON. the paper exit
before stopping
J-6102 When feeding the first original in the
operations.
mode other than the single sided
mode, the original feed sensor (PS6)
does not turn ON within a specified
period of time after the original feed
motor (M1) turns ON.
J-6103 When feeding the second original in
the mode other than the single sided
mode, the original feed sensor (PS6)
does not turn ON within a specified
period of time after the original feed
motor (M1) turns ON.
J-6104 When feeding the third original in the
mode other than the single sided
mode, the original feed sensor (PS6)
does not turn ON within a specified
period of time after the original feed
motor (M1) turns ON.
J-6105 While in the single sided mode, the
original feed sensor (PS6) does not
turn OFF within a specified period of
time after the PS6 turns ON.
J-6106 When feeding the first original in the
mode other than the single sided
mode, the original feed sensor (PS6)
does not turn OFF within a specified
period of time after the PS6 turns ON.
J-6107 When feeding the second original in
the mode other than the single sided
mode, the original feed sensor (PS6)
does not turn OFF within a specified
period of time after the PS6 turns ON.
318
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 12. JAM CODE
bizhub 501/421/361
operation
DF J-6108 When feeding the third original in the The DF stops Open the open/close
During operation
mode other than the single sided immediately. If cover and remove
mode, the original feed sensor (PS6) there is paper jammed paper if any.
does not turn OFF within a specified being trans-
period of time after the PS6 turns ON. ferred or having
been trans-
J-6201 While in the single sided mode, the
ferred, the main
original registration sensor (PS9) does
body completes
not turn ON within a specified period
the paper exit
of time after the feed motor (M1) turns
before stopping
ON.
operations.
J-6202 When feeding the first original in the
mode other than the single sided
mode, the original registration feed
sensor (PS9) does not turn ON within
a specified period of time after the
feed motor (M1) turns ON.
J-6203 When feeding the second original in
the mode other than the single sided
mode, the original registration sensor
(PS9) does not turn ON within a spec-
ified period of time after the feed
motor (M1) turns ON.
J-6204 When feeding the third original in the
mode other than the single sided
mode, the original registration sensor
(PS9) does not turn ON within a spec-
ified period of time after the feed
motor (M1) turns ON.
J-6205 While in the single sided mode, the
original registration sensor (PS9) does
not turn OFF within a specified period
of time after the PS9 turns ON.
J-6206 When feeding the first original in the
mode other than the single sided
mode, the original registration sensor
(PS9) does not turn OFF within a
specified period of time after the PS9
turns ON.
J-6207 When feeding the second original in
the mode other than the single sided
mode, the original registration sensor
(PS9) does not turn OFF within a
specified period of time after the PS9
turns ON.
319
12. JAM CODE Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
operation
DF J-6208 When feeding the third original in the The DF stops Open the open/close
During operation
mode other than the single sided immediately. If cover and remove
mode, the original registration sensor there is paper jammed paper if any.
(PS9) does not turn OFF within a being trans-
specified period of time after the PS9 ferred or having
turns ON. been trans-
J-6301 While in the single sided mode, the ferred, the main
original detection sensor (PS8) does body completes
not turn ON within a specified period the paper exit
of time after the original coveyance before stopping
motor (M2) turns ON. operations.
J-6302 When feeding the first original in the
mode other than the single sided
mode, the original detection sensor
(PS8) does not turn ON within a spec-
ified period of time after the original
coveyance motor (M2) turns ON.
J-6303 When feeding the second original in
the mode other than the single sided
mode, the original detection sensor
(PS8) does not turn ON within a spec-
ified period of time after the original
coveyance motor (M2) turns ON.
J-6304 When feeding the third original in the
mode other than the single sided
mode, the original detection sensor
(PS8) does not turn ON within a spec-
ified period of time after the original
coveyance motor (M2) turns ON.
J-6305 While in the single sided mode, the
original detection sensor (PS8) does
not turn OFF within a specified period
of time after the PS8 turns ON.
J-6306 When feeding the first original in the
mode other than the single sided
mode, the original detection sensor
(PS8) does not turn OFF within a
specified period of time after the PS8
turns ON.
J-6307 When feeding the second original in
the mode other than the single sided
mode, the original detection sensor
(PS8) does not turn OFF within a
specified period of time after the PS8
turns ON.
320
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 12. JAM CODE
bizhub 501/421/361
operation
DF J-6308 When feeding the third original in the The DF stops Open the open/close
During operation
mode other than the single sided immediately. If cover and remove
mode, the original detection sensor there is paper jammed paper if any.
(PS8) does not turn OFF within a being trans-
specified period of time after the PS8 ferred or having
turns ON. been trans-
J-6501 While in the idle, the original feed sen- ferred, the main
When idling
sor (PS6) is ON. body completes
J-6502 While in the idle, the original registra- the paper exit
tion sensor (PS9) is ON. before stopping
operations.
J-6503 While in the idle, the original feed sen-
sor (PS6) or the original registration
sensor (PS9) is ON.
J-6504 While in the idle, the original exit sen-
sor (PS10) is ON.
J-6505 While in the idle, the original registra-
tion sensor (PS6) or the original exit
sensor (PS10) is ON.
J-6506 While in the idle, the original registra-
tion sensor (PS9) or the original exit
sensor (PS10) is ON.
J-6507 While in the idle, any of the original
feed sensor (PS6), the original regis-
tration sensor (PS9) or the original exit
sensor (PS10) is ON.
J-6508 While in the idle, the original detection
sensor (PS8) is ON.
J-6509 While in the idle, the original registra-
tion sensor (PS6) or the original
detection sensor (PS8) is ON.
J-6510 While in the idle, the original registra-
tion sensor (PS9) or the original
detection sensor (PS8) is ON.
J-6511 While in the idle, any of the original
feed sensor (PS6), the original regis-
tration sensor (PS9) or the original
detection sensor (PS8) is ON.
J-6512 While in the idle, the original detection
sensor (PS8) or the original exit sen-
sor (PS10) is ON.
J-6513 While in the idle, any of the original
feed sensor (PS6), the original detec-
tion sensor (PS8) or the original exit
sensor (PS10) is ON.
321
12. JAM CODE Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
operation
DF J-6514 While in the idle, any of the original The DF stops Open the open/close
When idling
registration sensor (PS9), the original immediately. If cover and remove
detection sensor (PS8) or the original there is paper jammed paper if any.
exit sensor (PS10) is ON. being trans-
J-6515 While in the idle, any of the original ferred or having
feed sensor (PS6), the original regis- been trans-
tration sensor (PS9), the original ferred, the main
detection sensor (PS8) or the original body completes
exit sensor (PS10) is ON. the paper exit
J-6601 While in the single sided mode, the before stopping
During operation
322
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 12. JAM CODE
bizhub 501/421/361
operation
DF J-6607 When feeding the second original in The DF stops Open the open/close
During operation
the mode other than the single sided immediately. If cover and remove
mode, the original exit sensor (PS10) there is paper jammed paper if any.
does not turn OFF within a specified being trans-
period of time after the PS10 turns ferred or having
ON. been trans-
J-6608 When feeding the third original in the ferred, the main
mode other than the single sided body completes
mode, the original exit sensor (PS10) the paper exit
does not turn OFF within a specified before stopping
period of time after the PS10 turns operations.
ON.
FS-522 J-7201 While in the idle, the entrance sensor FS, RU, MT, SD, Remove jammed paper
When idling
323
12. JAM CODE Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
operation
FS-522 J-7217 The entrance sensor (PS4) does not FS, RU, MT, SD, Remove jammed paper
During operation
turn OFF within a specified period of main body stop if any from the FS/main
time after the PS4 turns ON. immediately. body.
The conveyance sensor (PS5) does
not turn ON within a specified period
of time after the entrance sensor
(PS4) turns ON.
FS-523 The path sensor (PS2) of RU does not
turn OFF within a specified period of
time after the PS2 turns ON.
The sub tray paper exit sensor (PS1)
of FS does not turn ON within a spec-
ified period of time after the path sen-
sor (PS2) of RU turns ON.
The main route conveyance sensor
(PS4) of FS does not turn ON within a
specified period of time after the path
sensor (PS2) of RU turns ON.
The bypass route conveyance sensor
(PS2) of FS does not turn ON within a
specified period of time after the path
sensor (PS2) of RU turns ON.
The main route conveyance sensor
(PS4) does not turn OFF within a
specified period of time after the PS4
turns ON.
The bypass route conveyance sensor
(PS2) does not turn OFF within a
specified period of time after the PS2
turns ON.
The intermediate conveyance sensor
(PS3) does not turn ON within a spec-
ified period of time after the main
route conveyance sensor (PS4) turns
ON.
The intermediate conveyance sensor
(PS3) does not turn OFF within a
specified period of time after the
bypass route conveyance sensor
(PS2) turns ON.
FS-522 J-7218 The conveyance sensor (PS5) does
not turn OFF within a specified period
of time after the PS5 turns ON.
FS-523 The sub tray exit sensor (PS1) does
not turn OFF within a specified period
of time after the PS1 turns ON.
324
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 12. JAM CODE
bizhub 501/421/361
operation
FS-523 J-7218 The intermediate conveyance sensor FS, RU, MT, SD, Remove jammed paper
During operation
(PS3) does not turn OFF within a main body stop if any from the FS/main
specified period of time after the PS3 immediately. body.
turns ON.
FS-522 J-7221 After completion of stapling, the
stacker sensor (PS8) does not turn
OFF within a specified period of time
after the paper exit motor (M1) turns
ON.
FS-523 After completion of stapling, the align-
ment tray sensor (PS5) does not turn
OFF within a specified period of time
after the paper exit motor (M3) turns
ON.
SD J-7225 Folding jam
PU J-7243 Punch jam
FS-522 J-7281 The stapler motor does not return to
the home position within a specified
period of time after the stapler motor
turns ON.
FS-523 The stapler home sensor /Fr (PS22)
does not turn ON within a specified
period of time after the stapler motor
/Fr (M16) turns ON.
J-7282 The stapler home sensor /Rr (PS25)
does not turn ON within a specified
period of time after the stapler motor
/Rr (M17) turns ON.
SD J-7284 The clincher motor /Fr does not return
to the home position within a speci-
fied period of time after the clincher
motor /Fr turns ON.
J-7285 The clincher motor /Rr does not
return to the home position within a
specified period of time after the
clincher motor /Rr turns ON.
MT J-7290 The conveyance sensor /Up (PS9) or
/Lw (PS10) of MT does not turn ON
within a specified period of time after
the conveyance sensor (PS5) of FS
turns ON.
The conveyance sensor /Up (PS9) or
/Lw (PS10) do not turn OFF within a
specified period of time after PS9 or
PS10 turn ON.
325
12. JAM CODE Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
operation
Paper J-8100 The registration sensor (PS1) turns The printer sec- Open the vertical con-
When idling
feed ON while in idling. tion stops veyance door and ADU
J-8200 The vertical conveyance sensor (PS2) immediately. and remove jammed
turns ON while in idling. paper if any.
PC-206 J-8300 The vertical conveyance sensor /3 Open the right door
(PS116) turns ON while in idling. and remove jammed
PC-407 The vertical conveyance sensor (PS2) paper if any.
turns ON while in idling.
PC-206 J-8400 The vertical conveyance sensor /4
(PS126) turns ON while in idling.
LU J-8500 The LU exit sensor (PS155) turns ON Open the upper door
while in idling. and remove jammed
paper if any.
Fusing J-9000 The fusing exit sensor (PS3) turns ON Open ADU and remove
while in idling. jammed paper if any.
Reverse J-9100 The reverse sensor (PS27) turns ON
while in idling.
ADU J-9200 The ADU conveyance sensor /1
(PS24) turns ON while in idling.
J-9300 The ADU conveyance sensor /2
(PS25) turns ON while in idling.
J-9701 The ADU conveyance sensor /1
During operation
326
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 13. MALFUNCTION CODE
bizhub 501/421/361
13.1 Malfunction code list
A. Note for use
Turn OFF/ON the power switch (SW2) of the main body when releasing an abnormal condition.
B. Code list
NOTE
• For codes with "*" given in the error code column, a message "Turn off the power and turn it on
again" is displayed on the operation panel.
• For codes with no "*" given in the error code column, a message "Contact the service" is dis-
played.
does not turn ON within a speci- stops immedi- Upper limit sensor /1 (PS6)
fied period of time after the paper ately to turn OFF Printer control board (PRCB)
lift motor /1 (M7) turns ON. the main relay
C-0202 The upper limit sensor /2 (PS13) (RL1). Paper lift motor /2 (M8)
does not turn ON within a speci- Upper limit sensor /2 (PS13)
fied period of time after the paper Printer control board (PRCB)
lift motor /2 (M8) turns ON.
C-0203 The upper limit sensor /3 (PS114) Paper lift motor /3 (M124)
PC-206
327
13. MALFUNCTION CODE Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
operation
Drive C-0207 While in the paper feed, there The main body Pick-up solenoid /BP (SD1)
Bypass
328
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 13. MALFUNCTION CODE
bizhub 501/421/361
operation
FS FS-523 C-1102 Tray lift motor (M7) drive abnor- The main body Tray lift motor (M7)
mality. stops immedi- Main tray upper limit sensor
• While in the main tray up ately to turn OFF (PS19)
drive, the main tray upper limit the main relay FS control board (FSCB)
sensor (PS19) does not turn (RL1).
ON within a specified period
of time after M7 turns ON.
• While in the main tray down
drive, the lock signal of M7 is
detected.
• While in the M7 ON, the main
tray upper limit switch (SW2)
or the main tray lower limit
switch (SW3) turns ON.
C-1103 Alignment motor (M5) drive Alignment motor (M5)
abnormality. Alignment home sensor
• While in the alignment home (PS9)
position search, the alignment FS control board (FSCB)
home sensor (PS9) does not
turn ON within a specified
period of time after M5 turns
ON.
• While in the alignment opera-
tion, PS9 does not turn OFF
within a specified period of
time after M5 turns ON.
C-1104 Paper exit roller release motor Paper exit roller release
(M13) drive abnormality. motor (M13)
• When starting the pressure Exit roller home sensor
position drive, the exit roller (PS13)
home sensor (PS13) does not FS control board (FSCB)
turn ON within a specified
period of time after M13 turns
ON.
• When starting the separation
position drive, PS13 does not
turn OFF within a specified
period of time after M13 turns
ON.
329
13. MALFUNCTION CODE Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
operation
FS-523 C-1105 Intermediate conveyance roller The main body Intermediate conveyance
FS
release motor (M12) drive abnor- stops immedi- roller release motor (M12)
mality. ately to turn OFF Roller release home sensor
• When starting the pressure the main relay (PS12)
position drive, the roller (RL1). FS control board (FSCB)
release home sensor (PS12)
does not turn ON within a
specified period of time after
M12 turns ON.
• When starting the separation
position drive, PS12 does not
turn OFF within a specified
period of time after M12 turns
ON.
C-1106 Stapler movement motor (M6) Stapler movement motor
drive abnormality. (M6)
• While in the home position Stapler home sensor (PS14)
search, the stapler home sen- FS control board (FSCB)
sor (PS14) does not turn ON
within a specified period of
time after M6 turns ON.
• While in the 1-staple position
movement, PS14 does not
turn OFF within a specified
period of time after M6 turns
ON.
C-1107 Stapler motor /Rr (M16) drive Stapler motor /Rr (M16)
abnormality. Stapler home sensor /Rr
• The stapler home sensor /Rr (PS22)
(PS22) does not turn OFF FS control board (FSCB)
within a specified period of
time after M16 turns ON.
• PS22 does not turn ON within
a specified period of time
after the OFF of PS22 is
detected.
• PS22 does not turn ON within
a specified period of time
after M16 turns ON for
reverse rotation.
330
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 13. MALFUNCTION CODE
bizhub 501/421/361
operation
FS FS-523 C-1108 Stapler motor /Fr (M17) drive The main body Stapler motor /Fr (M17)
abnormality. stops immedi- Stapler home sensor /Fr
• The stapler home sensor /Fr ately to turn OFF (PS25)
(PS25) does not turn OFF the main relay FS control board (FSCB)
within a specified period of (RL1).
time after M17 turns ON.
• PS25 does not turn ON within
a specified period of time
after the OFF of PS25 is
detected.
• PS25 does not turn ON within
a specified period of time
after M17 turns ON for
reverse rotation.
SD C-1109 Saddle stapler motor /Fr drive Saddle stapler motor /Fr
abnormality. SD control board (SDCB)
• When the saddle stapler
motor /Fr is ON, it does not
get off from the home position
within a specified period of
time.
• After its getting off from the
home position is detected, it
does not get to the home
position within a specified
period of time.
• After the saddle stapler motor
/Fr turns ON for reverse rota-
tion, it does not get to the
home position within a speci-
fied period of time.
331
13. MALFUNCTION CODE Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
operation
SD C-1110 Saddle stapler motor /Rr drive The main body Saddle stapler motor /Rr
FS
332
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 13. MALFUNCTION CODE
bizhub 501/421/361
operation
FS SD C-1113 Exit open/close motor (M9) drive The main body Exit open/close motor (M9)
abnormality. stops immedi- Saddle exit home sensor
• When starting a pressure ately to turn OFF (PS18)
contact operation, the saddle the main relay SD control board (SDCB)
exit home sensor (PS18) does (RL1).
not turn ON within a specified
period of time after M9 turns
ON.
• When starting a separation
operation, PS18 does not
turn OFF within a specified
period of time after M9 turns
ON.
C-1114 Folding motor (M10) drive abnor- Folding motor (M10)
mality. Folding roller home sensor
The folding roller home sensor (PS22)
(PS22) does not turn ON within a SD control board (SDCB)
specified period of time after M10
turns ON.
C-1115 Conveyance motor (M8) drive Conveyance motor (M8)
abnormality. SD control board (SDCB)
• Within a specified period of
time after M8 turns ON, the
ON of a motor lock signal is
detected for a prescribed
period of time in succession.
• A specified period of time
after M8 turns OFF, the OFF
of a motor lock signal is
detected for a prescribed
period of time in succession.
FS-522 C-1116 Exit roller release motor (M6) drive Exit roller release motor (M6)
abnormality. Shutter home sensor (PS16)
• When the shutter is closed, FS control board (FSCB)
the shutter home sensor
(PS16) does not turn ON
within a specified period of
time after M6 turns ON.
• When the shutter is open,
PS16 does not turn OFF
within a specified period of
time after M6 turns ON.
333
13. MALFUNCTION CODE Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
operation
FS-522 C-1117 Alignment motor /Fr (M5) drive The main body Alignment motor /Fr (M5)
FS
334
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 13. MALFUNCTION CODE
bizhub 501/421/361
operation
FS PU C-1121 Punch motor (M1) drive abnor- The main body Punch motor (M1)
mality. stops immedi- Punch position sensor /1
The punch position sensors /1 ately to turn OFF (PS2)
(PS2) and /2 (PS3) do not turn the main relay Punch position sensor /2
OFF within a specified period of (RL1). (PS3)
time after M1 turns ON. FS control board (FSCB)
Image C-2001 Communication abnormality Overall control board (OACB)
Main body
process between the engine control of the Printer control board (PRCB)
commu- overall control board (OACB) and
nication that of the printer control board
abnor- (PRCB)
mality While in the stand-by, a process
Ready signal cannot be detected
for a specified period of time.
Motor C-2201 Developing motor (M3) speed Developing motor (M3)
speed abnormality. Printer control board (PRCB)
abnor- While M3 is ON, an EM error sig-
mality nal has been detected 5 times in
succession within a specified
period of time.
C-2202 Drum motor (M1) speed abnor- Drum motor (M1)
mality. Printer control board (PRCB)
While M1 is ON, an EM error sig-
nal has been detected 5 times in
succession within a specified
period of time.
Fan C-2301 Drum cooling fan (FM4) abnor- Drum cooling fan (FM4)
lock mality. Printer control board (PRCB)
abnor- While FM4 is ON, an EM error
mality signal has been detected 5 times
in succession within a specified
period of time.
C-2302 Developing suction fan motor Developing suction fan
(FM6) abnormality. motor (FM6)
While FM6 is ON, an EM error Printer control board (PRCB)
signal has been detected 5 times
in succession within a specified
period of time.
C-2303 Developing cooling fan (FM7) Developing cooling fan (FM7)
abnormality. Printer control board (PRCB)
While FM7 is ON, an EM error
signal has been detected 5 times
in succession within a specified
period of time.
335
13. MALFUNCTION CODE Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
operation
Abnor- C-2401 High machine inside temperature The main body TCR sensor (TCRS)
Main body
336
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 13. MALFUNCTION CODE
bizhub 501/421/361
operation
Main body High C-2803 TCR output abnormality. The main body TCR sensor (TCRS)
voltage Error When the output ripple voltage of stops immedi- Printer control board (PRCB)
the TCR sensor (TCRS) is 0.5 V ately to turn OFF
power code 3 or less. the main relay
source (RL1).
C-2803 TCR output abnormality.
abnor- When the output ripple voltage of
Error
mality TCR sensor (TCRS) is 0.02 V or
code 4 less.
C-2803 TCR output abnormality.
Error When the TCR sensor (TCRS)
control voltage cannot be
code 5 adjusted within 7.6V to 6.2V.
C-2803 When the detection of the toner IDC sensor (IDCS)
Error control patch is abnormal for the Printer control board (PRCB)
D/A check.
code 6
C-2804 Toner density abnormality. Toner remaining sensor
When the L detection output is in (PZS)
excess of 2.6 V before the toner TCR sensor (TCRS)
remaining sensor (PZS) detects a Printer control board (PRCB)
no toner condition, toner density
does not recover even when
toner is automatically supplied.
Motor C-3201 Fusing motor (M11) speed abnor- Fusing motor (M11)
speed mality. Printer control board (PRCB)
When M11 is ON, an EM error
abnor- signal is detected 30 times in
mality succession within a specified
period of time.
Fan C-3301 Fusing cooling fan /Fr (FM2) Fusing cooling fan /Fr (FM2)
lock abnormality. Printer control board (PRCB)
When FM2 is ON, an EM error
abnor- signal is detected 3 times in suc-
mality cession within a specified period
of time.
C-3302 Fusing cooling fan /Rr (FM8) Fusing cooling fan /Rr (FM8)
abnormality. Printer control board (PRCB)
When FM8 is ON, an EM error
signal is detected 3 times in suc-
cession within a specified period
of time.
Fusing C-3501 Fusing main sensor high temper- The main body Thermistor /1 (TH1)
high ature abnormality. stops immedi- Printer control board (PRCB)
temper- The thermistor /1 (TH1) detects a ately to turn OFF DC power supply (DCPS)
ature temperature higher than 236 °C the main relay
abnor- for more than a specified period (RL1). All the
mality of time. keys are not
C-3502 Fusing sub sensor high tempera- taken in. Thermistor /2 (TH2)
ture abnormality. Printer control board (PRCB)
The thermistor /2 (TH2) detects a DC power supply (DCPS)
temperature higher than 236 °C
for more than a specified period
of time.
337
13. MALFUNCTION CODE Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
operation
Fusing C-3801 Fusing main sensor low tempera- The main body Thermistor /1 (TH1)
Main body
338
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 13. MALFUNCTION CODE
bizhub 501/421/361
operation
Main body Fusing C-3808 Fusing sub sensor high tempera- The main body Thermistor /2 (TH2)
low ture abnormality (sub CPU detec- stops immedi- Printer control board (PRCB)
temper- tion) ately to turn OFF DC power supply (DCPS)
ature In the sub CPU, the thermistor /2 the main relay
abnor- (TH2) detects a temperature (RL1). All the
mality higher than 236 °C for more than keys are not
a specified period of time. taken in.
Fusing C-3901 Inferior contact of the thermistor Thermistor /1 (TH1)
sensor /1 (TH1) Printer control board (PRCB)
abnor- While in the warm-up condition,
mality when the thermistor /2 (TH2)
detection temperature gets to the
Ready temperature before the
TH1 detection temperature, the
TH1 detection temperature does
not get to the Ready temperature
a specified period of time after
the TH2 detection temperature
got to the Ready temperature.
C-3902 Inferior contact of the thermistor Thermistor /2 (TH2)
/2 (TH2) Printer control board (PRCB)
While in the warm-up condition,
when the thermistor /1 (TH1)
detection temperature gets to the
Ready temperature before the
TH2 detection temperature, the
TH2 detection temperature does
not get to the Ready temperature
a specified period of time after
the TH1 detection temperature
got to the Ready temperature.
C-3903 Thermistor /1 (TH1) open abnor- Thermistor /1 (TH1)
mality (sub CPU detection) Printer control board (PRCB)
In the sub CPU, the TH1 detec-
tion temperature detects a tem-
perature between -8 and 20 °C
for more than a specified period
of time.
C-3904 Thermistor /2 (TH2) open abnor- Thermistor /2 (TH2)
mality (sub CPU detection) Printer control board (PRCB)
In the sub CPU, the TH2 detec-
tion temperature detects a tem-
perature between -8 and 20 °C
for more than a specified period
of time.
339
13. MALFUNCTION CODE Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
operation
Image C-4001 Index board (INDEXB) contact The main body Index board (INDEXB)
Main body
340
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 13. MALFUNCTION CODE
bizhub 501/421/361
operation
Main body Fan C-5301 Exhaust fan /Fr (FM3) conversion The main body Exhaust fan /Fr (FM3)
lock abnormality. stops immedi- Printer control board (PRCB)
abnor- When FM3 is ON, an error signal ately to turn OFF
mality is detected 5 times in succession the main relay
within a specified period of time. (RL1).
C-5302 Exhaust fan /Rr (FM9) conversion Exhaust fan /Rr (FM9)
abnormality. Printer control board (PRCB)
When FM9 is ON, an error signal
is detected 5 times in succession
within a specified period of time.
C-5303 Power supply cooling fan (FM1) Power supply cooling fan
conversion abnormality. (FM1)
When FM1 is ON, an error signal Printer control board (PRCB)
is detected 5 times in succession
within a specified period of time.
OS C-5401* There occurs an OS error with the Engine section Printer control board (PRCB)
error engine control section in the power OFF.
printer control board (PRCB).
System C-5402* Time out for tuning off the power Engine section Overall control board (OACB)
control switch (SW2) power OFF. Printer control board (PRCB)
commu- Operation panel
nication display all ON.
abnor-
mality
Image C-6001 CCD board (CCDB) connection Scanner sec- CCD board (CCDB)
process abnormality. tion stops Overall control board (OACB)
commu- immediately.
nication C-6002* Communication abnormality Engine section Overall control board (OACB)
abnor- between the engine control of the power OFF. Printer control board (PRCB)
mality overall control board (OACB) and
that of the printer control board
(PRCB).
While in the stand-by, a scanner
Ready signal cannot be detected
for a specified period of time.
C-6003* Communication abnormality Overall control board (OACB)
between the engine control of the Printer control board (PRCB)
overall control board (OACB) and
that of the printer control board
(PRCB).
Time out for the notice time of the
platen original size.
341
13. MALFUNCTION CODE Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
operation
Scanner C-6101 While in the exposure unit initial Scanner sec- Scanner motor (M2)
Main body
abnor- search, the scanner home sensor tion stops Scanner home sensor
mality (PS30) does not turn on within a immediately. (PS30)
specified period of time. And Printer control board (PRCB)
also, while in the return scan,
PS30 does not turn on within a
specified period of time.
C-6201 Exposure lamp (L1) abnormality. Exposure lamp (L1)
A specified period of time after L1 L1 inverter (L1 INVVB)
turns on, an L1 abnormality signal Printer control board (PRCB)
is detected in succession for a
specified period of time.
Image C-6701 AOC abnormality. CCD board (CCDB)
proces- AOC counter overflow Exposure lamp (L1)
sing C-6702 AGC abnormality. L1 inverter (L1 INVVB)
abnor- AGC counter overflow Scanner motor (M2)
mality Overall control board (OACB)
Commu- C-8001 DF control board (DFCB) commu- The main body DF control board (DFCB)
DF
342
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 13. MALFUNCTION CODE
bizhub 501/421/361
operation
FAX FAX C-B117 Time out error for ACK standby FAX breakdown FK-502
driver C-B118 Undefined frame reception
error C-B119 DMA transfer error
JC C-B120 JC software error
C-B122 Device error (GA LOCAL SRAM)
C-B123 Device error (DRAM)
C-B125 Device error (GA)
C-B126 While in the interruption process-
ing, there occurs a time out error
due to no response from DC.
C-B127 While in the interruption process-
ing, there occurs a time out error
due to no response from CC.
C-B128 While in the interruption process-
ing, there occurs a time out error
due to no response from Line.
C-B129 While in the interruption process-
ing, there occurs a time out error
due to no response from the File
system/File Driver.
MIF C-B130 Driver software error
software C-B131 Length error of the frame received
error from the main side.
C-B132 Header error of the frame receive
from the main side.
C-B133 232C I/F sequence error
C-B134 DPRAM I/F sequence error
C-B135 DPRAM CTL/STS register abnor-
mality.
C-B136 Time out for ACK standby
C-B137 DPRAM RESET received
C-B140 MSG I/F error with JC
C-B141 I/F error with driver
I/F C-B142 Undefined command received
error C-B143 Command frame length error
C-B144 Command parameter length error
C-B145 Undefined parameter
C-B146 Command/response sequence
error
343
13. MALFUNCTION CODE Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
operation
Line C-B150 External class instance acquisi- FAX breakdown FK-502
FAX
344
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 13. MALFUNCTION CODE
bizhub 501/421/361
operation
FAX Page C-B185 Incoming data size logic error FAX breakdown FK-502
control (The incoming data is not a multi-
ple number of DotLine.
C-B186 Image Buff acquisition (alloc) error
C-B187 Error return from Compressor
C-B188 Band Buff control error (new
Instance/get/free)
Operation C-C103 While in the completion of the Engine section Overall control board (OACB)
ISW
345
13. MALFUNCTION CODE Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
operation
HDD C-D001 HDD initialization abnormality. Engine section HD-509
Main body
346
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 13. MALFUNCTION CODE
bizhub 501/421/361
operation
Main body System C-E082* Image abnormality. If there is a Overall control board (OACB)
control Image processing abnormality on sheet of paper
commu- the overall control side being printed,
nication the main body
abnor- completes the
mality paper exit to
stop opera-
tions. The main
relay (RL1) turns
OFF.
C-E083* Copy sequence abnormality. Engine section
Job object pointer abnormality power OFF.
(For some reason, the acquisition
of the page management object
is unavailable.)
C-E084* Copy sequence abnormality.
Memory copy sequence abnor-
mality (the one the cause of which
cannot be identified.)
C-E085* Copy sequence abnormality.
Through copy sequence (FCOT)
abnormality (the one that the
cause of which cannot be identi-
fied.)
C-E086* Copy sequence abnormality.
The memory scanner stop is not
completed. (A stop completion
notice is not sent from the engine
side.)
C-E087* Copy sequence abnormality.
The memory printer stop is not
completed. (A stop completion
notice is not sent from the engine
side.)
C-E088* Unrecoverable error (The count is
made by C-5402.)
An error occurs when the timer is
set.
C-E089* Unrecoverable error (The count is
made by C-5402.)
An error occurs when the timer is
cancelled.
347
13. MALFUNCTION CODE Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
operation
System C-E08A* Unrecoverable error (The count is Engine section Overall control board (OACB)
Main body
348
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 13. MALFUNCTION CODE
bizhub 501/421/361
operation
Main body System C-E093* Unrecoverable error (The count is Engine section Overall control board (OACB)
control made by C-5402.) power OFF.
commu- An error occurs when the queue
nication 0 is deleted with the queue 1
abnor- generation not allowed.
mality C-E094* Unrecoverable error (The count is
made by C-5402.)
An error occurs when the queue
n is deleted with the task n gener-
ation not allowed.
C-E095* Unrecoverable error (The count is
made by C-5402.)
An error occurs when the task 0
is deleted with the task 1 genera-
tion not allowed.
C-E096* Unrecoverable error (The count is
made by C-5402.)
An error occurs when the queue
0 is deleted with the task 1 gener-
ation not allowed.
C-E097* Unrecoverable error (The count is
made by C-5402.)
An error occurs when the task n
is started.
C-E098* Unrecoverable error (The count is
made by C-5402.)
An error occurs when the task n
is deleted.
C-E099* Unrecoverable error (The count is
made by C-5402.)
An error occurs when the queue
n is deleted.
C-E09A* Unrecoverable error (The count is
made by C-5402.)
A scheduling abnormality occurs
when the FAX print cannot be
started due to a memory short-
age (queue operation abnormal-
ity).
C-E09B* Unrecoverable error (The count is
made by C-5402.)
A scheduling abnormality occurs
when the FAX print cannot be
started due to a memory short-
age (message transmission error).
349
13. MALFUNCTION CODE Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
operation
System C-E09C* Unrecoverable error (The count is Engine section Overall control board (OACB)
Main body
350
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 13. MALFUNCTION CODE
bizhub 501/421/361
operation
Main body System C-E0A6* Unrecoverable error (The count is Engine section Overall control board (OACB)
control made by C-5402.) power OFF.
commu- An abnormal operation occurs
nication when an interrupt copy is made
abnor- (FAX normal scan job 0).
mality C-E0A7* Unrecoverable error (The count is
made by C-5402.)
An abnormal operation occurs
when an interrupt copy is made
(FAX scan job 1).
C-E0A8* Unrecoverable error (The count is
made by C-5402.)
An abnormal operation occurs
when an interrupt copy is made
(FCOT scan user job).
C-E0A9* Unrecoverable error (The count is
made by C-5402.)
An abnormal operation occurs
when an interrupt copy is made
(FCOT scan job).
C-E0AA* Unrecoverable error (The count is
made by C-5402.)
An abnormal operation occurs
when an interrupt copy is made
(copy scan user job).
C-E0AB* Unrecoverable error (The count is
made by C-5402.)
An abnormal operation occurs
when an interrupt copy is made
(copy mixed original scan job 0).
C-E0AC* Unrecoverable error (The count is
made by C-5402.)
An abnormal operation occurs
when an interrupt copy is made
(copy z-folding scan job 0).
C-E0AD* Unrecoverable error (The count is
made by C-5402.)
An abnormal operation occurs
when an interrupt copy is made
(copy normal scan job 0).
C-E0AE* Unrecoverable error (The count is
made by C-5402.)
An abnormal operation occurs
when an interrupt copy is made
(copy scan job 1).
351
13. MALFUNCTION CODE Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
operation
System C-E0AF* Unrecoverable error (The count is Engine section Overall control board (OACB)
Main body
352
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 13. MALFUNCTION CODE
bizhub 501/421/361
For setting of DipSW that is specified for the following items, it is possible to use them with a failed section sep-
arated. After setting DipSW, however, no abnormality detection is made on the separated section.
NOTE
• This function is employed to make temporary use of sections that are not affected. So, be sure
that this is limited only to a provisional use until a defective section is repaired.
353
13. MALFUNCTION CODE Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
bizhub 501/421/361
Blank page
354
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 14. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
APPENDIX
bizhub 501/421/361
14. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
14.1 Main body
14.1.1 Switch/sensor
A. Main body rear side
[4]
50gaf5c017na
355
14. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
[1]
[3]
[2]
a0r5f5c001ca
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
a0r5f5c002ca
356
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 14. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
D. Developing section
bizhub 501/421/361
[1]
50gaf5c020na
[2]
[4]
[3] 50gaf5c034na
[1] Upper limit sensor /1 (PS6) [4] Paper size sensor /Rr1 (PS10)
[2] Paper empty sensor /1 (PS5) [5] Tray set sensor /1 (PS8)
[3] Paper size sensor /Fr1 (PS11) [6] Near-empty sensor /1 (PS9)
357
14. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
(2) Tray 2
bizhub 501/421/361
[2]
[3]
[6] [4]
[5] 50gaf5c035na
[1] Vertical conveyance sensor (PS2) [5] Paper size sensor /Fr2 (PS17)
[2] Feed door open/close sensor (PS7) [6] Paper size sensor /Rr2 (PS16)
[3] Paper empty sensor /2 (PS12) [7] Tray set sensor /2 (PS14)
[4] Upper limit sensor /2 (PS13) [8] Near-empty sensor /2 (PS15)
(3) Registration
[1] 50gaf5c036na
358
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 14. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
bizhub 501/421/361
[6] [7] [1] [2]
[1] Paper size VR/BP (VR1) [5] Paper size sensor /BP4 (PS22)
[2] Paper empty sensor /BP (PS18) [6] Paper size sensor /BP2 (PS20)
[3] Lift sensor (PS23) [7] Paper size sensor /BP1 (PS19)
[4] Paper size sensor /BP3 (PS21)
G. ADU section
[1]
[2]
[3]
50gaf5c038na
[1] ADU open/close sensor (PS26) [3] ADU conveyance sensor /2 (PS25)
[2] ADU conveyance sensor /1 (PS24)
359
14. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
H. Fusing section
bizhub 501/421/361
[1] [4]
[3] [2]
50gaf5c021na
[1]
50gaf5c039na
360
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 14. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
14.1.2 Load
bizhub 501/421/361
A. Main body rear side
(1) Lower aria
[11]
[4]
[1] Power supply cooling fan (FM1) [3] Developing cooling fan (FM7)
[2] Overall control board cooling fan (FM10) [4] CPU cooling fan (FM11)
[8]
[7]
[6] [1]
[2]
[5]
[3]
[4]
50gaf5c022nb
361
14. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
50gaf5c023na
[1] Fusing cooling fan /Rr (FM8) [3] Drum cooling fan (FM4)
[2] Fusing cooling fan /Fr (FM2) [4] Developing suction fan (FM6)
[1]
[2]
50gaf5c024na
362
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 14. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
D. Write section
bizhub 501/421/361
[1]
50gaf5c025na
[1]
a0r5f5c004ca
363
14. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
(1) Tray 1
[2] [1]
50gaf5c040na
(2) Tray 2
[3] [1]
[2] 50gaf5c041na
[1] Vertical conveyance clutch (CL3) [3] Paper lift motor /2 (M8)
[2] Feed clutch /2 (CL5)
364
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 14. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
(3) Registration
bizhub 501/421/361
[1]
[2]
a0r5f5c005ca
[1]
[2] 50gaf5c043na
[1] Feed clutch /BP (CL6) [2] Pick-up solenoid /BP (SD1)
365
14. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
H. ADU section
bizhub 501/421/361
[1]
[2]
50gaf5c044nb
[1] ADU conveyance clutch /Up (CL7) [2] ADU conveyance clutch /Lw (CL8)
[1]
[4] [3] [2] 50gaf5c045na
366
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 14. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
bizhub 501/421/361
A. Main body rear side
[1]
[2]
[10]
[3]
[9]
[8]
[7]
[4]
[6]
[5]
a0r5f5c006ca
367
14. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
[1]
50gaf5c028na
[1]
[2]
50gaf5c029na
368
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 14. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
bizhub 501/421/361
[12]
[11]
[10]
[1]
[9]
[8]
[7] [2]
[6]
[5] [3]
[4]
a0r5f5c007ca
E. Write section
[2]
[1]
50gaf5c031na
369
14. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
[2]
[1]
50gaf5c032na
G. ADU section
[1]
50gaf5c046na
370
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 14. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
H. Fusing section
bizhub 501/421/361
[2]
[1]
50gaf5c033na
[1] Fusing heater lamp /2 (L3) [2] Fusing heater lamp /1 (L2)
371
14. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
14.2 DF
bizhub 501/421/361
A. Front side
[1]
a0r5f5c008ca
B. Rear side
[5]
[1]
[4] [2]
[3]
16eaf5c002na
372
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 14. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
C. Upper surface
bizhub 501/421/361
[7] [8] [9] [10] [11]
[1] Original size sensor /2 (PS2) [7] Original empty sensor (PS5)
[2] Stamp solenoid (SD2) [8] Original registration sensor (PS9)
[3] Original exit sensor (PS10) [9] Original size sensor /1 (PS1)
[4] Original detection sensor (PS8) [10] Original size sensor /3 (PS3)
[5] Original feed sensor (PS6) [11] Original size sensor /4 (PS4)
[6] Mix original size detection board (MOSDB)
[1]
[2]
16eaf5c004na
373
14. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
14.3 PC
bizhub 501/421/361
14.3.1 PC-206
[21]
[20]
[19] [22]
[18] [23]
[17] [24]
[16] [25]
[15] [26]
[14]
[1]
[13]
[12]
[2]
[11]
[3]
[10]
[9] [4]
[8]
[5]
[7]
[6]
4061f5c001na
[1] Vertical conveyance sensor /4 (PS126) [14] Paper size detect board /3 (PSDB3)
[2] Paper feed sensor /4 (PS125) [15] Paper size sensor /Rr3 (PS118)
[3] Paper empty sensor /4 (PS124) [16] Paper size sensor /Fr3 (PS119)
[4] Upper limit sensor /4 (PS123) [17] Tray set sensor /3 (PS112)
[5] Vertical conveyance motor /4 (M121) [18] Near-empty sensor /3 (PS113)
[6] Paper feed motor /4 (M123) [19] Paper lift motor /3 (M124)
[7] Paper lift motor /4 (M125) [20] Paper feed motor /3 (M122)
[8] Near-empty sensor /4 (PS122) [21] Vertical conveyance motor /3 (M120)
[9] Paper size sensor /Fr4 (PS128) [22] Right door open/close sensor (PS111)
[10] Paper size sensor /Rr4 (PS127) [23] Upper limit sensor /3 (PS114)
[11] Paper size detect board /4 (PSDB4) [24] Vertical conveyance sensor /3 (PS117)
[12] Tray set sensor /4 (PS121) [25] Paper feed sensor /3 (PS116)
[13] PC control board (PCCB) [26] Paper empty sensor /3 (PS115)
374
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 14. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
14.3.2 PC-407
bizhub 501/421/361
[20]
[19] [21]
[18]
[17]
[22]
[16]
[23]
[24]
[1]
[15]
[2]
[3]
[14]
[4]
[5]
[13]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[12] [9]
[11] [10]
4061f5c201na
[1] Paper empty sensor (PS3) [13] Shift gate motor (M3)
[2] Main tray empty board (MEB) [14] Shift gate position sensor (PS14)
[3] Paper lift motor (M5) [15] Rely board (RLB)
[4] Paper lift motor encoder sensor (PS10) [16] PC control board (PCCB)
[5] Lower limit over run sensor (PS7) [17] Tray lock solenoid (SD1)
[6] Shft motor encoder sensor (PS8) [18] Tray set sensor (PS6)
[7] Shift motor (M4) [19] Paper feed motor (M1)
[8] Tray release switch (SW1) [20] Vertical conveyance motor (M2)
[9] Shift position sensor (PS11) [21] Right door open/close sensor (PS5)
[10] Lower limit sensor (PS13) [22] Vertical conveyance sensor (PS2)
[11] Sub tray empty sensor (PS9) [23] Upper limit sensor (PS4)
[12] Shift home sensor (PS12) [24] Paper feed sensor (PS1)
375
14. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
14.4 LU
bizhub 501/421/361
[5]
[1]
[2]
[4] [3]
[9]
16aaf5c001na
[1] Remaining paper sensor /1 (PS154) [7] Upper limit sensor (PS152)
[2] Remaining paper sensor /2 (PS151) [8] Feed clutch (CL151)
[3] Dehumidifier heater (HTR101) [9] LU set sensor (PS156)
(Service parts setting
P/N 56AA-710# ) [10] Paper lift motor (M151)
[4] Pick-up solenoid (SD151) [11] Feed motor (M150)
[5] Paper empty sensor (PS153) [12] LU drive board (LUDB)
[6] LU exit sensor (PS155) [13] Upper door interlock switch (MS151)
376
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 14. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
14.5 FS
bizhub 501/421/361
14.5.1 FS-522
[27]
[26]
[28]
[20] [25]
[24] [29]
[21]
[23] [30]
[1]
[19] [22]
[18]
[17]
[16]
[2]
[13]
[12] [3]
[11] [4]
[10] [5]
[15] [9] [6]
[7]
[14]
[8]
4349f5c001na
377
14. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
14.5.2 FS-523
bizhub 501/421/361
A. Front side
[1]
[2]
[4]
[3] 4521f5c001na
[1] Main gate solenoid (SD2) [3] Tray lift motor (M7)
[2] Front door sensor (PS17) [4] Main tray upper limit LED (LED19)
378
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 14. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
B. Rear side
bizhub 501/421/361
[10] [11] [12] [13] [14]
[1]
[9]
[2]
[8] [3]
[7] [4]
[6]
[5]
4521f5c002na
[1] Main tray lower limit switch (SW3) [8] Bypass gate solenoid (SD1)
[2] Main tray upper limit sensor (PS19) [9] Entrance conveyance motor (M1)
[3] Paddle motor /Up (M15) [10] Conveyance motor /Up (M4)
[4] Paper exit motor (M3) [11] Conveyance motor /Lw (M2)
[5] FS control board (FSCB) [12] Paper exit roller release motor (M13)
[6] Interlock switch (SW1) [13] Main tray full sensor (PS7)
[7] Intermediate conveyance roller release [14] Paddle solenoid /Up (SD3)
motor (M12)
379
14. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
C. Punch section
bizhub 501/421/361
[3] [1]
[2] 4521f5c003na
380
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 14. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
D. Conveyance section
bizhub 501/421/361
[13]
[12] [14]
[15]
[16]
[11]
[1]
[10]
[2]
[9] [3]
[4]
[8]
[5]
[6]
[7]
4521f5e001na
[1] Hole punch position switch (SW4) [9] Paddle motor /Lw (M9)
[2] Hole punch selector motor (M14) [10] Roller release home sensor (PS12)
[3] Intermediate conveyance sensor (PS3) [11] Main route conveyance sensor (PS4)
[4] Alignment tray sensor (PS5) [12] Exit roller home sensor (PS13)
[5] Main tray reset sensor (PS8) [13] Upper door sensor (PS18)
[6] Alignment home sensor (PS9) [14] Sub tray full sensor (PS6)
[7] Main tray upper limit switch (SW2) [15] Sub tray exit sensor (PS1)
[8] Alignment motor (M5) [16] Bypass route conveyance sensor (PS2)
381
14. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
E. Stapler section
bizhub 501/421/361
[1]
[2]
4521f5c005na
[1] Stapler home sensor (PS14) [2] Stapler moving motor (M6)
382
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 14. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
bizhub 501/421/361
[3] [1]
[2]
4521f5c006na
383
14. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
14.6 PU-501
bizhub 501/421/361
[1]
[2]
[3]
[5]
[4]
4512f5c001na
[1] Punch scraps full sensor (PS1) [4] Encoder sensor (PS4)
[2] Punch position sensor /1 (PS2) [5] Punch motor (M1)
[3] Punch position sensor /2 (PS3)
384
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 14. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
14.7 SD-507
bizhub 501/421/361
[14]
[1]
[13]
[12]
[11]
[10]
[9]
[8]
[2]
[7]
[3]
[6]
[5] [4]
4511f5c001na
385
14. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
14.8 MT-502
bizhub 501/421/361
[11] [12]
[13]
[10] [14]
[15]
[16]
[9] [1]
[2]
[3]
[8]
[7]
[6]
[4]
[5]
4510f5c001na
386
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 14. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
14.9 RU-507
bizhub 501/421/361
[2] [1]
16faf5c001na
387
14. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
14.10 JS-502
bizhub 501/421/361
[1]
[2]
4347f5c001na
388
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 15. CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING
bizhub 501/421/361
15.1 Main body
15.1.1 Connector in the board
A. Overall control board (OACB)
NC
2001 (BK : 7 pin)
1301 (BN : 14 pin)
1901 (Silver Metal : 8 pin) 3901 (BK : 16 pin)
1001 (BN : 200 pin)
2003 (Silver Metal : 4 pin) 1101 (BN : 200 pin)
2004 (Silver Metal : 4 pin)
2602 (BN : 40 pin)
2701 (BK : 100 pin)
389
15. CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
37 (W : 8 pin) 36 (W : 10 pin)
38 (BN : 20 pin)
91 (BN : 2 pin)
21 (W : 11 pin)
NC NC
35 (W : 5 pin) NC
NC
18 (BN : 12 pin)
20 (W : 6 pin)
90 (W : 8 pin)
69 (BN : 3 pin)
17 (BN : 10 pin)
11 (W : 3 pin)
26 (W : 13 pin) 23 (W : 12 pin) 39 (W : 5 pin)
12 (BK : 68 pin)
390
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 15. CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING
bizhub 501/421/361
62 (BK : 3 pin)
63 (W : 10 pin)
65 (W : 2 pin)
60 (BN : 50 pin)
50gaf5c004na
391
15. CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
10 (W : 2 pin)
9 (W : 3 pin)
392
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 15. CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING
bizhub 501/421/361
71 (W : 11 pin)
70 (W : 6 pin)
72 (W : 3 pin)
50gaf5c006na
51 (BN : 5 pin)
50gaf5c007na
393
15. CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
50gaf5c009na
6 (W: 6 pin)
4 (W : 4 pin)
1 (BK : 50 pin)
3 (BK : 25 pin)
a0r5f5c009ca
394
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 15. CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING
bizhub 501/421/361
L. Operation key board/2 (PWB2)
10 (W : 10 pin)
a0r5f5c010ca
a0r5f5c011ca
N. VR board (PWB4)
8 (Y : 6 pin)
a0r5f5c012ca
395
15. CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
(BN : 40 pin)
a0r5f5c013ca
2 (BN : 2 pin)
1 (W : 6 pin)
a0r5f5c014ca
2 (W : 40 pin)
1 (W : 40 pin) a0r5f5c015ca
396
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 15. CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING
bizhub 501/421/361
87,88 (W : 5 pin)
50gaf5c015na
1 (W: 7 pin)
50gaf5c016na
1 (W : 4 pin) a0r5f5c016ca
3 (GY : 4 pin)
1 (BN : 4 pin)
a0r5f5c017ca
397
15. CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
15.2 DF
bizhub 501/421/361
1 (W : 2 pin) 11 (W : 2 pin)
3 (W : 8 pin) 4 (W : 7 pin)
13 (W : N.C.)
2 (W : 14 pin)
6 (W : 13 pin)
5 (W : 12 pin)
16eaf5c005nb
3 (W : 3 pin) 2 (W : 12 pin)
1 (W : 7 pin)
16eaf5c006na
398
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 15. CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING
15.3 PC
bizhub 501/421/361
15.3.1 Connector in the board
A. PC-206
(1) PC control board (PCCB)
5 (W : 8 pin) 3 (W : 14 pin)
6 (W : 15 pin) 4 (W : 5 pin)
1 (W : 12 pin)
8 (W : 13 pin)
2 (W : 2 pin)
7 (W : 7 pin)
4061f5c002na
1 (W : 5 pin)
4061f5c003na
399
15. CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
B. PC-407
bizhub 501/421/361
3 (W : 11 pin) 5 (W : 15 pin)
1 (W : 12 pin)
2 (W : 2 pin)
4061f5c202nb
1 (W : 22 pin) 2 (W : 22 pin)
4061f5c203na
1 (W : 3 pin)
4061f5c204na
400
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 15. CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING
15.4 LU
bizhub 501/421/361
15.4.1 Connector in the board
A. LU drive board (LUDB)
112 (W : 12 pin)
114 (W : 4 pin)
113 (GY : 22 pin)
111 (W : 2 pin)
401
15. CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
15.5 FS
bizhub 501/421/361
8 (W : 2 pin)
10 (W : 3 pin)
2 (W : 8 pin)
11 (W : 6 pin)
9 (W : 7 pin)
14 (W : 9 pin)
22 (W : 2 pin)
13 (W : 10 pin)
25 (W : 5 pin)
17 (W : 7 pin) 19 (W : 4 pin)
4349f5c002nb
2 (W : 15 pin)
1 (W : 7 pin)
4349f5c003na
402
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 15. CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING
B. FS-523
bizhub 501/421/361
(1) FS control board (FSCB)
6 (W : 2 pin)
5 (W : 4 pin)
4 (W : 2 pin)
15 (W : 8 pin)
3 (W : 2 pin)
16 (W : 6 pin)
2 (W : 2 pin)
17 (W : N.C.)
1 (W : 6 pin)
18 (W : 12 pin)
22 (W : 3 pin) 19 (W : 15 pin)
24 (W : 7 pin) 20 (W : 9 pin)
25 (W : 15 pin) 23 (W : 7 pin) 21 (W : 4 pin)
4521f5c007na
403
15. CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
15.6 SD
bizhub 501/421/361
7 (W : 8 pin)
4 (W : 9 pin)
404
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 15. CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING
15.7 MT
bizhub 501/421/361
15.7.1 Connector in the board
A. MT control board (MTCB)
102 (W : 12 pin)
103 (W : 7 pin)
107 (W : 8 pin)
104 (W : 2 pin)
4510f5c002na
405
bizhub 501/421/361
406
16. TIMING CHART
Start key ON
A. A4, 2 single sided originals, single sided copy (1 copy), paper feed tray 1
50gaf5c047na
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
Drum motor (M1)
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
Start key ON
50gaf5c048na
16. TIMING CHART
407
bizhub 501/421/361
bizhub 501/421/361
408
Start key ON / 1st sheet feed start 2nd sheet feed start 2nd sheet scan start
16.2 DF
Original set 1st sheet scan start 1st sheet scan complete 2nd sheet scan complete
16. TIMING CHART
OFF
ON
DSET signal
OFF
ON
VD signal
OFF
ON
NEXTPAGE signal
OFF
High speed
Low speed
Original feed
motor (M1) Stop
Middle speed
High speed
Low speed
Original conveyance
Stop
motor (M2)
Low speed
High speed
16eaf5c009na
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
Reverse 2nd sheet
Start key ON / 1st sheet feed start 1st sheet front face scan complete Reverse complete 1st sheet back face scan complete complete feed start
2nd sheet exit
Original set 1st sheet front face scan start Reverse start Reverse start 1st sheet exit start complete
1st sheet back face scan start
Original empty sensor ON
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
(PS5)
OFF
Original feed sensor ON
(PS6)
OFF
Original registration ON
sensor (PS9) OFF
Original detection ON
sensor (PS8) OFF
Original exit sensor ON
(PS10)
OFF
Pressure roller release ON
solenoid (SD1) OFF
Stamp solenoid (SD2) ON
B. Double sided original mode (A4, 2 sheets feed)
OFF
DSET signal
ON
OFF
VD signal ON
OFF
NEXTPAGE signal
ON
OFF
High speed
Original feed Low speed
motor (M1) Stop
Middle speed
High speed
Original Low speed
conveyance Stop
motor (M2) Low speed
High speed
16eaf5c010na
16. TIMING CHART
409
bizhub 501/421/361
bizhub 501/421/361
410
2nd sheet front face scan complete Reverse complete 2nd sheet back face scan complete Reverse complete 2nd sheet exit complete
16. TIMING CHART
2nd sheet front face scan start Reverse start Reverse start 2nd sheet exit start
2nd sheet back face scan start
Original empty sensor ON
(PS5) OFF
Original feed sensor ON
(PS6) OFF
Original registration ON
sensor (PS9) OFF
Original detection ON
sensor (PS8) OFF
Original exit sensor ON
(PS10) OFF
Pressure roller release ON
solenoid (SD1)
OFF
High speed
Original Low speed
conveyance Stop
motor (M2) Low speed
High speed
16eaf5c011na
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
Start key ON / 1st sheet feed start 2nd sheet feed start 2nd sheet scan start
Original set 1st sheet scan start 1st sheet scan complete 2nd sheet scan complete
Original registration ON
sensor (PS9)
OFF
Original detection sensor ON
(PS8)
OFF
C. FAX fine mode (A4, 2 sheets feed)
High speed
Low speed
Original conveyance
Stop
motor (M2)
Low speed
High speed
Stamp operation is executed only when "trailing edge" or "leading edge and trailing edge" specified.
16eaf5c012na
16. TIMING CHART
411
bizhub 501/421/361
bizhub 501/421/361
412
Start key ON / 1st sheet feed start Command received / 2nd sheet feed start 2nd sheet scan complete Command received
Original set 1st sheet scan start 1st sheet scan complete 2nd sheet scan start
ON
16. TIMING CHART
ON
DSET signal
OFF
ON
VD signal
OFF
ON
NEXTPAGE signal
OFF
High speed
High speed
Low speed
Original conveyance Stop
motor (M2)
Low speed
High speed
Stamp operation is executed only when "trailing edge" or "leading edge and trailing edge" specified.
When the communication completes normally, the trailing edge is stamped on.
16eaf5c013na
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
16.3 LU
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
Start key ON
16aaf5c003na
16. TIMING CHART
413
bizhub 501/421/361
bizhub 501/421/361
414
16.4.1
16.4 FS
16. TIMING CHART
FS-522
A. Non-sort, A4, 1 sheet setting
ON
Conveyance sensor (PS5)
OFF
Forward
Entrance motor (M3)
Stop
High speed
Conveyance motor Low speed
(M2)
Stop
Forward
Exit motor (M1)
Stop
4349f5c004na
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
Punch position sensor /1 (PS2) ON
Punch position sensor /2 (PS3) OFF
ON
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
Forward
Entrance motor (M3)
Stop
High speed
Conveyance
Low speed
motor (M2)
Stop
Forward
Exit motor (M1) Stop
Reverse
ON
Registration clutch (CL1)
OFF
Forward
Punch motor (M1)
Reverse
release Stop
motor (M6) Reverse (pressure)
Stacker paddle ON
solenoid (SD1) OFF
Forward
Alignment motor Stop
/Rr (M4)
Reverse
Forward
Alignment motor /Fr Stop
(M5)
Reverse
Stapler movement Forward
motor (M7) Stop
Forward
Stapler motor
Stop
4349f5c005na
16. TIMING CHART
415
bizhub 501/421/361
bizhub 501/421/361
416
16.4.2
16. TIMING CHART
FS-523
Entrance conveyance ON
motor (M1) OFF
ON
Conveyance motor /Up (M4)
OFF
ON
Main gate solenoid (SD2) OFF
4521f5c008na
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
Item
Fusing exit sensor (PS3) L
H 1 2 1 2
Entrance conveyance ON
motor (M1) OFF
Intermediate conveyance L 1 2 1 2
sensor (PS3) H
H Shift position
Shift home sensor (PS10)
L
Forward
Paper exit motor (M3) Stop
Reverse
4521f5c009na
16. TIMING CHART
417
bizhub 501/421/361
bizhub 501/421/361
418
FS operation start signal ON
Item
16. TIMING CHART
Intermediate conveyance L 1 2 1 2
sensor (PS3) H
Alignment operation Alignment operation
Forward
Alignment motor (M5) Stop
C. 1 staple /Rr, A4S, 2 originals, 2 copies setting
Reverse
4521f5c010na
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
L
Fusing exit sensor (PS3)
H
Entrance conveyance ON
motor (M1) OFF
ON
D. Non-sort, punch, 1 original, 1copy setting
4521f5c011na
16. TIMING CHART
419
bizhub 501/421/361
16. TIMING CHART Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
bizhub 501/421/361
Blank page
420
I
Z
T
F
Y
X
V
S
P
K
E
B
A
U
R
N
H
D
C
Q
O
G
1
1
24V2 20- 1
5 6
24V2 20- 2
5V-1 27-A11 5V
S.G-2 27-A10 S.GND P.GND 20- 4
CONT-3 27-A9 /DRM_ON(DO/L) P.GND 20- 5
Plug
CW/CCW-5 27-A7 F_MTYPE
Drum motor LD-6 27-A6 /DRAM_LCK(DI/H) 24V2 21- 11
M1
H/L-7 27-A5 DRM_GAIN 5V 21- 10
P.G-8 27-A4 P.GND 5V 21- 9
P.G-9
24V-10 27-A2 24V S.GND 21- 7
2
2
/HEATER1_CNT 21- 4
5V-1 27-B1 5V
FT1
FT2
FT9
Fusing motor LD-6 FT9
H/L-7
M11
27-B7 FIXM_GAIN
P.G-8 27-B8 P.GND
FT4
FT3
SW1
24V-10 27-B10 24V2 Charging
24V-11 27-B11 24V2
J62-3
J62-4
Charging
3
3
FT35
70- 6
Main power switch
24V1 16- 1
FT10
FT10
70- 5
FT5
FT6
or
P.GND 16- 5 70- 2
To developing bias
CONT-3 32-A12 /DEV_ON(DO/L) J17-7
7 J17-12
7 70- 1 J16-20
24V2 16- 6 72- 5
J25-1 J25-5
CW/CCW-5 FT31 FT32 FT33
Developing motor LD-6 32-A9 /DEVM_LCK
M3
H/L-7 32-A8 DEVM_GAIN
72- 1 J16-11
P.G-8 32-A7 P.GND
(DI/L)/S_FB 15-1 71-11 FT30
24V-10 32-A5 24V2 (AO/4-10V) SDC_SIG 15-2 71-10
FS-523
FS-522
24V-11
HV
26-A4 24V2 71- 9
4
4
+RU-507
(DI/L)/T_FB 15-5 71- 7
3-6 EN24V
3-4 S.GND
3-3 S.GND
7-4 P.GND
7-5 P.GND
7-6 P.GND
CN10-2 AC(N)
CN10-1 AC(H)
3-8 L3CONT
3-7 L2CONT
CN8-3 SW IN(N)
CN8-1 SW IN(H)
3-12 RL_PWR
3-9 L3CONT2
32-A3 GND
3-11 RL_PGND
CN8-2 SW OUT(H)
CN8-4 SW OUT(N)
or
NF
FM1
32-A1 F1.DRV
(AO/4-10V) GRID_SIG 15-9 71- 3
(AO/4-10V) CHG_SIG 15-10 71- 2 Noise filter
6-4 24V
71- 1
for
(DO/L)/C_CONT 15-11
LU
FT36 FT37
64
6-8 P.GND
17. OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM
Separation
24V
917: 3 - 2
F4
PC-407
PC-206
32-B14 GND 6-3 24V
for
DF
Developing cooling fan 32-B13 /F7.LCK(DI/H)
3 4
917: 1 - 4 6-7 P.GND
FM7
RL24V
300:A10- A10
6-2 24V
J60: 2 - 2
914: 3 - 1
6-6 P.GND
5
5
Transfer
/F4.DRV 15-12
F2
F3
2
3
3
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
914: 2 - 2
18
20
19
15
14
13
12
31
30
29
27
26
25
24
22
21
(DI/H) /F4.LCK 15-13 Drum cooling fan 6-1 24V
914: 1 - 3
BT1
for
FM4
2
5V-1 32-B11 5V P.GND 15-14 6-5 P.GND
SDB
4
4
4
4
3
3
3
3
3
3
S.G-2
43
42
41
40
38
37
36
35
33
32
32-B10 S.GND
24V
NC
BT3
5V2
5V2
CONT-3 32-B9 FEED_ON(DO/L)
24V2
24V2
for DCPS
S.GND
P.GND
P.GND
S.GND
S.GND
S.GND
S.GND
CLK-4 32-B8 FEEDM_CLK
FS_CTS
FS_RTS
FS_TXD
FS_RXD
for ENGINE
/F6.DRV 15-15
Feed motor LD-6 32-B6 N.C.
F1
M9
H/L-7 32-B5 FEED_GAIN
FM6
P.GND 15-17
P.G-8
RL1 POWER
32-B4 P.GND
RL24V
RL1 POWER
20
19
18
17
16
14
13
12
11
Main relay
6
6
RL1 CNT
RL1 CNT
5V
for FNS
LCDB
(AI/0-5V) TH1.S 34-A1 Thermistor /1
5-9 5V2
5-3 24V
5-2 24V
5-1 24V
J12: 6 - 2 980:2 - 2
5-10 5V2
S.GND 34-A2
TH1
5-8 S.GND
5-7 S.GND
5-6 P.GND
5-5 P.GND
5-4 P.GND
OB INVB
-3
3 J15: 1 - 1
13 J12: 5 - 3
31-A1 5V_R (AI/0-5V) TH2.S 34-A3
PKB
TH2
/BP4 J15: 3 - 1
11
B
972 1
972-1
9 31-A3 MULTI_SIZE4(MULTI)
Ǿ3
RT3
44
Pick-up solenoid 31-A4 24V2
Backlight
4 45
J15: 5 - 9 S.GND 34-A6 -2 Fusing exit sensor
/BP 31-A5 MULTI_PICKUP_SD_DRV(MULTI)
-1 FL HOT
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
(CN1) - 6
CR003
4 46
953-1
PS3
24V
24V
5V1
4 47 4
AC DRIVE
-3
3 36: 1 - 3 J15: 6 - 8
4 48
31-A6 S.GND J05:3 - 1
7
7
50
Ǿ3
31-A8 5V
3
RT3
J05:1 - 3 987-1
PZS
TLEV_5V 34-A10
5 51
-3
3
5
31-A9 5V_R
53
903:6 - 1
Lift sensor -2
2 31-A10 S.GND TNR_A 34-A11
9
973 1
973-1 31-A11 MULTI_POSITION_PS
55
TNR_B 34-A13
5
CN9-1 AC(H)
31-A12 MULTI_SET
5 56
Toner supply motor
M4
31-A13 S.GND 903:2 - 5
CN9-3 L3 DRIVE
CN9-2 L2 DRIVE
24V2 34-A15
58
903:1 - 6
LU-203
(J35:CT 2PIN)
24V2 34-A16
OPERATION UNIT
5 59
-1
-4
-3
-2
-40
3-1
5 60
Vertical conveyance clutch J35: 2 - 3 905:6 - 1
BTLM_A 34-B1 -5
CL3
31-A15 V_FEED_CL_DRV
6 61
905:5 - 2
P.GND
24V
6
-4
6 62
J35: 3 - 2 BTLM_B 34-B3 -3
8
8
(CN9)
(CN10)
Feed clutch /2 J35: 4 - 1 BTLM_AB 34-B4 -2
M10
CL5
31-A17 TRAY2_FEED_CL_DRV(LOWER)
905:1 - 6 (CN7)
24V2 34-B6
(CN3)
Interlock switch
62: 4 - 4
J24-2B
SD4
WEB_SD_DRV 34-B8
(PWB2)
ADU conveyance sensor /1 31-B2 S.GND
31-B3 DUP_PS1
J23-4
OPERATION
935:2 - 1
KEY BOARD /1
-3 24V2 34-B9
31-B4 5V_R 935:1 - 2 Toner solenoid
B
SD5
TNR_SD_DRV 34-B10
CR003
ADU conveyance
y -2
sensor /2 31-A5 S.GND
Ǿ3
RT3
OPERATION
64
63
OB
J28: 6 - 1
/F2.DRV 34-B11
KEY BOARD /2
9
9
J28: 4 - 3 911: 1 - 3
SWD24V
SWD24V
FM2
/close sensor 976-1 P.GND 34-B13
(CN5)
J03:10 - 5
Ǿ3
6
5
3
RT3
ADU conveyance
y 31-B10 24V2
J03:11 - 4
(PWB4)
FM8
31-B12 24V2 P.GND 34-B16
ADU conveyance clutch /Lw
31-B13 DUP_CL2_DRV
31-B14 N.C.
915: 1 - 3 J33: 1 - 3
31-B15 F5.DRV
915: 2 - 2 J33: 2 - 2
Coveyance suction fan 31-B16 P.GND
915: 3 - 1 J33: 3 - 1
FM5
31-B17 /F5.LCK(DI/H)
SW2
5V 33-1 988-7
DRUM_TH 33-2 -6
10
10
12V 33-3 -5
0
TNRIF 33-4 -4
J21-03
J21-02
J21-01
IDCS
J16-7
J J11: 2 - 6
IDC sensor
939-2
939 2 J07: 1 - 8 TNOUT2 33-6 -2
30-A1 24V2 J
J16-8 J11: 1 - 7
Total counter 939 1
939-1 J07: 2 - 7 S.GND 33-7 -1
TCT
30-A2 TC_DRV
J16-15
J 932:2 - 1
-3
3 CLAW_SD_DRV 33-8
30-A3 5V_R J
J16-16 932:1 - 2 Drum claw solenoid
SD2
-2
2 24V2 33-9
PRCB
Paper empty sensor /1 30-A4 S.GND
J13-2
2
J13-3
J13-4
955 1
955-1
9
PS5
30-A5 TRAY1_EMPTY_PS(UPPER)
514: 2 - 1
514: 1 - 2
J
J16-12 937:2 - 1
24V2 33-10
J
J16-18 937:1 - 2 Erase lamp 12V2(LD) 4602- 8
1302-1
EL
PCL_DRV 33-11
1302-50
-2
2
11
11
2501-1 SPK#
956 1
956-1
9
PS6
30-A8 TRAY1_FULL_PS(UPPER)
S.GND 4602- 4
Ǿ4
S.GND 4602- 3
RT4
24V2 35-1
35-2
-3
3 J08: 1 - 1
12 /KEY.SIG 35-2 5V2 4602- 1
30-A9 5V_R 35-3
J08: 2 - 1
11
SP
962 1
962-1
9 J08: 3 - 1
10 KC.DRV 35-4
Thermostat
30-A11 TRAY2_EMPTY_PS(LOWER)
FT21
P.GND 35-5
J13-1
-3
3 30-A12 5V_R
-2
2 S.GND 4603- 5
Upper limit sensor /2 30-A13 S.GND
/M1 36-1 12V1 4603- 4
/PF 36-2 /NMI 4603- 3
FT22
12
12
-2
2 30-A16 S.GND /PS2 36-5
Vertical conveyance sensor FT24
952 1
952-1
9 30-A17 V_FEED_PS /PS3 36-6
/SIDE 36-7
-3
3 J08:10 - 3 /CPF0 36-8
Coin vendor/2
30-A18 5V_R
Feed door S.GND 4601- 4
30-A19 S.GND 2302-1 F10.DRV
open/close sensor 957 1
957-1
9 J08:12 - 1 P.GND 36-10 S.GND 4601- 3
30-A20 SIDE DOOR 2302-2 GND
5V1 4601- 2
2302-3 F10.LCK
FM10
5V1 4601- 1
OACB
TXD 37-1
989-1 J17-2 J14: 1 - 4 S.GND 37-2
OACB cooling fan
30-B1 TDS_CONT
30-B2 12V
TCR sensor 30-B3 TDS_SIG RXD 37-4
30-B4 S.GND NC 37-5
-5 RTS 37-6
S.GND 37-7 2301-1 F11.DRV
13
13
30-B5 24V2
Feed clutch /1
CL4
30-B6 TRAY1_FEED_CL_DRV(UPPER)
CPU cooling fan
N.C. 17-10
ADF_RXD 17-9
30-B7 5V_R
Paper empty sensor /BP -2
30-B8 S.GND ADF_TXD 17-7
968-1
30-B9 MULTI_EMPTY_PS N.C. 17-6
N.C. 17-5
ADFOPEN 17-4 46- 1 60- 1 S.GND
-3 J10: 1 - 1
11
30-B10 5V_R
paper size sensor /BP1 -2
30-B11 S.GND N.C. 17-2
969-1
30-B12 MULTI_SIZE1 N.C. 17-1
2201-4 ERRER LED
14
201B: 1- 12
14
ADF_SIZE2 18-8
ADF_SIZE3 18-7
-3 J10: 7 - 5
30-B16 5V_R
DF-613
-2 J10: 8 - 4
Paper size sensor /BP3 30-B17 S.GND N.C. 18-5
971-1 J10: 9 - 3
30-B18 MULTI_SIZE3 ADF_EMPTY_PS 18-4
5V1 18-3
-16 +IN_CLK
CN2001 CN2002
CL6
30-B20 MULTI_FEED_CL_DRV(MULTI)
P.GND
24V
15
15
-3
75$+(
BOARD
959-1
23-A3 NEAR_EMPTY_PS(UPPER)
-3 -27 +AD_D0
23-A4 5V_R PLY.CLK 39-5 904-1 for DCPS
Tray set sensor /1 23-A5 S.GND /PLY.LCK 39-4
958-1
2
1
23-A7 5V_R
Paper size sensor /Rr1 23-A8 S.GND -33 S.GND
960-1
for DCPS 50-A12 3501-A1 /ENB1
23-A9 WIDTH_PS1(UPPER) -A11
16
16
-A2 /ALM1
-A10 -A3 /BIAS1
-3 - A9 -A4 /S/H1
23-A10 5V_R
62-1 U
Paper size sensor /Fr1 23-A11 S.GND - A7
961-1 Scanner motor -2 V -A6 LD+5V
M2
23-A12 WIDTH_PS2(UPPER) - A6
-3 W -A7 LD+5V
65- 1 24V2
- A5
65- 2 P.GND
46-41
- A4 -A9 S.GND
46-42
- A3 -A10 -VIDEO2
-5 24-A1 FD_SIZE1(UPPER) 980-3 63-1 S.GND J50:A11 - A2
- A2 -A11 +VIDEO2
-4 24-A2 FD_SIZE2(UPPER) Scanner home sensor -2 63-2 OPT_HOME J50:A12 - A1 46-44 -44 +5V
Paper size board /1 - A1 -A12 S.GND
PS30
17
-1
17
63-6 TIMING1
LDB
- B9 -B4 S.GND
907- 2
24-A6 24V2 97-3 96-1 930-1 L.V. 63-7 24V - B7
Paper lift motor /1 907- 1 -B6 /BIAS2
SC-505
EM-312
M7
64-2 S.GND
25-A4 5V_R
-2
Tray set sensor /2 25-A5 S.GND
964-1
25-A6 CASETTE_SET(LOWER)
18
18
64-3 KC_24V
936B-1 -3
64-4 KC.DRV J52: 5 - 1
936B-2 -2 51-1 3601- 5 +5V
64-5 /KEY.SIG
26-A1 5V_R -2
-2 64-6 S.GND
26-A2 S.GND -3 3601- 3 /HSENSE
Key counter
-1 64-9 S.GND
-2
Paper size sensor /Fr2 26-A5 S.GND KC_24V 28-A1 61- A12
967-1
26-A6 WIDTH_PS2(LOWER)
APS_5V 28-A3 61- A10
INDEXB
-4
Paper size board /2 -3 26-A9 FD_SIZE3(LOWER) OPM_MODE_C 28-A8 61- A5
-2 26-A10 FD_SIZE4(LOWER) DF_CLOSE_SIG 28-A9 61- A4
CN2702
98-1
PSB/2
CN**
J03: 7 - 5
Symbol
908- 1
61- B11
Paper lift motor /2
M8
26-A13 LIFT_UP_M_DRV(LOWER)
5V2 28-B4 61- B9
5V2 28-B5 61- B8
OPM_DIR 28-B6 61- B7
OPM_MODE_B 28-B7 61- B6
986-4
Connector
22-B1 N.C.
20
20
-3
3 22-B2 S.GND S_DA_LATCH 28-B9 61- B4
Humidity sensor -2
2 S_DA_CLK 28-B10
22-B3 HUMS_SIG 61- B3
-1
1
HUMS
22-B8 RESIST_CL_DRV
Faston
- 9 RI
922: 1 - 2 J01: 1 - 5
22-B7 24V2
- 3 TXD
1901-7
1901-6
1901-5
1901-4
1901-3
1901-2
1901-1
- 2 RXD
22-B6 LOOP_CL_DRV
2304- 1 DCD
2.5V
2.5V
2004-1 VDD
2003-1 VDD
2004-4 GND
2003-4 GND
2004-2 -Data
2003-2 -Data
2004-3 +Data
2003-3 +Data
MDI1-
MDI0-
1901-9 MDI3+
MDI2+
MDI1+
MDI0+
1901-10 MDI3-
-3 J01: 3 - 3
22-B9 S.GND
1901-14 LINK100
1901-12 LINK-UP
22-B10 RESI.PS(DI/H)
21
21
Ǿ3
DIMM
RT3
3
BK
COPY_5V (OUT)
44
22-A2 LT_TRAY_UP_M_ON
22-A4 LU_FEED_M_H/L
(SERIAL)
22-A5 LU_FEED__M_CLK
22-A6 LU_FEED_M_ON
5
N.C. 1000- 8
50
Ǿ3
22-A7 LU_SD_DRIVE
RT3
3
BK
52
22-A9 LU_JAM_IN
5
5 53
22-A10 LU_FULL_PS_IN
COPY VENDER
22-A11 LU_EMPTY_PS_IN
23
23
5
-B50 LINESEL
2701-A 1 +12V
((CN55:FX2))
55
22-A12 LU_SET1_IN
57
22-A14 LU_SET_IN
5
5 58
22-A15 LU_TYPE_IN
60
22-A17 5V
6 61
J31: 8 - 1
JOB_TRAY_SET 29-A1
6
J63:19 - 1
6 62
J31: 6 - 3
5V_R 29-A3
J31: 5 - 4
S.GND 29-A4
J31: 4 - 5
J31: 3 - 6
JS-502
5V_R 29-A6
24
24
J31: 2 - 7
S.GND 29-A7
EMPTY PS FULL PS
J31: 1 - 8
JOB TRAY JOB TRAY
JOB_TRAY_FULL_PS 29-A8
J61 : 1 - 12
2 J30: 6 - 1 913: 3 - 1
32
3 34
J30: 1 - 6
3
39
19-A10 N.C.
25
25
4 42
REVERSE_M_XB 29-B1
4 43
J32: 8 - 4 -1
REVERSE_M_A 29-B4
21
19-B1 FS_TXD
2
2 22
19-B2 S.GND
24V2 29-B5 J32: 7 - 5
REVERSE_SD 29-B6 J32: 6 - 6 933:1 - 2 Reverse solenoid
24
19-B4 FS_RTS
SD3
2 25
19-B5 S.GND
2 26
5V_R 29-B7
REVERSE UNIT
2 27
J32: 3 - 9 977-1
PS27
REVERSE_PS 29-B9
29
19-B9 FS_CTS
ML -503+FK-502
2 30
MK-708+FK-502
26
26
J06:3 - 1 -3
5V_R 29-B12
-2
S.GND 29-B13 Toner bottle sensor
J06:1 - 3 954-1
PS4
11-2 NC
5V_R 69-1 -3
S.GND 69-2 -2 Toner bottle position sensor
978-1
PS28
TNRB.PS(DI/H) 69-3
27
27
Z
T
F
Y
X
V
S
P
K
E
B
A
U
R
N
H
D
C
Q
O
G
W
17. OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM
bizhub 501/421/361
17. OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
bizhub 501/421/361
bizhub 501/421/361
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
A RL24V
A
RL1 POWER RL1 CNT FT22
J21-01
CN9-1 AC(H) J13-2
2
FT23
FT24
FT3 FT5 CN10-1 AC(H) BT1 Main relay Thermostat
CBR 1 AC(H)
AC DRIVE
B RL1
CR001
B
Noise filter
FT1 J21-02 J13-3
CN9-2 L2 DRIVE FT25
L2
Inlet
NF
Plug RL1 POWER RL1 CNT
FT2 J13-4
Circuit breaker /2 J21-03
0
L3
CN9-3 L3 DRIVE
FT4 FT6 CN10-2 AC(N) BT3
CBR 2 AC(N)
RL2 J13-1
C CN8-1 SW IN(H)
CR003
RT4
Ǿ4
RT3
Ǿ4
C
CN8-3 SW IN(N)
EN5V2 2-5
EN12V1 2-4
DCPS(1/2) NMI
12V1
S.GND
2-3
2-2
2-1
E 5V2 4-1
E
for FNS
24V 5V2 4-2
S.GND 4-3
F3 5-1 24V
S.GND 4-4
F1 12V2 4-5
S.GND 4-6
F2 S.GND 4-7
12V2 4-8
F MS F
6-8 P.GND
6-7 P.GND
6-5 P.GND
6-6 P.GND
SWD24V
6-4 24V
6-3 24V
6-1 24V
12V2(LD) 4602- 8
S.GND 4602- 7
S.GND 4602- 6
12V2 4602- 5
4602- 3
4602- 2
4602- 1
4603- 5
4603- 4
EN12V1 4603- 2
EN5V2 4603- 1
4601- 4
4601- 2
4601- 1
6-2 24V
24V 7-1 5
2
20 5-10 5V2 J23-1 -1B J23-3
SWD24V
24V 7-2 6
J23-4
S.GND
S.GND
S.GND
(J23:NMF)
12V1
5V2
5V2
5V1
5V1
G 63 64 3 1 2
G
for for for
LU DF SDB
3-1
PKB -2 1302-1
J60: 1 - 1
J60: 2 - 2
-3
-4
H H
-40
OB
4 45
44 4 4 48
47 4 5
50 5 53
52 5 5
55 5 58
57 5 6 61
60 6 62
6 32
3 (PWB1)
PC-206
3
33
3
34
OACB(1/3)
2301-1 F11.DRV
3
35
2301-3 F11.LCK
3
36
I I
2301-2 GND
LCDB
3
37
or
for DCPS
24V 63 39
3
P.GND 64 4
40
62: 4 - 4 4
41
PC-407
4
42
LU-203 4
43
-1
J Backlight J
FM11
2302-1 F10.DRV
2302-3 F10.LCK
-6 (CN6)
2302-2 GND
1302-50
-1
-4
-3
-6
-2
-4
-3
-1
-2
CN3
2
21 FS_TXD CPU cooling fan
S.GND 2501-1 SPK#
-6
K NC
FS_RTS
OB INVB -5
-4
2501-2 SPK
K
FS-522 28
2
S.GND
FS_RXD
NC
S.GND
-2
-1
or 2
29
3
31
FS_CTS
S.GND
S.GND
514: 1 - 2
SP FM10
L KEY BOARD /2 SW2 L
FS-523
11 24V2
12 24V2 Speaker
24V2
P.GND (CN9) OACB cooling fan
+RU-507
P.GND
P.GND OPERATION UNIT (CN10) (CN8)
-6
5V2
20
2 5V2
17 S.GND
(PWB4)
18 S.GND (PWB2)
M M
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
17. OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
bizhub 501/421/361
bizhub 501/421/361
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
A A
Symbol
B B
CCDB Connector
Crimp
Faston
Relay connector
COPY VENDER
-16 +IN_CLK
-27 +AD_D0
C C
-10 S.GND
-32 S.GND
-33 S.GND
-45 S.GND
-50 S.GND
(SERIAL)
-20 SCLK
-21 *SEN
-49 +12V
-19 GND
- 9 -TCK
-44 +5V
-22 SDI
CN**
D D
CF
46- 1
46- 2
46- 3
46- 4
46- 5
46- 6
46- 7
46- 8
46- 9
46-10
46-11
46-12
46-13
46-14
46-15
46-16
46-17
46-18
46-19
46-20
46-21
46-22
46-23
46-24
46-25
46-26
46-27
46-28
46-29
46-30
46-31
46-32
46-33
46-34
46-35
46-36
46-37
46-38
46-39
46-40
46-41
46-42
46-43
46-44
46-45
46-46
46-47
46-48
46-49
46-50
1000- 1
1000- 2
1000- 3
1000- 4
1000- 5
1000- 6
1000- 7
1000- 8
E E
VEN.5V (IN)
COPY_5V (OUT)
VEN_TXD (OUT)
VEN_RXD (IN)
S.GND
COPY_GNT (OUT)
IO_PORT (IN)
N.C.
((CN55:FX2))
2701-A 1 +12V
-A 2 GND
-A 3 +5V(main)
-A
A 4 GND
-A 6 WAKEUP
-A 7 GND
-A 8 GND
-A 9 AD1
F -A10 +5V(STBY)
(
-A11 AD3
-A12 GND
-A13 AD5
)
F
HD-509
-A15
15 AD7
G MK-708 +FK-502 G
-A26 GND
-A27 GND
-A28 IRDY#
-A29 C/BE#2
-A30 AD17
-A32 AD19
-A33 AD21
ML-503+FK-502
-A34 GND
-A36 C/BE#3
READY LED
-B 7 SBDM1
/HSENSE
-B 8 SBDP1
I I
/INDPR
S.GND
S.GND
3501-A1 /ENB1
-B 9 +5V(main)
( )
3501-B1 LOAD
-A11 +VIDEO2
-B11 +VIDEO1
-B8 /ALMRST
-A10 -VIDEO2
-B10 -VIDEO1
DTel+
+5V
DTel-
GND
-B11 AD0
-A12 S.GND
-B12 S.GND
-B2 DACLK
-A8 +5VRN
-A5 S.GND
-A9 S.GND
-B4 S.GND
-B9 S.GND
-A3 /BIAS1
-B6 /BIAS2
-A6 LD+5V
-A7 LD+5V
-A2 /ALM1
-B5 /ALM2
-B12 AD2
5V
5V
5V
-A4 /S/H1
-B7 /S/H2
-B13 AD4
-B14 AD6
3601- 5
3601- 4
3601- 3
3601- 2
3601- 1
-B3 DI
2005-4
2005-3
2005-2
2005-1
2201-4
2201-3
2201-2
2201-1
-B16 C/BE#0
BE#0
-B17 AD9
-B18 GND
CSRC I/F
-B20 AD13
-B21 AD15
2304- 1 DCD -B22 GND
- 2 RXD -B24 3.3V
J - 3 TXD
- 4 DTR -B25 STOP#
J
J52: 5 - 1
J52: 4 - 2
-B26 TRDY#
J50:A12 - A1
J50:B12 - B1
- A6
- A5
- A4
- A3
- A1
50-B12
-B11
- B9
- B8
- B7
- B6
- B4
- B3
- B2
- B1
51-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-B39 3.3V
K 2003-1
2003-2
VDD
-Data
-B41 GND
-B42 PME#
-B43 GND K
USB
-B44 CNT#
2003-3 +Data -B45 3.3V
LDB INDEXB
-B46 RST#
2003-4 GND -B47 +12V
-B48 3.3V
-B49 CLKEN
-B50 LINESEL
2004-1 VDD
USB
2004-2 -Data
2004-3 +Data
L 2004-4 GND
L
M M
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
17. OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
bizhub 501/421/361
Y
X
V
S
U
R
N
Q
O
W
24V2 20- 1
5 6
24V2 20- 2 RL24V
5V-1 27-A11 5V P.GND 20- 3 7-6 P.GND
S.G-2
1
1
M1
H/L-7 27-A5 DRM_GAIN 5V 21- 10 3-1 5V2
17.4 Main body 3/4
2
2
M11
27-B7 FIXM_GAIN
P.G-8 27-B8 P.GND
P.G-9 27-B9 P.GND
DCPS(2/2)
FT35
24V1 16- 1 70- 6
P.GND 16- 2 70- 5
(DO/L)/BIAS1 16- 3 70- 4 Grid biass
(AO/2-8V)B_SIG 16- 4 70- 3
5V-1 32-A14 5V
FT40
S.G-2 32-A13 S.GND
P.GND 16- 5 70- 2
To developing bias
3
3
M3
H/L-7 32-A8 DEVM_GAIN
72- 1 J16-11
P.G-8 32-A7 P.GND
P.G-9 32-A6 P.GND (DI/L)/S_FB 15-1 71-11 FT30
24V-10 32-A5 24V2 (AO/4-10V) SDC_SIG 15-2 71-10
24V-11
HV
26-A4 24V2 (AO/4-10V) SAC_SIG 15-3 71- 9
To guide plate bias
FM1
32-A1 F1.DRV
(AO/4-10V) GRID_SIG 15-9 71- 3
4
4
917: 3 - 2
32-B14 GND
917: 2 - 3
Developing cooling fan 32-B13 /F7.LCK(DI/H)
917: 1 - 4
FM7
32-B12 F7.DRV
914: 3 - 1
Transfer
/F4.DRV 15-12
914: 2 - 2
(DI/H) /F4.LCK 15-13 Drum cooling fan
914: 1 - 3
FM4
5
5
CW/CCW-5 916: 3 - 1
/F6.DRV 15-15
Feed motor LD-6 32-B6 N.C. 916: 2 - 2
(DI/H) /F6.LCK 15-16 Developing suction fan
M9
H/L-7 32-B5 FEED_GAIN 916: 1 - 3
FM6
P.GND 15-17
P.G-8 32-B4 P.GND
P.G-9 32-B3 P.GND
24V-10 32-B2 24V2
24V-11 32-B1 24V2
J12: 7 - 1 J13:A4 - A1 980:1 - 1
(AI/0-5V) TH1.S 34-A1 Thermistor /1
J12: 6 - 2 J13:A3 - A2 980:2 - 2
S.GND 34-A2
TH1
/BP4 J15: 3 - 11
B
972-1
PS22
31-A3 MULTI_SIZE4(MULTI)
6
6
Ǿ3
RT3
931: 1 - 2 J15: 4 - 10 J12: 3 - 5 J13:B4 - B1 J18: 3 - 1 -3
Pick-up solenoid 31-A4 24V2 5V_R 34-A5
931: 2 - 1 J15: 5 - 9 J12: 2 - 6 J13:B3 - B2 J18: 2 - 2 -2 Fusing exit sensor
S.GND 34-A6
SD1
/BP 31-A5 MULTI_PICKUP_SD_DRV(MULTI)
J12: 1 - 7 J13:B2 - B3 J18: 1 - 3 953-1
PS3
VR1
Ǿ3
31-A8 5V
RT3
J05:1 - 3 987-1
PZS
TLEV_5V 34-A10
-3 J15: 9 - 5
31-A9 5V_R 903:6 - 1
-2 J15:10 - 4 TNR_A 34-A11
Lift sensor 31-A10 S.GND 903:5 - 2
973-1 J15:11 - 3 TNR_AB 34-A12
PS23
31-A11 MULTI_POSITION_PS 903:4 - 3
J15:12 - 2 TNR_B 34-A13
31-A12 MULTI_SET 903:3 - 4 Toner supply motor
J15:13 - 1 TNR_BB 34-A14
M4
7
7
24V2 34-A15
903:1 - 6
(J35:CT 2PIN)
24V2 34-A16
923: 1 - 2 J35: 1 - 4
31-A14 24V2 905:6 - 1
Vertical conveyance clutch 923: 2 - 1 J35: 2 - 3 BTLM_A 34-B1
CL3
31-A15 V_FEED_CL_DRV 905:5 - 2
BTLM_AB 34-B2
905:4 - 3
925: 1 - 2 J35: 3 - 2 BTLM_B 34-B3
31-A16 24V2 905:3 - 4 Toner bottle motor
Feed clutch /2 925: 2 - 1 J35: 4 - 1 BTLM_AB 34-B4
M10
905:2 - 5
CL5
31-A17 TRAY2_FEED_CL_DRV(LOWER) 24V2 34-B5
905:1 - 6
24V2 34-B6
PS24
974-1 J03: 3 -12
31-B3 DUP_PS1
935:2 - 1
8
8
B
SD5
Ǿ3
PS25
RT3
975-1 J03: 6 - 9
31-B6 DUP_PS2
J28: 6 - 1
-3 J03: 7 - 8 /F2.DRV 34-B11
31-A7 5V_R J28: 5 - 2 911: 2 - 2
ADU open -2 J03: 8 - 7 /F2.LCK(DI/H) 34-B12 Fusing cooling fan/Fr
31-A8 S.GND J28: 4 - 3 911: 1 - 3
FM2
976-1 J03: 9 - 6
31-B9 DUP_COVER
927: 1 - 2 J03:10 - 5
Ǿ3
RT3
ADU conveyance 31-B10 24V2
927: 2 - 1 J03:11 - 4
CL7
31-B13 DUP_CL2_DRV
9
9
J03:14 - 1
31-B14 N.C.
915: 1 - 3 J33: 1 - 3
31-B15 F5.DRV
915: 2 - 2 J33: 2 - 2
Coveyance suction fan 31-B16 P.GND
915: 3 - 1 J33: 3 - 1 J16-2 J11: 7 - 1
FM5
J16-7 J11: 2 - 6
IDC sensor
30-A2 TC_DRV
J16-15 932:2 - 1
-3 J04: 1 - 6 J07: 3 - 6 CLAW_SD_DRV 33-8
30-A3 5V_R J16-16 932:1 - 2 Drum claw solenoid
SD2
30-A5 TRAY1_EMPTY_PS(UPPER)
J16-12 937:2 - 1
24V2 33-10
J16-18 937:1 - 2 Erase lamp
EL
30-A8 TRAY1_FULL_PS(UPPER)
24V2 35-1
35-2
-3 J08: 1 - 12 /KEY.SIG 35-2
30-A9 5V_R 35-3
Paper empty sensor /2 -2 J08: 2 - 11 S.GND 35-3
30-A10 S.GND
962-1 J08: 3 - 10 KC.DRV 35-4
PS12
30-A11 TRAY2_EMPTY_PS(LOWER)
P.GND 35-5
-3 J08: 4 - 9
11
11
30-A12 5V_R
Upper limit sensor /2 -2 J08: 5 - 8
30-A13 S.GND
963-1 J08: 6 - 7 /M1 36-1
PS13
30-A14 TRAY2_FULL_PS(LOWER)
/PF 36-2
/PS0 36-3
-3 J08: 7 - 6 /PS1 36-4
30-A15 5V_R
-2 J08: 8 - 5 /PS2 36-5
Vertical conveyance sensor 30-A16 S.GND
952-1 J08: 9 - 4
PS2
30-A18 5V_R
Feed door -2 J08:11 - 2 /CPF1 36-9
30-A19 S.GND
open/close sensor 957-1 J08:12 - 1 P.GND 36-10
PS7
TXD 37-1
989-1 J17-2 J14: 1 - 4
30-B1 TDS_CONT S.GND 37-2
-2 J17-3 J14: 2 - 3
12
12
-5
RTS 37-6
S.GND 37-7
5V 37-8
924: 1 - 2
30-B5 24V2
Feed clutch /1 924: 2 - 1
CL4
30-B6 TRAY1_FEED_CL_DRV(UPPER)
-3 J27: 1 - 3
30-B7 5V_R
Paper empty sensor /BP -2 J27: 2 - 2
30-B8 S.GND
968-1 J27: 3 - 1
PS18
30-B9 MULTI_EMPTY_PS
13
13
-3 J10: 1 - 11
30-B10 5V_R
paper size sensor /BP1 -2 J10: 2 - 10
30-B11 S.GND
969-1 J10: 3 - 9
PS19
30-B12 MULTI_SIZE1
Z
T
Y
X
V
S
P
U
R
N
Q
O
W
17. OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM
bizhub 501/421/361
17. OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
bizhub 501/421/361
Y
X
V
S
U
R
N
Q
O
W
-3
30-B13 5V_R
-2
Paper size sensor /BP2 30-B14 S.GND
970-1
30-B15 MULTI_SIZE2
201A: 1- 10
N.C. 17-10
14
14
201A: 2- 9
30-B16 5V_R N.C. 17-8
-2
Paper size sensor /BP3 30-B17 S.GND ADF_TXD 17-7
971-1
N.C. 17-5
17.5 Main body 4/4
J10:10 - 2
30-B19 24V2
Feed clutch /BP 926: 2 - 1 J10:11 - 1 N.C. 17-3
30-B20 MULTI_FEED_CL_DRV(MULTI)
N.C. 17-2
N.C. 17-1
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
PS9
23-A3 NEAR_EMPTY_PS(UPPER)
15
15
ADF_SIZE2 18-8
ADF_NEXTPAGE 18-6
DF-613
Tray set sensor /1 -2
23-A5 S.GND N.C. 18-5
958-1
PS8
23-A6 CASETTE_SET(UPPER)
5V1 18-3
ADF_READY 18-2 24V 200: 1 - 1 20: 1 - 1 3
SGND 18-1 P.GND 200: 4 - 4 20: 2 - 2 4
-2
for DCPS
23-A10 5V_R
-2 62-1 U
Paper size sensor /Fr1 23-A11 S.GND
961-1 Scanner motor -2 V
M2
23-A12 WIDTH_PS2(UPPER)
16
16
-3 W
PSB/1
APS timing sensor -2 63-5 S.GND
PS31
-1 63-6 TIMING1
907- 2
24-A6 24V2 97-3 96-1 63-7 24V
Paper lift motor /1 907- 1
M7
24-A7 LIFT_UP_M_DRV(UPPER) 97-1 96-3 -3 H.V.
L1 RLB 63-9 LAMP_EM
17
17
L1
63-10 P.GND
L1 relay board
-3
25-A1 5V_R
-2
Near-emptysensor/2 25-A2 S.GND Exposure lamp
965-1 (J22:CT)
25-A3 NEAR_EMPTY_PS(LOWER)
J22: 1 - 2
930-2 64-1 ADF_CLOSE_SIG
DF open/close switch
-1
SW3
-3
64-2 S.GND
25-A4 5V_R
-2
Tray set sensor /2 25-A5 S.GND
964-1 -4
25-A6 CASETTE_SET(LOWER) 64-3 KC_24V
936B-1 -3
64-4 KC.DRV
936B-2
-3 64-5 /KEY.SIG
26-A1 5V_R 985A-1
-2 64-6 S.GND
26-A2 S.GND
Key counter
18
APS sensor -2 64-8 APS_DATA1
PS32
SDB
-1
-3
26-A4 5V_R
-2
Paper size sensor /Fr2 26-A5 S.GND KC_24V 28-A1
967-1
26-A6 WIDTH_PS2(LOWER) APS_SIG_IN 28-A2 61- A11
APS_5V 28-A3 61- A10
PSB/2
S.GND 28-A11 61- A2
19
19
HPPS_IN 28-A12 61- A1
APS_TIM_IN 28-B1 61- B12
J03: 7 - 5
26-A12 24V2
Paper lift motor /2 908- 1
M8
26-A13 LIFT_UP_M_DRV(LOWER) XENON_ON 28-B3 61- B10
5V2 28-B4 61- B9
5V2 28-B5 61- B8
OPM_DIR 28-B6 61- B7
OPM_MODE_B 28-B7
986-4 OPM_MODE_A 28-B8
22-B1 N.C. 61- B5
-3
3 22-B2 S.GND S_DA_LATCH 28-B9 61- B4
Humidity sensor -2
2 S_DA_CLK 28-B10
22-B3 HUMS_SIG 61- B3
-1
1 J09 4 - 1 65- 2 P.GND 2
HUMS
22-B4 5V /KC_DRV 28-B11 61- B2
KCSIG_IN 28-B12 65- 1 24V2 1
61- B1
for DCPS
921: 1 - 2 J39: 1 - 7
22-B5 24V2
20
20
Registration clutch 921: 2 - 1 J39: 2 - 6
CL1
22-B8 RESIST_CL_DRV
922: 1 - 2 J01: 1 - 5
22-B7 24V2
1901-7
1901-6
1901-5
1901-4
CL2
22-B6 LOOP_CL_DRV
TONYY 38-2
2.5V
2.5V
1901-9 MDI3+
MDI2+
1901-1 MDI0+
1901-10 MDI3-
BK
J54: - 6 /EG_CTS 38-9 2401-12
22-B12 5V_R
Ǿ3
RT3
J54: - 5
22-B13 S.GND EG_RXD 38-10 2401-11
21
21
J54: - 4
S.GND 38-11 2401-10
S.GND 38-12 2401- 9
J54: - 3 5V1 38-13 2401- 8
22-B15 5V_R
22-B16 S.GND
J54: - 1 /EG_RST 38-15 2401- 6
Ǿ3
3
RT3
BK
APS_TIM_IN 38-16 2401- 5
J02: 1 - 2
NMI_SIG 38-17 2401- 4
22-B18 TSL_DRV FIX_OK_IN 38-18 2401- 3
Transfer exposure lamp J02: 2 - 1
TSL
OACB(3/3)
BK
Ǿ3
RT3
4
J63: 1 - 1
19
44
22-A1 S.GND
J63: 2 - 1
18
22
22
46
22-A3 LU_CLOSE_IN
4 47
4 48
22-A5 LU_FEED__M_CLK
4
4 49
22-A6 LU_FEED_M_ON
Ǿ3
RT3
3
BK
51
22-A10 LU_FULL_PS_IN
5
5 54
JOB_TRAY_EMPTY_PS 29-A5
5 57
22-A14 LU_SET_IN
22-A15 LU_TYPE_IN J31: 3 - 6
5
JS-502
5V_R 29-A6
59
22-A16 5V J31: 2 - 7
S.GND 29-A7
EMPTY PS FULL PS
23
23
J31: 1 - 8
JOB TRAY JOB TRAY
22-A18 S.GND
6
J63:19 - 1
6 62
22-A19 S.GND
/F3.DRV 29-A9
(J51:CT)
P.GND 29-A10 Exhaust fan /Fr
FM3
/F9.LCK(DI/H) 29-A14
32
19-A1 LCC_FLM
3
J32:11 - 1 906-4
3 33
24
19-A2 S.GND
24
REVERSE_M_XB 29-B1
REVERSE_M_B 29-B2 Reverse motor
J32: 9 - 3 -2
35
J32: 8 - 4 -1
3 36
19-A6 LCC_RTS
3
3 38
40
19-A9 LCC_CLK
4 41
19-A10 N.C.
4 42
REVERSE_UNIT_SET 29-B10
21
19-B1 FS_TXD
S.GND 29-B11
2 22
19-B2 S.GND
25
25
2
2 23
19-B3 N.C
-3
25
-2
2 26
For Finisher
28
19-B8 S.GND
30
19-B10 S.GND
3
J48:3 - 1 -3
3 31
TNRB.PS(DI/H) 69-3
26
26
11-1 DH_REM
11-3 24V
for DH
11-2 NC
Z
T
Y
X
V
S
P
U
R
N
Q
O
W
17. OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM
bizhub 501/421/361
17. OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
bizhub 501/421/361
PS9
CN15
PS8
PS9 ON
PS10
PS10 ON
CN16
Cover open/close sensor PS7 ON
PS7 CN14
MOSDB
SD2
SD2
PS2 ON
DFCB
PS6 ON
solenoid
PS6
PS1
sensor/1
Original size
PS3
sensor/3
Original conveyance motor
M2
PS1 ON
Original size
PS3 ON PS1 ON PS1 ON
PS4
PS4 ON PS4 ON
PS4 ON PS2 ON PS2 ON
CN17
Original size
TB
PS2 ON VR ON VR ON
PS2
VR ON
Original size VR
CN19
SMALL
LARGE
20 20-L
MEDIUM
DESTINATION
HIGH OR LOW
HIGH OR LOW
DC5V
DC24V
INPUT OF ACTIVE
DESCRIPTION
OUTPUT OF ACTIVE
#187 WITH HOUSING
#250 WITH HOUSING
bizhub 501/421/361
17. OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
bizhub 501/421/361
D
C
H
G
17.7.1
17.7 PC
PC-206
1
1
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
2
2
3
3
M125
Paper feed sensor /3
PS116
Near-emptysensor/4
PS122
Vertical conveyance sensor /3
PS117
PSDB4
4
4
PSDB4
Paper size detect board /4 Right door open/close sensor
PS111
PS121
Vertical conveyance motor /3
M120
5
5
PCCB
6
6
PSDB3
Paper size detect board /3
7
7
8
8
SMALL
LARGE
20 20-L
MEDIUM
DESTINATION
HIGH OR LOW
HIGH OR LOW
DC5V
DC24V
INPUT OF ACTIVE
DESCRIPTION
OUTPUT OF ACTIVE
9
9
I
F
E
B
A
H
D
C
G
17. OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM
bizhub 501/421/361
17. OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
bizhub 501/421/361
D
C
H
G
17.7.2
PC-407
1
1
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
2
2
RLB
SW1
3
3
PS13
Shift home sensor
PS12
Shift position sensor
PS11
MEB
MEB
4
4
RLB
Paper lift motor encoder sensor
PS10
5
5
Shift motor
M4
PCCB
6
6
7
7
8
8
SMALL
LARGE
20 20-L
MEDIUM
DESTINATION
HIGH OR LOW
HIGH OR LOW
DC5V
DC24V
INPUT OF ACTIVE
DESCRIPTION
OUTPUT OF ACTIVE
9
9
I
F
E
B
A
H
D
C
G
17. OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM
bizhub 501/421/361
17. OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
bizhub 501/421/361
17.8 LU
bizhub 501/421/361
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
A A
Dehumidifier heater
OPTIONAL
HTR101
114-3 24V
J121-1 J121-2
114-2 P_GND
B NC (2pin) B
MS
151
FT102 (4pin)
114-4 24V Upper door interlock switch
FT101 (1pin)
114-1 T5M_24V
121- 1
112-1 T5M_24V
112-2 T5M_ON
121- 2 M151 Paper lift motor
J62- 1 24V 111- 1 24V 112-3 P_GND
C J62- 2 PGND
J62- 3 24V
111- 2 PGND
C
J62- 4 RL_POWER 112-4 24V 120-11
112-5 24V -10
112-6 P_GND -9
112-7 P_GND -8
112-8 LUM_HL -7
(LD)
112-9 LUM_FR
-6
-5
M150 Feed motor
112-10 LUM_CLK -4
D J63-19 SGND 110- 1 SGND
112-11 LUM_ON
112-12 SGND
-3
-2
D
J63-18 SGND 110- 2 SGND
112-13 5V -1
J63-17 5V2 110- 3 5V2
J63-16 5V2 110- 4 5V2
J63-15 LU_TYPE 110- 5 LU_TYPE
J63-14 T5_SET_PS 110- 6 T5_SET_PS
J63-13 T5_SET2 110- 7 T5_SET2
J82: 5- 1 J84: 2 - 1
J63-12 T5_SET1 110- 8 T5_SET1 113- A1 24V
J82: 4- 2 J84: 1 - 2 SD151 Pick-up solenoid
J63-11 T5_ZERO_PS 110- 9 T5_ZERO_PS 113- A2 T5SD_DRV
E J63-10 T5_FULL_PS
J63- 9 LU_JAM_PS
110-10 T5_FULL_PS
110-11 LU_JAM_PS J82: 3- 3 127- 3
E
110-12 LU_CL_ON 113- A3 S_GND
J63- 8 LU_CL_ON J82: 2- 4 -2
113- A4 LCT_JAM PS155 LU exit sensor
J63- 7 T5_SD_ON 110-13 T5_SD_ON J82: 1- 5 -1
113- A5 5V
J63- 6 LUM_ON 110-14 LUM_ON
J63- 5 LUM_CLK 110-15 LUM_CLK
J83: 6- 1 125- 3
J63- 4 LUM_HL 110-16 LUM_HL 113- A6 S_GND
J83: 5- 2 -2 Upper limit sensor
J63- 3 T5_CLOSE 110-17 T5_CLOSE 113- A7 T5_FULL PS152
J83: 4- 3 -1
J63- 2 T5_UPM_ON 110-18 T5_UPM_ON 113- A8 5V
126- 3
113- B1 S_GND
-2
113- B2 T5_SET1 PS154 Remaining paper sensor/1
-1
113- B3 5V
G 113- B4 S_GND
122- 3
G
-2
113- B5 T5_SET2 PS151 Remaining paper sensor/2
-1
113- B6 5V
129- 3
113- B7 S_GND
-2
113- B8 LU_SET PS156 LU set sensor
-1
Main body 113- B9 5V
H J85: 2 - 1
H
Symbol
113-B10 LUCL_DRV
J85: 1 - 2 CL151 Feed clutch
113-B11 24V
LUDB
Connector Faston
I Crimp Relay connector I
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
17. OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
bizhub 501/421/361
17.9 FS
bizhub 501/421/361
17.9.1 FS-522/PU-501
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
SW4 Guide plate switch
SD-507/MT-502
A (Option) PS5
Conveyance sensor A
Exit roller home sensor
PS12
GND
GND
GND
Chopper Unit Setting Detection
GND
PJ8
M1 Exit motor
E PU-501(Option) E
M7 Stapler movement motor
20 20-L
Punch motor M1 M4 Alignment motor/Rr
DESTINATION LOCATION
G M11 Tray lift motor
CLOSED END CONNECTORS G
LARGE
SW3 Tray overrun switch
MEDIUM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
17. OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
bizhub 501/421/361
bizhub 501/421/361
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
SW4 Hole punch position switch
W W
Intermediate conveyance W W
M12 Stapler moving motor M6 Hole punch Only for inch
roller release motor B
B M14 destination
A selector motor
A
CL1 Punch clutch
Paper exit motor M3
Conveyance motor/Lw M2
M9 Paddle motor/Lw
Conveyance motor/Up M4
Punch encoder sensor
PS15
PS1
Door sensor (RU-507)
Sift motor M8
M13 Paper exit roller release motor
SW3
Main tray lower limit switch
SW1
Interlock switch PWB-E_GL
LED19 Main tray upper limit LED
F CN200C
PS18 Upper door sensor
F
RU-507 Front door sensor
PS17
CN201B
PWD-F_GL
DESTINATION LOCATION
PWD-F
Bypass route
PS2
conveyance sensor LARGE
CLOSED END CONNECTORS
MEDIUM
PS7 Main tray full sensor CLOSED END CONNECTORS
Sift encoder sensor Intermediate conveyance sensor
PS11 PS3
POSITIVE LOCK RECEPTACLE
PS4
Main route conveyance sensor
Main tray reset sensor PS8
INPUT OF ACTIVE LOW
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
17. OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
bizhub 501/421/361
17.10 SD
bizhub 501/421/361
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Exit sensor
FS-522
B B
PS21 PS18 PS20 PS23 PS26 PS25
C C
D PS22 M10 D
Folding motor
E SDCB E
F F
DESCRIPTION
20 20-L
DESTINATION LOCATION
SMALL
M14 M9 M13 M8
SW4 #250 WITH HOUSING
POSITIVE LOCK RECEPTACLE
Conveyance motor
Staple guide motor
OUTPUT OF ACTIVE
HIGH OR LOW
INPUT OF ACTIVE
I HIGH OR LOW
DC24V
I
DC5V
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
17. OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
bizhub 501/421/361
D
C
H
G
17.11 MT
1
1
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
2
2
3
3
Gate solenoid /3
SD3
Conveyance motor
M1
4
4
GY GY
GY GY
GY GY
GY GY
GY GY
Gate solenoid /2 GY GY Paper full sensor /2
GY
PS6
GY
SD2
GY GY
GY GY
GY GY
GY GY
5
5
GY GY
GY GY
GY
MTCB
GY
GY
GY
GY
Conveyance sensor /Lw
PS10
GY
GY
GY
GY Paper full sensor/1
PS5
GY
Gate solenoid /1 GY
GY
SD1
GY GY
6
6
GY GY
GY GY Paper full sensor/3
PS7
GY GY
GY GY
GY GY
GY
GY
GY
GY Paper detection sensor/4
GY
PS4
GY
FS-522
7
7
8
8
SMALL
LARGE
20 20-L
MEDIUM
DESTINATION
HIGH OR LOW
HIGH OR LOW
DC5V
DC24V
INPUT OF ACTIVE
DESCRIPTION
OUTPUT OF ACTIVE
9
9
I
F
E
B
A
H
D
C
G
17. OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM
bizhub 501/421/361
17. OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
bizhub 501/421/361
DF-613
2008.05
Ver. 1.0
Revision history
After publication of this service manual, the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for
improvement of their performance.
Therefore, the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine.
When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual, a revised version will be
issued with a revision mark added as required.
Revision mark:
• To indicate clearly a section revised, 1 is shown at the left margin of the revised section.
The number inside 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made.
• To indicate clearly a page that contains the revision, 1 is shown near the page number of the
corresponding page.
The number inside 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made.
NOTE
Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 3.0 only are shown with those for Ver. 2.0 deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has not been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 2.0 are left as they are.
CONTENTS
DF-613
DF-613
OUTLINE
1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS ................................................................................1
MAINTENANCE
2. PERIODIC CHECK..................................................................................................5
2.1 Maintenance procedure ........................................................................................5
2.1.1 Replacing the Pick-up Roller and Feed Roller...............................................5
2.1.2 Replacing the Separation Roller....................................................................6
2.1.3 Cleaning of the Pick-up Roller, Feed Roller and Separation Roller...............7
2.1.4 Cleaning of Miscellaneous Rollers ................................................................8
2.1.5 Cleaning of the Scanning Guide..................................................................11
2.1.6 Cleaning of the Reflective Sensor Section ..................................................12
3. OTHER ..................................................................................................................13
3.1 Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items ..........................................................13
3.2 Disassembling and assembling list .....................................................................14
3.3 Disassembling and assembling procedure .........................................................14
3.3.1 Cover /Fr, Cover /Rr and Original Feed Tray Cover /Lw ..............................14
3.3.2 DF Control Board (DFCB) ...........................................................................15
3.3.3 Original Size VR (VR1)................................................................................15
3.3.4 Complete Stamp Unit 2 ...............................................................................17
3.3.5 Replacing the Replace Stamp 2..................................................................18
3.3.6 DF................................................................................................................19
ADJUSTMENT/SETTING
4. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT..............................................................................21
4.1 Leading Edge Skew Adjustment .........................................................................21
4.2 Height adjustment ...............................................................................................23
i
CONTENTS Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
DF-613
Blank Page
ii
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
OUTLINE
1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
DF-613
A. Type
B. Functions
C. Paper type
1-Sided Mode
Standard Mode 35 to 128 g/m2 (9.25 to 34 lbs)
Plain Paper 2-Sided Mode
50 to 128 g/m2 (13.25 to 34 lbs)
Mixed Original Detection
1-Sided / 2-Sided Mode
Type of Document Mode
50 to 128 g/m2 (13.25 to 34 lbs)
Plain Paper
1-Sided Mode
FAX Mode 35 to 128 g/m2 (9.25 to 34 lbs)
Plain Paper 2-Sided Mode
50 to 128 g/m2 (13.25 to 34 lbs)
Inch area
A3, A4S, A4, B4, B5S, B5
Detectable Document 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11S, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 51/2S, 81/2 x 51/2
Size*1 Metric area
A3, A4S, A4, A5S, A5, B4, B5S, B5, B6S
11 x 17, 81/2 x 11S, 81/2 x 11
Capacity 80 sheets (80 g/m2 and load height of 11 mm or less)
*1: For the Combined Original Detection Mode, Refer to the Mixed Original Detection Enabled
Size Combination Table.
1
1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
2
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
DF-613
Reference original (original with a maximum width)
A3 A4 B4S B5 A4S A5 B5S A5
Other A3 U { — — — — — —
originals A4 { U — — — — — —
B4S ~ ~ U { — — — —
B5 ~ ~ { U — — — —
A4S ~ ~ ~ ~ U { — —
A5 ~ ~ ~ ~ { U — —
B5S X X ~ ~ ~ ~ U —
A5S X X X X X X X U
U: Same size {: Same group ~: Different group X: Mix prohibited —: No need to set
For Inch
G. Maintenance
H. Machine data
I. Operating environment
Temperature 10 to 30°C
Humidity 10 to 80% RH (with no condensation)
NOTE
• These specifications are subject to change without notice.
3
1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
DF-613
Blank Page
4
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 2. PERIODIC CHECK
MAINTENANCE
2. PERIODIC CHECK
DF-613
2.1 Maintenance procedure
NOTE
• The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure of Maintenance represents the iso-
propyl alcohol.
[1]
16eaf2c001na
[3]
[2]
16eaf2c002na
[4]
16eaf2c003na
5
2. PERIODIC CHECK Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
[7]
7. Remove the belt [9].
[13] [9] 8. Remove the Pick-up Roller Shaft [11]
from the Arm /Rr [10].
[12]
[11] 9. Remove the 2 Spacers [12] from the
Pick-up Roller Shaft.
[6]
10. Remove two Pick-up Rollers [13].
[7] NOTE
• Be sure to take note of the direction of
[8]
the pick-up roller when installing it.
[10]
16eaf2c004na
B. Procedure
1. Open the Open/Close Cover [1].
[1]
16eaf2c006na
[3]
[2] 16eaf2c007na
6
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 2. PERIODIC CHECK
DF-613
• Use care not to lose the spring at the
bottom side of the Separation Roller
Assy.
16eaf2c008na
[5] [6]
16eaf2c009na
16eaf2c010na
2.1.3 Cleaning of the Pick-up Roller, Feed Roller and Separation Roller
A. Periodic cleaning parts/cycle
• Pick-up Roller : Every 250,000 prints (Actual replacement cycle: Every 50,000 faces)*1
: Every 225,000 prints (Actual replacement cycle: Every 50,000 faces)*2
• Feed Roller : Every 250,000 prints (Actual replacement cycle: Every 50,000 faces)*1
: Every 225,000 prints (Actual replacement cycle: Every 50,000 faces)*2
• Separation Roller : Every 250,000 prints (Actual replacement cycle: Every 50,000 faces)*1
: Every 225,000 prints (Actual replacement cycle: Every 50,000 faces)*2
*1 501/421
*2 361
B. Procedure
1. Open the Open/Close Cover [1].
[1]
16eaf2c011na
7
2. PERIODIC CHECK Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
[3]
[4]
[2] 16eaf2c012na
B. Procedure
1. Open the Open/Close Cover [1].
[2] 2. Using a soft cloth dampened with alco-
hol, wipe the roller [2].
16eaf2c013na
[2]
[1]
16eaf2c017na
[4]
16eaf2c014na
8
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 2. PERIODIC CHECK
[4] [3]
DF-613
16eaf2c018na
16eaf2c015nb
[6]
[6]
16eaf2c016nb
9
2. PERIODIC CHECK Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
[5]
[5] 16eaf2c019na
[6]
16eaf2c020na
[7]
16eaf2c021nb
10
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 2. PERIODIC CHECK
DF-613
[9]
16eaf2c022na
16eaf2c023na
16eaf2c024na
11
2. PERIODIC CHECK Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
• Reflective Sensor : Every 250,000 prints (Actual replacement cycle: Every 50,000 faces)*1
: Every 225,000 prints (Actual replacement cycle: Every 50,000 faces)*2
*1 501/421
*2 361
B. Procedure
1. Clean the Original Size Sensor /2 (PS2)
[1] [1] using a brush or other similar tools.
16eaf2c025na
12
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. OTHER
3. OTHER
3.1 Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items
DF-613
A. Screws to which blue paint or green paint is applied
• Blue paint or green paint is applied to some screws to prevent them from coming
loose.
• As a general rule, screws to which blue paint or green paint is applied should not be
removed or loosened.
B. Red-painted screws
• Do not remove or loosen any of the red-painted screws in the field. It should also be
noted that, when two or more screws are used for a single part, only one representa-
tive screw may be marked with the red paint.
NOTE
• Do not turn the variable resistors on boards for which no adjusting instructions are
given in ADJUSTMENT/SETTING.
D. Removal of Boards
Caution
• When removing a circuit board or other electrical component, refer to “SAFETY AND
IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS” and follow the corresponding removal procedures.
• The removal procedures given in the following omit the removal of connectors and
screws securing the circuit board support or circuit board.
• When it is absolutely necessary to touch the ICs and other electrical components on
the board, be sure to ground your body.
13
3. OTHER Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
[3]
[9]
[4]
[5] [7]
[2]
[6]
[8]
[1]
16eaf2c026na
1. Remove two screws [1], and remove the Cover /Fr [2].
2. Remove the 2 Screws [3] and raise the Original Feed Tray. Open DF to release the Lock
Claws (at 2 places) and then remove the Cover /Rr [4].
3. Remove the screw [5] and the washer [6], and remove the stopper [7].
4. Lift up the Original Feed Tray.
5. Remove four screws [8], and remove the Original Feed Tray Cover /Lw [9].
6. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.
14
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. OTHER
[1]
1. Turn OFF the Main Power Switch
DF-613
(SW1).
2. Remove the Cover /Rr.
(See P.14)
[1] 3. Disconnect all the connectors on the DF
Control Board (DFCB).
4. Remove three screws [1], and then
[2] remove the DFCB [2].
16eaf2c027na 5. Reinstall the above parts following the
removal steps in reverse.
NOTE
• When DFCB is replaced, be sure to conduct the back-up data initialization, the origi-
nal width detection adjustment and the rewrite of the firmware.
A. Removal Procedure
[1] 1. Turn OFF the Main Power Switch
[2]
(SW1).
2. Remove the Original Feed Tray Cover
[3] /Lw.
[2]
(See P.14)
3. Disconnect the connector [1].
4. Remove two screws [2] and the mount-
16eaf2c028na ing plate [3].
16eaf2c029na
[7] 16eaf2c030na
15
3. OTHER Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
B. Reinstallation Procedure
[1]
1. Close the Side Edge Stop [1] of the Origi-
nal Feed Tray.
DF-613
NOTE
• Be sure to perform document width
detection adjustment after replacing the
Original Size VR (VR1).
(See P.230 "10.8 ADF" in Field Service
bizhub 501/421/361 main body.)
16eaf2c031nb
[4]
16eaf2c032na
16eaf2c033na
16eaf2c034na
[8]
[9] 16eaf2c035na
7. Install the Original Feed Tray Cover /Lw and turn ON the Main Power Switch (SW1).
NOTE
• When VR1 is replaced, be sure to conduct the back-up data initialization and the original
width detection adjustment.
16
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. OTHER
DF-613
2. Open the Processing Guide [2].
[2]
[1]
16eaf2c036na
[4]
16eaf2c037na
[6]
[7]
16eaf2c038na
17
3. OTHER Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
[1]
16eaf2c039na
16eaf2c040na
18
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. OTHER
3.3.6 DF
DF-613
a0ref2c001ca
a0ref2c002ca
[4]
a0ref2c003ca
19
3. OTHER Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
DF-613
Blank Page
20
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 4. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
ADJUSTMENT/SETTING
4. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
DF-613
4.1 Leading Edge Skew Adjustment
1. Load the test chart [1] in the DF and
[1] make one 1-sided copy five consecutive
times.
16eaf3c001nb
16eaf3c002na
[2] [3]
16eaf3c003na
16eaf3c004na
21
4. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
16eaf3c005na
16eaf3c006nb
22
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 4. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
DF-613
1. Loosen the far left side nut [1] in the
arrow-marked direction[2].
[1]
[1]
[2]
a0ref3c001ca
a0ref3c002ca
23
4. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
a0ref3c003ca
24
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 4. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
DF-613
NOTE
• Check that there are no gaps between
the projection of DF and the original
[8]
glass face.
• When there are gaps, loosen the far
right side nut and then rotate adjust-
ment screw clockwise to adjust.
• After the adjustment , fasten the far
right side nut securely.
[7]
a0ref3c004ca
25
4. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
DF-613
Blank Page
26
SERVICE MANUAL Field Service
PC-206
( 501/421/361 (
2008.05
Ver. 1.0
Revision history
After publication of this service manual, the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for
improvement of their performance.
Therefore, the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine.
When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual, a revised version will be
issued with a revision mark added as required.
Revision mark:
• To indicate clearly a section revised, 1 is shown at the left margin of the revised section.
The number inside 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made.
• To indicate clearly a page that contains the revision, 1 is shown near the page number of the
corresponding page.
The number inside 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made.
NOTE
Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 3.0 only are shown with those for Ver. 2.0 deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has not been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 2.0 are left as they are.
CONTENTS
PC-206
PC-206
OUTLINE
1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS ................................................................................1
MAINTENANCE
2. PERIODIC CHECK..................................................................................................3
2.1 Maintenance procedure ........................................................................................3
2.1.1 Replacing the Separation Roller Assy...........................................................3
2.1.2 Replacing the Feed Roller.............................................................................4
2.1.3 Replacing the Pick-up Roller .........................................................................7
3. OTHER ....................................................................................................................9
3.1 Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items ............................................................9
3.2 Disassembling, assembling and cleaning list......................................................10
3.2.1 Disassembling and assembling list .............................................................10
3.2.2 Cleaning list.................................................................................................10
3.3 Disassembling and assembling procedure .........................................................11
3.3.1 Right Door/Rear Right Cover/Lower Right Cover/Front Right Cover...........11
3.3.2 Rear Cover ..................................................................................................11
3.4 Cleaning procedure.............................................................................................12
3.4.1 Separation Roller.........................................................................................12
3.4.2 Feed Roller..................................................................................................13
3.4.3 Pick-up Roller ..............................................................................................13
3.4.4 Vertical Conveyance Roller .........................................................................14
ADJUSTMENT/SETTING
4. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT..............................................................................15
4.1 Mis-centering adjustment of the Trays 3 and 4 ...................................................15
i
CONTENTS Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
PC-206
Blank Page
ii
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
OUTLINE
1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
PC-206
A. Type
B. Paper type
C. Maintenance
D. Machine specifications
E. Operating environment
NOTE
• The information herein may be subject to change for improvement without notice.
1
1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
PC-206
Blank Page
2
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 2. PERIODIC CHECK
MAINTENANCE
2. PERIODIC CHECK
PC-206
2.1 Maintenance procedure
2.1.1 Replacing the Separation Roller Assy
A. Periodically replaced part/cycle
• Separation Roller Assy : Every 750,000 prints (Actual replacement cycle: Every 300,000 prints) *1
: Every 675,000 prints (Actual replacement cycle: Every 300,000 prints) *2
*1 501/421
*2 361
NOTE
• Replace the Separation Roller Assy, Feed Roller and Pick-up Roller at the same time.
B. Procedure
1. Remove the Right Door.
[2] (See P.11)
2. Remove two screws [1] and remove the
Jam Access Cover [2].
[1] 4061f2c001na
[3]
4061f2c002na
[5]
4061f2c003na
3
2. PERIODIC CHECK Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
[8]
4061f2c004na
4061f2c005na
*1 501/421
*2 361
NOTE
• Replace the Separation Roller Assy, Feed Roller and Pick-up Roller at the same time.
B. Procedure
1. Remove the Rear Right Cover. (Remove
[2] [1] the Right Lower Cover for Tray 4.)
(See P.11)
2. Remove the Tray.
3. Remove the Separation Roller Mounting
Plate Assy.
(See P.3)
4. Disconnect the connector [1] (Tray 3),
two connectors [2] (Tray 4) and remove
the harness from two wire saddles.
NOTE
• Be careful not to confuse the connec-
4061f2c006na tor of the Tray 3 with the connectors of
the Tray 4.
4
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 2. PERIODIC CHECK
PC-206
[3]
[3] 4061f2c007na
[6]
4061f2c008na
[7]
4061f2c009na
4061f2c010na
5
2. PERIODIC CHECK Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
[13]
[12]
4061f2c011na
[15]
[14]
4061f2c012na
[19]
4061f2c013nb
[22]
4061f2c014nb
6
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 2. PERIODIC CHECK
PC-206
• Pick-up Roller : Every 750,000 prints (Actual replacement cycle: Every 300,000 prints) *1
: Every 675,000 prints (Actual replacement cycle: Every 300,000 prints) *2
*1 501/421
*2 361
NOTE
• Replace the Separation Roller Assy, Feed Roller and Pick-up Roller at the same time.
B. Procedure
1. Remove the Rear Right Cover. (Remove
[1] the Right Lower Cover for Tray 4.)
(See P.11)
2. Remove the Tray.
3. Remove the Separation Roller Mounting
Plate Assy.
(See P.3)
4. Disconnect the connector [1] and
remove the harness from two wire sad-
dles.
4061f2c015na
[2]
[2] 4061f2c016na
[5]
4061f2c017na
7
2. PERIODIC CHECK Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
[6]
4061f2c018na
[9]
[9]
[10] 4061f2c019na
4061f2c020na
8
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. OTHER
3. OTHER
3.1 Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items
PC-206
A. Screws to which blue paint or green paint is applied
• Blue paint or green paint is applied to some screws to prevent them from coming
loose.
• As a general rule, screws to which blue paint or green paint is applied should not be
removed or loosened.
B. Red-painted screws
• Do not remove or loosen any of the red-painted screws in the field. It should also be
noted that, when two or more screws are used for a single part, only one representa-
tive screw may be marked with the red paint.
NOTE
• Do not turn the variable resistors on boards for which no adjusting instructions are
given in ADJUSTMENT/SETTING.
D. Removal of Boards
CAUTION
• When removing a circuit board or other electrical component, refer to “SAFETY AND
IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS” and follow the corresponding removal procedures.
• The removal procedures given in the following omit the removal of connectors and
screws securing the circuit board support or circuit board.
• When it is absolutely necessary to touch the ICs and other electrical components on
the board, be sure to ground your body.
9
3. OTHER Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
10
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. OTHER
PC-206
[1] 1. Open the Right Door [1].
[3] 2. Remove the Right Door [1].
[2]
3. Remove two screws [2] and remove the
Rear Right Cover [3].
4. Remove two screws [4] and remove the
Lower Right Cover [5].
5. Remove two screws [6] and remove the
Front Right Cover [7].
6. Reinstall the above parts following the
[4] removal steps in reverse.
[5]
[7] [6] 4061f2c021na
[2]
[1] 4061f2c022na
11
3. OTHER Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
• The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure represents the isopropyl alcohol.
*1 501/421
*2 361
B. Procedure
1. Remove the Right Door.
[2] (See P.11)
2. Remove two screws [1] and remove the
Jam Access Cover [2].
[1] 4061f2c023na
[3]
4061f2c024na
4061f2c025na
12
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. OTHER
PC-206
• Feed Roller : Every 250,000 prints *1
: Every 225,000 prints *2
*1 501/421
*2 361
B. Procedure
1. Remove the Tray 3.
[1] 2. Remove the Separation Roller Mounting
Plate Assy.
(See P.12)
3. Using a soft cloth dampened with alco-
hol, wipe the Feed Roller [1] clean of
dirt.
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 similarly for the Tray
4.
5. Reinstall the above parts following the
4061f2c026na removal steps in reverse.
B. Procedure
1. Remove the Tray 3.
[1] 2. Remove the Separation Roller Mounting
Plate Assy.
(See P.12)
3. Using a soft cloth dampened with alco-
hol, wipe the Pick-up Roller [1].
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 similarly for the Tray
4.
5. Reinstall the above parts following the
removal steps in reverse.
4061f2c027na
13
3. OTHER Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
*1 501/421
*2 361
B. Procedure
1. Open the Right Door.
2. Using a soft cloth dampened with alco-
hol, wipe the Vertical Conveyance Roller
[1].
[1]
4061f2c028na
14
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 4. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
ADJUSTMENT/SETTING
4. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
PC-206
4.1 Mis-centering adjustment of the Trays 3 and 4
Conduct this adjustment when a mis-centering occurs that cannot be adjusted in the service
mode.
A. Procedure
1. Pull out the Tray [1].
2. If there remains any paper, remove it
thoroughly.
3. Loosen the 2 screws [2].
4. Move the Paper Guide [3] and adjust the
center position with the marking-off [4]
as a guide.
5. Tighten the 2 screws [2].
[1] 4061f3c001na
15
4. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
PC-206
Blank Page
16
SERVICE MANUAL Field Service
PC-407
( 501/421/361 (
2008.05
Ver. 1.0
Revision history
After publication of this service manual, the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for
improvement of their performance.
Therefore, the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine.
When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual, a revised version will be
issued with a revision mark added as required.
Revision mark:
• To indicate clearly a section revised, 1 is shown at the left margin of the revised section.
The number inside 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made.
• To indicate clearly a page that contains the revision, 1 is shown near the page number of the
corresponding page.
The number inside 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made.
NOTE
Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 3.0 only are shown with those for Ver. 2.0 deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has not been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 2.0 are left as they are.
CONTENTS
PC-407
PC-407
OUTLINE
1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATION...................................................................................1
MAINTENANCE
2. PERIODIC CHECK..................................................................................................3
2.1 Maintenance procedure ........................................................................................3
2.1.1 Replacing the Separation Roller Assy...........................................................3
2.1.2 Replacing the Feed Roller.............................................................................4
2.1.3 Replacing the Pick-up Roller .........................................................................7
3. OTHER ....................................................................................................................9
3.1 Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items ............................................................9
3.2 Disassembling, assembling and cleaning list......................................................10
3.2.1 Disassembling and assembling list .............................................................10
3.2.2 Cleaning list.................................................................................................10
3.3 Disassembling and assembling procedure .........................................................11
3.3.1 Right Door/Rear Right Cover/Lower Right Cover/Front Right Cover...........11
3.3.2 Rear Cover ..................................................................................................11
3.3.3 Tray..............................................................................................................12
3.3.4 Wire .............................................................................................................13
3.4 Cleaning procedure.............................................................................................16
3.4.1 Separation Roller.........................................................................................16
3.4.2 Feed Roller..................................................................................................16
3.4.3 Pick-up Roller ..............................................................................................17
3.4.4 Vertical Conveyance Roller .........................................................................17
ADJUSTMENT/SETTING
4. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT..............................................................................19
4.1 Mis-centering adjustment....................................................................................19
4.2 Shifter Movement Timing Belt Adjustment ..........................................................21
i
CONTENTS Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
PC-407
Blank Page
ii
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATION
OUTLINE
1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATION
PC-407
A. Type
B. Paper type
C. Maintenance
D. Machine specifications
E. Operating environment
NOTE
• The information herein may be subject to change for improvement without notice.
1
1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATION Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
PC-407
Blank Page
2
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 2. PERIODIC CHECK
MAINTENANCE
2. PERIODIC CHECK
PC-407
2.1 Maintenance procedure
2.1.1 Replacing the Separation Roller Assy
A. Periodically replaced part/cycle
• Separation Roller Assy : Every 750,000 prints (Actual replacement cycle: Every 300,000 prints) *1
: Every 675,000 prints (Actual replacement cycle: Every 300,000 prints) *2
*1 501/421
*2 361
NOTE
• Replace the Separation Roller Assy, Feed Roller and Pick-up Roller at the same time.
B. Procedure
1. Remove the Right Door.
[2]
(See P.11)
2. Remove two screws [1] and remove the
Separation Roller Mounting Plate Assy
[2].
[1]
4061f2c201na
[3]
4061f2c202na
[6]
4061f2c203na
3
2. PERIODIC CHECK Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
4061f2c204na
*1 501/421
*2 361
NOTE
• Replace the Separation Roller Assy, Feed Roller and Pick-up Roller at the same time.
B. Procedure
1. Remove the Rear Cover and the Rear
[1]
Right Cover.
(See P.11)
2. Remove the Tray.
3. Remove the Separation Roller Mounting
Plate Assy.
(See P.3)
4. Disconnect the connector [1] from the
PC Control Board (PCCB).
4061f2c205na
[2]
[2]
4061f2c206na
4
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 2. PERIODIC CHECK
PC-407
[4]
[5]
4061f2c207na
[6]
4061f2c208na
[8]
[9]
4061f2c209na
5
2. PERIODIC CHECK Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
[12]
[11]
4061f2c210na
[15]
4061f2c211nb
[18]
4061f2c212nb
6
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 2. PERIODIC CHECK
PC-407
• Pick-up Roller : Every 750,000 prints (Actual replacement cycle: Every 300,000 prints) *1
: Every 675,000 prints (Actual replacement cycle: Every 300,000 prints) *2
*1 501/421
*2 361
NOTE
• Replace the Separation Roller Assy, Feed Roller and Pick-up Roller at the same time.
B. Procedure
1. Remove the Rear Cover and the Rear
[1]
Right Cover.
(See P.11)
2. Remove the Tray.
3. Remove the Separation Roller Mounting
Plate Assy.
(See P.3)
4. Disconnect the connector [1] from the
PC Control Board (PCCB).
4061f2c213na
[2]
[2]
4061f2c214na
[5]
4061f2c215na
7
2. PERIODIC CHECK Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
[7]
[6]
4061f2c216na
[9]
[9]
[10]
4061f2c217na
[12]
4061f2c218na
8
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. OTHER
3. OTHER
3.1 Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items
PC-407
A. Screws to which blue paint or green paint is applied
• Blue paint or green paint is applied to some screws to prevent them from coming
loose.
• As a general rule, screws to which blue paint or green paint is applied should not be
removed or loosened.
B. Red-painted screws
• Do not remove or loosen any of the red-painted screws in the field. It should also be
noted that, when two or more screws are used for a single part, only one representa-
tive screw may be marked with the red paint.
NOTE
• Do not turn the variable resistors on boards for which no adjusting instructions are
given in ADJUSTMENT/SETTING.
D. Removal of Boards
CAUTION
• When removing a circuit board or other electrical component, refer to “SAFETY AND
IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS” and follow the corresponding removal procedures.
• The removal procedures given in the following omit the removal of connectors and
screws securing the circuit board support or circuit board.
• When it is absolutely necessary to touch the ICs and other electrical components on
the board, be sure to ground your body.
9
3. OTHER Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
10
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. OTHER
PC-407
1. Open the Right Door [1].
[1]
[3] 2. Remove the Right Door [1].
[2]
3. Remove two screws [2] and remove the
Rear Right Cover [3].
4. Remove two screws [4] and remove the
Lower Right Cover [5].
5. Remove two screws [6] and remove the
Front Right Cover [7].
6. Reinstall the above parts following the
[4] removal steps in reverse.
[5]
[7] [6] 4061f2c219na
[2]
[1] 4061f2c220na
11
3. OTHER Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
3.3.3 Tray
[2]
[6]
4061f2c222na
CAUTION
• To prevent injuries, press the guide rail
[7] inside the machine.
6. Reinstall the above parts following the
removal steps in reverse.
[7]
4061f2c223na
12
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. OTHER
3.3.4 Wire
PC-407
(See P.12)
2. Remove four screws [1] and remove the
Front Cover Assy [2].
3. Unplug the connector [3].
[1]
[2]
4061f2c224na
[4]
4. Remove two screws [4] and the Inner
Cover Assy [5].
NOTE
• Do not peel off pulley protective mylar
sheet.
[5]
[4]
4061f2c225na
[6]
4061f2c226na
[8]
4061f2c227na
13
3. OTHER Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
NOTE
• When assembling, be sure to engage
rib of gear 1 [10] with concave section
PC-407
of gear 2 [11].
[10]
[11]
4061f2c228na
[12]
[12]
4061f2c229na
[15]
[16]
[14]
[15]
[14]
4061f2c230na
[18]
[18]
[17]
4061f2c231na
14
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. OTHER
PC-407
[20]
[20]
4061f2c232na
[22]
4061f2c233na
[25]
[26]
[24]
4061f2c234na
4061f2c235na
15
3. OTHER Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
• The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure represents the isopropyl alcohol.
*1 501/421
*2 361
B. Procedure
1. Remove the Right Door.
[2] (See P.11)
2. Remove two screws [1] and remove the
Paper Separation Roller Mounting Plate
Assy [2].
[1]
4061f2c236na
4061f2c237na
16
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. OTHER
PC-407
• Feed Roller : Every 250,000 prints *1
: Every 225,000 prints *2
*1 501/421
*2 361
B. Procedure
1. Remove the Tray.
[1] 2. Remove the Separation Roller Mounting
Plate Assy.
(See P.16)
3. Using a soft cloth dampened with alco-
hol, wipe the Feed Roller [1].
4. Reinstall the above parts following the
removal steps in reverse.
4061f2c238na
*1 501/421
*2 361
B. Procedure
1. Remove the Tray.
[1] 2. Remove the Separation Roller Mounting
Plate Assy.
(See P.16)
3. Using a soft cloth dampened with alco-
hol, wipe the Pick-up Roller [1].
4. Reinstall the above parts following the
removal steps in reverse.
4061f2c239na
17
3. OTHER Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
*1 501/421
*2 361
B. Procedure
1. Open the Right Door.
[1] 2. Using a soft cloth dampened with alco-
hol, wipe the Vertical Conveyance Roller
[1].
4061f2c240na
18
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 4. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
ADJUSTMENT/SETTING
4. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
PC-407
4.1 Mis-centering adjustment
Conduct this adjustment when a mis-centering occurs that cannot be adjusted in the service
mode.
[2]
[1]
4061f3c201na
4061f3c202na
4061f3c203na
4061f3c204na
19
4. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
20
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 4. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
PC-407
[2] 2. Lift the Main Tray [1], and remove two
[1] screws [2] fixing the Shift Tray.
NOTE
• When reinstalling, take care not to
unfasten the wire of the Main Tray.
4061f3c205na
[3]
4061f3c206na
[6]
4061f3c207na
4061f3c208na
21
4. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
PC-407
Blank Page
22
SERVICE MANUAL Field Service
LU-203
2008.05
Ver. 1.0
Revision history
After publication of this service manual, the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for
improvement of their performance.
Therefore, the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine.
When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual, a revised version will be
issued with a revision mark added as required.
Revision mark:
• To indicate clearly a section revised, 1 is shown at the left margin of the revised section.
The number inside 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made.
• To indicate clearly a page that contains the revision, 1 is shown near the page number of the
corresponding page.
The number inside 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made.
NOTE
Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 3.0 only are shown with those for Ver. 2.0 deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has not been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 2.0 are left as they are.
CONTENTS
LU-203
LU-203
OUTLINE
1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
MAINTENANCE
2. PERIODIC CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2.1 Maintenance procedure of the paper feed section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2.1.1 Replacing the pick-up rubber and the feed rubber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2.1.2 Replacing the separation roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
3. OTHERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
3.1 Disassembling and assembling list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
3.2 Disassembling and assembling procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
3.2.1 Removal and reinstallation of the right cover, the front cover and the rear cover. . . . . . . . . . . . 13
3.2.2 Replacing the wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
ADJUSTMENT/SETTING
4. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
4.1 Adjusting the tilt of the lift plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
i
CONTENTS Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
LU-203
Blank page
ii
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATION
OUTLINE
LU-203
1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATION
A. Type
B. Functions
C. Type of paper
Paper type *1 Plain paper, recycled paper, high quality paper of 60 to 105 g/m2
Paper size A4, 81/2 x 11
*1 Recommended paper
Plain paper Inch: Hammermill Tidal MP (20 lbs)
Metric: Konica Profi (80 g/m2), Konica Minolta Original (80 g/m2)
Recycled paper Inch: Weyehaeuser Recycled Laser Copy (20 lbs)
Metric: Nautilus (80 g/m2)
D. Maintenance
E. Machine data
F. Operating environment
Note
• The information herein may be subject to change for improvement without notice.
1
1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATION Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
LU-203
Blank page
2
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 2. PERIODIC CHECK
MAINTENANCE
LU-203
2. PERIODIC CHECK
2.1 Maintenance procedure of the paper feed section
Caution
• When connected to the main body, make sure that the power cord of the main body is unplugged
from the power outlet.
*1 501/421
*2 361
3
2. PERIODIC CHECK Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
B. Procedure
1. Open the upper door [1].
[1]
2. Remove the C-clips [2], 1 each, and release the 2
LU-203
bearings [3].
3. Remove the paper feed roller unit [4].
[4] 16aaf2c001na
4
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 2. PERIODIC CHECK
Note
• When installing the paper feed roller unit, be
[3] sure to insert the shaft [1] into the ring of the
LU-203
actuator [2].
[4] • When installing the paper feed roller unit, be
sure to install it so that the hook [3] comes
above the lift-up shaft [4].
• When installing the paper feed roller unit, be
sure to insert the shaft [5] securely into the
coupling [6].
16aaf2c002na
5
2. PERIODIC CHECK Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
ing [4].
6. Release the claws [6] of the bearings [5], two
each, and then remove the two bearings [5].
7. Pull out the shaft [7] in the arrow-marked direction
[8] and remove the feed roller [9].
[8] [2]
Note
• Be sure to install the feed rubber [2] so that
the paint mark [3] comes in the opposite
direction of the gear [4].
• When setting the feed rubber, apply alcohol
on the inside of the feed rubber. By doing so,
the feed rubber can be set more easily.
6
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 2. PERIODIC CHECK
LU-203
ing holder [5] from the roller mounting plate [2].
11. Remove the bearing [1] and then remove the pick-
[3] [1]
up roller [3] from the shaft [2].
[2] 16aaf2c006na
Note
• When setting the pick-up rubber, apply alco-
hol on the inside of the pick-up rubber. By
doing so, the pick-up rubber can be set more
easily.
[2] [1]
16aaf2c007na
7
2. PERIODIC CHECK Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
*1 501/421
*2 361
B. Procedure
1. Pull out LU from the main body.
[1] 2. Open the upper door [1].
3. Lift up the paper feed roller unit [2].
4. Remove the 2 screws [3] and then remove the
guide plate [4].
[2]
8
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 2. PERIODIC CHECK
LU-203
[2] 16aaf2c009na
16aaf2c010na
9
2. PERIODIC CHECK Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
[2] 16aaf2c011na
8. Pull out the shaft [2] while pressing the lever [1]
[3] [2] and remove the separation roller [3].
[1] 16aaf2c012na
10
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 2. PERIODIC CHECK
LU-203
Note
• Be sure to install the separation rubber [2] so
that the paint mark [3] comes in the opposite
direction of the projection [4].
• When setting the separation rubber, apply
alcohol on the inside of the separation rubber.
By doing so, the separation rubber can be set
more easily.
16aaf2c013na
11
3. OTHERS Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
3. OTHERS
3.1 Disassembling and assembling list
LU-203
Note
• This list shows the explanation of the disassembly and reassembly of the parts which are consid-
ered necessary to replace (other than periodically replaced parts). However, these parts except for
the covers are not required to be disassembled while in normal service operations.
• For the method of replacing the periodically replaced parts, see "2.1 Maintenance procedure of
the paper feed section".
(See P.3)
12
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. OTHERS
LU-203
Caution
• When connected to the main body, make sure that the power cord of the main body is unplugged
from the power outlet.
3.2.1 Removal and reinstallation of the right cover, the front cover and the rear cover
A. Procedure
1. Pull out LU from the main body side.
[1] [2] 2. Open the upper door [1].
3. Remove the 2 screws [2] and then remove the
right cover [3].
Note
• When installing the right cover [3], be sure to
take note of the direction of the 2 casters [4].
[3]
[4] 16aaf2c014na
13
3. OTHERS Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
[2] 16aaf2c016na
14
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. OTHERS
LU-203
rear cover [4].
10. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
[4] [3]
[2]
[1] 16aaf2c017na
15
3. OTHERS Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
[4]
[2]
16aaf2c018na
16
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. OTHERS
LU-203
[2]
[1]
16aaf2c019nb
16aaf2c020na
17
3. OTHERS Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
Note
[1] [2] • When removing the LU drive board unit, the
bearings [1] and [2] may come off and fall. Be
LU-203
[4] [3]
16aaf2c021na
[1] 16aaf2c022na
18
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. OTHERS
LU-203
[1] 16aaf2c023na
10. Peel off the seal [7] from the detection reel [6].
11. Rotate the detection reel [6] clockwise as seen
from the rear side, and remove the detection wire
[8] from the reel.
C
D
B
A
[3] [5]
[4]
[2]
[1]
16aaf2c024na
19
3. OTHERS Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
[1] [1]
pulleys [5].
C
D
[5] [4]
[5]
[4]
16aaf2c025na
14. Remove the E-ring [1] and the drive pulley [2],
then remove the auxiliary wire [3], the wire A [4]
and the wire B [5].
15. Remove the E-ring [6] and the drive pulley [7],
C then remove the detection wire [8], the wire D [9]
D and the wire C [10].
B
A
16aaf2c026na
20
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. OTHERS
B. Stringing wires
1. Pass the wire A [1], the wire B [2], the wire C [3]
[6] [7] [6] [14] [15] [15] and the wire D [4] through the lift plate [5].
LU-203
B C 2. Run the wire A [6] and the wire B [7] through the 2
A A D D
upper pulleys [8] and the 2 lower pulleys [9], and
then through the adjustment part [10].
3. Tighten the 2 upper pulleys [8] with the 2 E-rings
[11] [8] [11] [8] [16] [17] [16] [17] [11].
4. Install the wire stopper [12] to each of the 2 lower
pulleys [9] in the direction as shown in the draw-
ing. And then fasten it with the 2 E-Rings [13].
5. Run the wire C [14] and the wire D [15] through
[4]
C the groove of the pulley [16].
[10] 6. Tighten the 2 pulleys [16] with each of the E-ring
D
[3] [17].
B
A
[2]
[1] [5]
[9] [9]
[12] [12]
[13] [13]
16aaf2c027na
16aaf2c028na
21
3. OTHERS Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
9. Hold the drive pulley [1] and the drive pulley [2]
[7] with both hands and rotate them counterclock-
[9] wise as seen from the front side until there are no
LU-203
15. Set the wire attaching notch [2] at the right above
[2] position with no tension applied on the detection
reel [1], and wind the detection wire [3] a full turn
counterclockwise around the detection reel [1]
starting at the top side.
Note
• Be sure to wind the wire from the inside of the
LU to the outside.
[1] [4] [3]
16aaf2c030na
16. Rotate the detection reel [1] clockwise to apply
tension. After rotating about 3/4 turn, install the
detection wire [3].
17. Stick the seal [4] to the detection reel [1].
18. Follow Steps 1 to 7 in “A. Removing the wire” in
reverse order.
Note
• After finishing wire replacement, move the lift
plate up and down to confirm that it moves
smoothly.
• Make sure that the wires do not cross each
other, or a wire does not run on another wire.
• After installing the wires, adjust the tilt of the
lift plate.
(See P.23)
22
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 4. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
ADJUSTMENT/SETTING
LU-203
4. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
4.1 Adjusting the tilt of the lift plate
When the lift plate is tilted, paper may not be fed correctly. Adjust the lift plate so that it becomes parallel to the
paper feed roller shaft. When replacing the wire, be sure to conduct this adjustment.
A. Procedure
1. Remove the right cover and the front cover.
(See P.13)
2. Loosen the screw [1].
[1] 16aaf3c001na
23
4. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
[1] [3]
16aaf3c002na
24
SERVICE MANUAL Field Service
FS-522/PU-501/
OT-602
2008.05
Ver. 1.0
Revision history
After publication of this service manual, the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for
improvement of their performance.
Therefore, the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine.
When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual, a revised version will be
issued with a revision mark added as required.
Revision mark:
• To indicate clearly a section revised, 1 is shown at the left margin of the revised section.
The number inside 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made.
• To indicate clearly a page that contains the revision, 1 is shown near the page number of the
corresponding page.
The number inside 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made.
NOTE
Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 3.0 only are shown with those for Ver. 2.0 deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has not been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 2.0 are left as they are.
FS-522/PU-501/OT-602
CONTENTS
FS-522/PU-501/OT-602
OUTLINE
1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS ................................................................................1
1.1 FS-522 ..................................................................................................................1
1.2 PU-501..................................................................................................................3
1.3 OT-602 ..................................................................................................................4
MAINTENANCE
2. PERIODIC CHECK..................................................................................................5
2.1 Maintenance procedure ........................................................................................5
2.1.1 Cleaning of the Roller....................................................................................5
3. OTHER ....................................................................................................................7
3.1 Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items ............................................................7
3.2 Disassembling and assembling list .......................................................................8
3.3 Disassembling and assembling procedure ...........................................................9
3.3.1 Conveyance Front Cover /Up, /Rt, /Lw ..........................................................9
3.3.2 Conveyance Upper Cover .............................................................................9
3.3.3 Front Door ...................................................................................................10
3.3.4 Conveyance Front Cover /Lt ........................................................................10
3.3.5 Paper Exit Front Cover, Rear Cover, Connector Cover ...............................11
3.3.6 Tray /2..........................................................................................................12
3.3.7 OT-602.........................................................................................................12
3.3.8 Tray /1..........................................................................................................12
3.3.9 Lift Tray ........................................................................................................13
3.3.10 Conveyance Unit .........................................................................................13
3.3.11 Stapler .........................................................................................................14
3.3.12 PU ...............................................................................................................15
3.3.13 Stacker Paddle Drive Clutch Assy ...............................................................16
3.3.14 Paper Holding Paddle Drive Clutch Assy ....................................................17
ADJUSTMENT/SETTING
4. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT..............................................................................19
4.1 Staple Position Adjustment .................................................................................19
4.2 Adjustment of the Installation Position of the Shutter Drive Gear .......................20
4.3 Punch Mis-centering Adjustment (PU-501).........................................................21
i
CONTENTS Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
FS-522/PU-501/OT-602
Blank Page
ii
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
OUTLINE
FS-522/PU-501/OT-602
1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
1.1 FS-522
A. Type
B. Functions
Modes Non sort, sort, group, sort staple, and punch (when PU-501 is mounted)
C. Paper type
(1) Non sort
(2) Sort/Group
1
1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
FS-522/PU-501/OT-602
D. Stapling
F. Machine specifications
G. Operating environment
2
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
FS-522/PU-501/OT-602
1.2 PU-501
A. Type
B. Maintenance
C. Machine specifications
D. Operating environment
3
1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
FS-522/PU-501/OT-602
1.3 OT-602
A. Type
B. Paper Type
D. Machine specifications
E. Operating environment
NOTE
• The information herein may be subject to change for improvement without notice.
4
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 2. PERIODIC CHECK
MAINTENANCE
FS-522/PU-501/OT-602
2. PERIODIC CHECK
2.1 Maintenance procedure
NOTE
• The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure of Maintenance represents the iso-
propyl alcohol.
*1 501/421
*2 361
B. Procedure
1. Remove the Lift Tray.
(See P.13)
2. Remove the Conveyance Unit.
(See P.13)
3. Remove the Conveyance Top Cover.
(See P.9)
[1]
4349f2c001na
[2]
4349f2c002na
5
2. PERIODIC CHECK Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
FS-522/PU-501/OT-602
[4]
4349f2c003na
[5]
4349f2c004na
[8]
[7]
4349f2c005na
[9]
4349f2c006na
4349f2c007na
6
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. OTHER
FS-522/PU-501/OT-602
3. OTHER
3.1 Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items
A. Screws to which blue paint or green paint is applied
• Blue paint or green paint is applied to some screws to prevent them from coming
loose.
• As a general rule, screws to which blue paint or green paint is applied should not be
removed or loosened.
B. Red-painted screws
• Do not remove or loosen any of the red-painted screws in the field. It should also be
noted that, when two or more screws are used for a single part, only one representa-
tive screw may be marked with the red paint.
NOTE
• Do not turn the variable resistors on boards for which no adjusting instructions are
given in ADJUSTMENT/SETTING.
D. Removal of Boards
Caution
• When removing a circuit board or other electrical component, refer to “SAFETY AND
IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS” and follow the corresponding removal procedures.
• The removal procedures given in the following omit the removal of connectors and
screws securing the circuit board support or circuit board.
• When it is absolutely necessary to touch the ICs and other electrical components on
the board, be sure to ground your body.
7
3. OTHER Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
FS-522/PU-501/OT-602
8
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. OTHER
FS-522/PU-501/OT-602
3.3 Disassembling and assembling procedure
3.3.1 Conveyance Front Cover /Up, /Rt, /Lw
[2]
[3]
a0hnf2c001ca
[4] 4349f2c010na
[2]
[1]
4349f2c011na
9
3. OTHER Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
FS-522/PU-501/OT-602
[1] [3]
4349f2c036na
[1]
4349f2c014na
10
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. OTHER
FS-522/PU-501/OT-602
3.3.5 Paper Exit Front Cover, Rear Cover, Connector Cover
[6]
[5]
4349f2c038na
11
3. OTHER Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
FS-522/PU-501/OT-602
3.3.6 Tray /2
[1] 4349f2c016na
3.3.7 OT-602
[2]
1. Remove two screws [1], and remove the
OT [2].
2. Reinstall the above parts following the
removal steps in reverse.
[1] 4625f2c001na
3.3.8 Tray /1
[1] 4349f2c017na
12
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. OTHER
FS-522/PU-501/OT-602
3.3.9 Lift Tray
NOTE
• When removing the Lift Tray, be sure to bring the Tray down to the bottom in
advance.
• If the OT is installed, remove it in advance.
13
3. OTHER Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
FS-522/PU-501/OT-602
3.3.11 Stapler
[2]
4349f2c022na
[4]
4349f2c023na
[5]
4349f2c024na
[7]
4349f2c025na
14
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. OTHER
FS-522/PU-501/OT-602
3.3.12 PU
NOTE
• When the SD is provided, be sure to remove the Folding Unit in advance.
[3]
4512f2c002na
[6]
4512f2c003nb
[9]
[8]
4512f2c004nb
15
3. OTHER Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
FS-522/PU-501/OT-602
A. Removal Procedure
1. Remove the Lift Tray.
(See P.13)
2. Remove the Conveyance Unit.
(See P.13)
[1] 3. Remove the Conveyance Upper Cover.
(See P.9)
4. Remove the E-ring [1].
4349f2c026na
4349f2c027na
[7]
[6] 4349f2c028nb
16
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. OTHER
FS-522/PU-501/OT-602
3.3.14 Paper Holding Paddle Drive Clutch Assy
A. Removal Procedure
[1] 1. Remove the Lift Tray.
(See P.13)
2. Remove the Conveyance Unit.
(See P.13)
[2] 3. Remove the Conveyance Upper Cover.
(See P.9)
4. Remove the C-ring [1].
4349f2c029na 5. Remove the bearing [2].
4349f2c030na
B. Note to reinstallation Procedure of the Paper Holding Paddle Drive Clutch Assy
1. Insert the Paper Holding Paddle Drive Clutch Assy [1].
NOTE
• When inserting the Paper Holding Paddle Drive Clutch Assy [1] into the shaft, move
the Paper Holding Paddle [4] at the specified position [3], and be sure to install the
edge [5] of Actuator in the position as shown in the drawing.
[3]
[2] [6]
4349f2c032nb
[1] Paper Holding Paddle Drive Clutch Assy [4] Paper Holding Paddle
[2] Front side view [5] Edge of Actuator
[3] 107 ± 3mm [6] Solenoid Flapper
17
3. OTHER Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
FS-522/PU-501/OT-602
[2]
4349f2c033nb
[7]
4349f2c035na
18
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 4. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
ADJUSTMENT/SETTING
FS-522/PU-501/OT-602
4. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
4.1 Staple Position Adjustment
1. Set the staple and make a print.
B [1]
2. Check the staple position of the paper.
A
• Slant one point Staple [1]
C
D (Paper Width: 216 to 297 mm)
279 to 297 mm: 45°,
B5, B4: 30°
Measurement Adjustment
Specification
position range
A, C 4.4 mm —
B, D 12.1 mm +1 to –2mm
A [2]
• Parallel one point Staple [2]
B (Paper Width: 182 to 216 mm)
Measurement Adjustment
Specification
position range
A 4.5 mm —
B 6 mm +1 to –2mm
Y = (paper width–X–11) / 2
X = A3, A4: 137 mm
F 4349f3c001na
B4, B5: 114 mm
A4S: 190 mm
B5S: 162 mm
11 x 17, 81/2 x 11: 119.4 mm
81/2 x 11S: 196 mm
Substitute above into the equation.
19
4. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
FS-522/PU-501/OT-602
[2]
4349f3c002na
4349f3c003na
[2] a0hnf3c001ca
[4]
4349f3c004nb
20
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 4. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
FS-522/PU-501/OT-602
4. Reinstall the above parts following the
[7]
removal steps in reverse.
NOTE
• When installing the Shutter Drive
Assy, make sure to insert the two
Crank Pins into the Slit of Shutter [7].
a0hnf3c002ca
21
4. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
FS-522/PU-501/OT-602
Blank Page
22
SERVICE MANUAL Field Service
FS-523/RU-507
2008.05
Ver. 1.0
Revision history
After publication of this service manual, the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for
improvement of their performance.
Therefore, the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine.
When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual, a revised version will be
issued with a revision mark added as required.
Revision mark:
• To indicate clearly a section revised, 1 is shown at the left margin of the revised section.
The number inside 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made.
• To indicate clearly a page that contains the revision, 1 is shown near the page number of the
corresponding page.
The number inside 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made.
NOTE
Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 3.0 only are shown with those for Ver. 2.0 deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has not been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 2.0 are left as they are.
CONTENTS
FS-523/RU-507
FS-523/RU-507
OUTLINE
1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.1 FS-523 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.2 RU-507 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
MAINTENANCE
2. OTHERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.1 Disassembling and assembling list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.2 Disassembling and assembling procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2.2.1 Removal/reinstallation of the upper cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2.2.2 Removal/reinstallation of the front cover /Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2.2.3 Removal/reinstallation of the front cover /Lw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2.2.4 Removal/reinstallation of the rear cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
2.2.5 Removal/reinstallation of the punch unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2.2.6 Replacing the stapler unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
ADJUSTMENT/SETTING
3. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
3.1 Output check mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
3.1.1 Switches provided inside the board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
3.1.2 Output check mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
3.2 Adjusting the punch hole position in the vertical direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
3.3 Adjusting the solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
3.3.1 Adjustment of the bypass gate solenoid (SD1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
3.3.2 Adjustment of the main gate solenoid (SD2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
3.4 Adjusting the belt tension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
3.4.1 Adjustment of the timing belt of the conveyance motor /Up (M4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
3.4.2 Adjustment of the timing belt of the conveyance motor /Lw (M2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
3.4.3 Adjustment of the timing belt of the paper exit motor (M3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
3.5 Adjusting the tray upper surface detection position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
3.6 Adjusting the tray overload detection level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
i
CONTENTS Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
FS-523/RU-507
Blank page
ii
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATION
OUTLINE
FS-523/RU-507
1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATION
1.1 FS-523
A. Type
B. Functions
C. Type of paper
• Maximum load capacity: (80 g/m2) when loaded with paper of the same size.
(1) Straight
Type of paper Size of paper Weight Max. capacity Exit tray Max. number of
sheets stapled
Plain paper Inch: 60 to 90 g/m2 250 sheets Sub tray —
Recycled paper A3, A4, A4S
Thick paper 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 91 to 210 g/m2 20 sheets
81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S,
Thin paper 50 to 59 g/m2
81/2 x 51/2S, Foolscap
OHP —
Metric:
transparencies
A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5,
Envelope B5S *2, A5S, B6S
Label paper 11 x 17, 81/2 x 11,
Letterhead 81/2 x 11S, Foolscap,
8K *1, 16K *1, 16KS *1
1
1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATION Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
sheets stapled
Plain paper Inch: 50 to 210 g/m2 3000 sheets Main tray —
Recycled paper A3, A4, A4S (A4S or smaller)
11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 1500 sheets
Thick paper 81/2 x 11S, Foolscap (B4 or larger)
Thin paper Metric:
A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5,
B5S *2
11 x 17, 81/2 x 11,
81/2 x 11S, Foolscap,
8K *1, 16K *1, 16KS*1
(4) Punch
a. Metric/Swedish
Type of paper Size of paper Weight Max. capacity Exit tray Max. number of
sheets stapled
Plain paper
A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, 60 to 90 g/m2 — Main tray —
Recycled paper 8K *1, 16K *1 Sub tray
b. Inch 2 holes
Type of paper Size of paper Weight Max. capacity Exit tray Max. number of
sheets stapled
Plain paper
11 x 17, 81/2 x 11, 60 to 90 g/m2 — Main tray —
Recycled paper 8 /2 x 11S, 8 /2 x 14,
1 1
Sub tray
51/2 x 81/2S, Foolscap
c. Inch 3 holes
Type of paper Size of paper Weight Max. capacity Exit tray Max. number of
sheets stapled
Plain paper 81/2 x 11, 11 x 17 60 to 90 g/m2 — Main tray —
Recycled paper Sub tray
2
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATION
D. Stapling
FS-523/RU-507
Staple filling method Dedicated staple cartridge (5000 staples)
Staple detection Available (near empty: 20 remaining staples)
Staple position *1 Rear: Diagonal 45° 1 point Metric: A3, B4, A4, B5
Front: Diagonal 45° 1 point Inch: 81/2 x 11, 11 x 17
Rear: Diagonal 28° 1 point Metric: B4, B5
Front: Diagonal 28° 1 point Inch: —
Rear: Parallel 1 point Metric: A4S, B5S
Front: Parallel 1 point Inch: 81/2 x 11S, 81/2 x 14
Side: 2 points Metric: A4, A4S, A3, B5, B5S, B4
Inch: 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 81/2 x 14, 11 x 17
Manual staple None
*1 In case of the 1-staple mode, conduct a parallel and a skew adjustment according to the length in the
main scan direction.
Parallel: main scan direction 182 to 216 mm
Diagonal: main scan direction 216 to 297 mm
E. Punch
F. Maintenance
G. Machine data
H. Operating environment
Note
• The information herein may be subject to change for improvement without notice.
3
1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATION Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
1.2 RU-507
FS-523/RU-507
A. Type
B. Functions
C. Type of paper
16fat1c001na
D. Maintenance
E. Machine data
F. Operating environment
Note
• The information herein may be subject to change for improvement without notice.
4
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 2. OTHERS
MAINTENANCE
FS-523/RU-507
2. OTHERS
2.1 Disassembling and assembling list
No. Section Part name Page referred to
1 Cover Upper cover P.6
2 Front cover /Up P.8
3 Front cover /Lw P.9
4 Rear cover P.10
5 Punch section Punch unit P.11
6 Staple section Stapler unit P.13
5
2. OTHERS Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
4521f2c004na
6
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 2. OTHERS
FS-523/RU-507
4. Loosen 2 screws [4].
5. Loosen the screw [5] and remove the upper cover
[6].
6. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
[3] [2]
4521f2c005na
7
2. OTHERS Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
[2]
[3] 4521f2c006na
8
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 2. OTHERS
FS-523/RU-507
1. Loosen 2 screws [1] and remove the front cover
[1] /Lw [2].
2. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
[2] 4521f2c007na
9
2. OTHERS Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
[2] [3]
[4] 4521f2c008na
10
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 2. OTHERS
FS-523/RU-507
When installing the Swedish punch kit G, be sure to remove the existing punch unit and follow the procedure
given below.
B. Procedure
1. Remove the upper cover.
(See P.6)
2. Remove the connector [1].
3. Remove the screws [2] and [3]. After sliding the
punch unit [4] in the arrow-marked direction [5],
remove it in the arrow-marked direction [6].
Note
• The screw [2] is provided with the spacer [7]
and the washer [8]. Be careful that they do not
get lost.
[3] [4]
[2][7][8] 4521f2c009na
11
2. OTHERS Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
Note
[9] [13] [14]
FS-523/RU-507
12
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 2. OTHERS
FS-523/RU-507
1. Open the punch scraps box holder [1].
[1]
4521f2c001na
Note
• After replacing the stapler units /Fr and /Rr,
be sure to return these intervals to their origi-
nal widths.
Note
• For each FS unit, 2 stapler units are provided.
[6]
When replacing these 2 stapler units, they are
replaced at the same time. So, be sure to
remove both the covers.
• When installing the stapler unit covers, fit the
claws [6a] into the holes of the plate.
13
2. OTHERS Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
[7][8] [9]
[15] [12][13]
14
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 2. OTHERS
FS-523/RU-507
11. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
4521f2c029na
15
2. OTHERS Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
FS-523/RU-507
Blank page
16
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
ADJUSTMENT/SETTING
FS-523/RU-507
3. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
3.1 Output check mode
3.1.1 Switches provided inside the board
Test switch [1] Dipswitch used for the mode setting of the output check mode. (All settings
are off in the initial condition.)
Output check switch /1 [2] Used to execute the output check mode.
Output check switch /2 [3]
LED1 to 4 [4] Display the conditions while in the output check mode.
[4]
17
3. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
Note
• Before executing the output check mode, be sure to remove the upper cover, the front cover /Up
and the rear cover of FS in advance.
(See P.6, P.8, P.10)
• When removing the covers of FS, be sure to block the light that strikes on the front door sensor
(PS17) and the upper door sensor (PS18).
[1] 4521f3c002na
18
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
FS-523/RU-507
body.
2. Set the test switch [1] to the initial condition (all
OFF).
3. Turn ON SW2.
[1] 4521f3c003na
19
3. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
Output check switch /1 : ON The motor and the solenoid turn ON.
• Entrance conveyance motor (M1)
• Conveyance motor /Up (M4)
• Bypass gate solenoid (SD1)
• Main gate solenoid (SD2)
Output check switch /2 : ON The motor and the solenoid turn OFF.
• Entrance conveyance motor (M1)
• Conveyance motor /Up (M4)
• Bypass gate solenoid (SD1)
• Main gate solenoid (SD2)
Output check switch /1 : ON The motor and the solenoid turn ON.
• Entrance conveyance motor (M1)
• Conveyance motor /Up (M4)
• Conveyance motor /Lw (M2)
• Paper exit motor (M3)
• Bypass gate solenoid (SD1)
• Paddle motor /Up (M15)
• Paper exit roller release motor (M13)
Output check switch /2 : ON The motor and the solenoid turn OFF.
• Entrance conveyance motor (M1)
• Conveyance motor /Up (M4)
• Conveyance motor /Lw (M2)
• Paper exit motor (M3)
• Bypass gate solenoid (SD1)
• Paddle motor /Up (M15)
• Paper exit roller release motor (M13)
20
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
FS-523/RU-507
Output check switch /1 : ON
21
3. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
22
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
FS-523/RU-507
Sensor Status LED
1 2 3 4
Main tray upper limit sensor (PS19) Light pass through { { { z
Intermediate conveyance sensor (PS3) Light blocked { { z {
Bypass route conveyance sensor (PS2) Light blocked { z { {
Main route conveyance sensor (PS4) Light blocked z { { {
z : On { : Off
23
3. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
A. Procedure
1. Set the punch hole mode, and make a copy in the
single sided original -> single sided print mode.
2. Fold the copy exited into two and check the posi-
tion of the punch holes to see if the discrepancy
"A" [1] is 2 mm or less.
3. When "A" is in excess of 2 mm, adjust the punch
hole position in the vertical direction.
[1]
4521f3c004na
24
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
FS-523/RU-507
the arrow-marked direction [5] to adjust the posi-
tion of the punch unit [6].
6. Repeat steps 1 and 2 and check the punch holes
to see if the discrepancy "A" is 2 mm or less.
7. When "A" is in excess of 2 mm, repeat steps 3 to
6 until "A" gets inside 2 mm.
[4]
[3] 4521f3c005na
25
3. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
4521f3c006na
26
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
FS-523/RU-507
1. Remove the upper cover.
[1] [2] (See P.6)
2. Remove the front cover /Up.
(See P.8)
3. Loosen 2 screws [1].
4. Move the main gate solenoid (SD2) [2] and tighten
the 2 screws [1] when the length of "A" [3] comes
to the specified value.
Note
• With the plunger of SD2 pressed in the arrow-
marked direction [4] in advance, be sure to
[4] [3]
adjust the clearance with no play.
4521f3c007na
27
3. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
3.4.1 Adjustment of the timing belt of the conveyance motor /Up (M4)
A. Procedure
1. Remove the upper cover.
[2]
(See P.6)
[4]
2. Remove the rear cover.
(See P.10)
3. Loosen 2 screws [1].
4. Press the timing belt at the center section [2] with
a spring balance [3] from above. And when the
[3] amount of the deflection [4] comes to 4 mm,
tighten 2 screws [1] at the position in which the
scale of the spring balance points to the specified
value "A."
Specified value "A" = 200 ± 100 gf
[1]
4521f3c008na
28
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
3.4.2 Adjustment of the timing belt of the conveyance motor /Lw (M2)
A. Procedure
FS-523/RU-507
1. Remove the upper cover.
[2] [4] [3] (See P.6)
2. Remove the rear cover /Up.
(See P.10)
3. Loosen 2 screws [1].
4. Pull the square hole [3] provided on the convey-
ance motor /Lw mounting plate [2] with the spring
balance [4] and tighten 2 screws [1] at the position
in which the scale of the spring balance points to
the specified value "A."
Specified value "A" = 800 ± 50 gf
[1]
4521f3c009na
29
3. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
3.4.3 Adjustment of the timing belt of the paper exit motor (M3)
A. Procedure
FS-523/RU-507
[4] [1]
4521f3c010na
30
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
FS-523/RU-507
This adjustment is made when replacing the FS control board (FSCB), or the main tray upper limit LED (LED19)
or the main tray upper limit sensor (PS19).
A. Procedure
1. Set the output check mode "Sensor output check
mode."
(See P.17)
2. Rotate VR1 [1] provided on the FS control board
(FSCB) up to the limit counterclockwise.
[1] 4521f3c011na
[2] 4521f3c012na
31
3. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
[5]
[1] 4521f3c013na
32
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
FS-523/RU-507
This adjustment is made when replacing the FS control board (FSCB) or replacing the tray lift motor (M7).
A. Procedure
1. Set the output check mode "Main tray operation
[1]
mode."
(See P.17)
2. Rotate VR2 [1] on the FS control board (FSCB)
counterclockwise up to the limit.
4521f3c014na
33
3. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
4521f3c015na
[4]
a0phf3c002ca
34
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
FS-523/RU-507
6. Remove the paper that was put in step 3 to block
the light and let the light of LED19 pass through.
Note
• When letting the light of LED19 pass through,
the main tray starts to go up. Be sure to con-
duct the following steps 7 and 8 while in the
up drive of the main tray.
[5] 4521f3c017na
35
3. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
[5] 4521f3c018na
36
SERVICE MANUAL Field Service
SD-507
( 501/421/361 (
2008.05
Ver. 1.0
Revision history
After publication of this service manual, the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for
improvement of their performance.
Therefore, the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine.
When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual, a revised version will be
issued with a revision mark added as required.
Revision mark:
• To indicate clearly a section revised, 1 is shown at the left margin of the revised section.
The number inside 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made.
• To indicate clearly a page that contains the revision, 1 is shown near the page number of the
corresponding page.
The number inside 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made.
NOTE
Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 3.0 only are shown with those for Ver. 2.0 deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has not been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 2.0 are left as they are.
CONTENTS
SD-507
SD-507
OUTLINE
1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS ................................................................................1
MAINTENANCE
2. PERIODIC CHECK..................................................................................................3
2.1 Maintenance procedure ........................................................................................3
2.1.1 Cleaning of the Rollers ..................................................................................3
3. OTHER ....................................................................................................................4
3.1 Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items ............................................................4
3.2 Disassembling and assembling list .......................................................................5
3.3 Disassembling and assembling procedure ...........................................................5
3.3.1 Paper Output Tray/Front Cover......................................................................5
3.3.2 Rear Cover ....................................................................................................6
3.3.3 Upper Cover ..................................................................................................6
3.3.4 Saddle Unit....................................................................................................7
3.3.5 Folding Unit ...................................................................................................8
3.3.6 Stapler Unit....................................................................................................9
3.3.7 Paper Guide Motor (M13)............................................................................14
3.3.8 Folding Roller ..............................................................................................18
ADJUSTMENT/SETTING
4. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT..............................................................................29
4.1 Fold Skew Adjustment ........................................................................................29
4.2 Center Staple Skew Adjustment .........................................................................30
i
CONTENTS Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
SD-507
Blank Page
ii
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
OUTLINE
1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
SD-507
A. Type
B. Paper type
Plain Paper,
Type 56 to 90 g/m2
Recycled paper
Metric: A3, B4, A4S, B5S *2, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 11S, Foolscap,
Size 8K *1, 16KS *1
Inch: 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11S, A3, A4S, Foolscap
Capacity 200 sheets or 20 copies
*1: Only supported in Taiwan.
*2: Supported in other than inch area and Taiwan.
C. Maintenance
D. Machine specifications
E. Operating environment
NOTE
• The information herein may be subject to change for improvement without notice.
1
1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
SD-507
Blank Page
2
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 2. PERIODIC CHECK
MAINTENANCE
2. PERIODIC CHECK
SD-507
2.1 Maintenance procedure
NOTE
• The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure of Maintenance represents the iso-
propyl alcohol.
*1 501/421
*2 361
[1]
[1]
4511f2c001na
[2]
4511f2c002na
3
3. OTHER Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
3. OTHER
3.1 Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items
SD-507
B. Red-painted screws
• Do not remove or loosen any of the red-painted screws in the field. It should also be
noted that, when two or more screws are used for a single part, only one representa-
tive screw may be marked with the red paint.
NOTE
• Do not turn the variable resistors on boards for which no adjusting instructions are
given in ADJUSTMENT/SETTING.
D. Removal of Boards
Caution
• When removing a circuit board or other electrical component, refer to “SAFETY AND
IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS” and follow the corresponding removal procedures.
• The removal procedures given in the following omit the removal of connectors and
screws securing the circuit board support or circuit board.
• When it is absolutely necessary to touch the ICs and other electrical components on
the board, be sure to ground your body.
4
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. OTHER
SD-507
No. Section Part name Ref.Page
1 Paper Output Tray Paper Output Tray P.5
2 Front Cover P.5
3 Cover Upper Cover P.6
4 Rear Cover P.6
5 Saddle Unit P.7
6 Unit Folding Unit P.8
7 Stapler Unit P.9
8 Paper Guide Motor (M13) P.14
Others
9 Folding Roller P.18
[3]
[1]
[2]
4511f2c004na
1. Align the cutout and remove the Paper Output Tray [1].
2. Remove two screws [2], and remove the Front Cover [3].
3. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.
5
3. OTHER Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
[2]
[1]
4511f2c005na
1. Remove two screws [1], and remove the Rear Cover [2].
2. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.
[2]
4511f2c006na
6
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. OTHER
SD-507
Connector Cover [2].
[1]
[2] 4511f2c007na
[4]
2. Remove the screw [3], and remove the
[3]
two Ground Terminals [4].
3. Unplug two connectors [5].
[5]
4511f2c008nb
[6]
4511f2c009na
4511f2c010nb
7
3. OTHER Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
[14]
[10] 4511f2c011nb
[2]
[1]
4511f2c012na
[4]
4511f2c013na
8
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. OTHER
SD-507
NOTE
[6]
• At reinstallation, first fit the claw [7]
into position.
[7]
[5] 4511f2c014na
4511f2c015na
4511f2c016nb
[1]
[3] [2]
4511f2c017na
9
3. OTHER Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
[6]
4511f2c019na
[10] [9]
[8]
[11]
4511f2c020nb
10
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. OTHER
SD-507
[13]
16. Remove the Tray [16].
[15]
[16]
[14]
a0phf2c001ca
4511f2c024na
[19a] [19b]
a0phf2c002ca
11
3. OTHER Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
[20]
20. Remove four screws [20] and four
screws [20a], and remove the Lower
Cover [21].
SD-507
[20a]
[21]
[20a]
[20] 4511f2c026nb
[22]
[23] 4511f2c027nb
[24]
4511f2c028na
12
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. OTHER
SD-507
1. Install the Stapler, and then install the
[1] Staple Cartridge.
2. Use three screws [1] to temporary fix
the Clincher [2].
[2] 4511f2c030na
[3]
3. Loosen three screws [3] of the stopper.
4. Loosen three screws [4] of the Clincher.
[4]
[3]
4511f2c031na
[8]
4511f2c033na
13
3. OTHER Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
[10]
4511f2c034na
[1]
[3] [2]
4511f2c035na
14
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. OTHER
SD-507
[10] NOTE
• Be careful that when the Mounting
[9a] Bracket [9a] is removed, the spring
[10a] is also removed.
[9] • When installing the spring, install the
end of spring [10a] into the gap [10b]
[10] between the ribs.
[10a] [10b]
a0phf2c003ca
[11a]
[11]
4511f2c038nb
15
3. OTHER Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
[27] [25]
a0phf2c006ca
16
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. OTHER
SD-507
19. Reinstall the above parts following the
removal steps in reverse.
[30]
a0phf2c007ca
[2]
[1]
[4]
[3]
4511f2c043na
1. Press the two Paper Guides [1] in and check that they touch the stopper [2] simulta-
neously.
2. Check that pins [4] can be inserted through the positioning holes [3] (3 holes) of the Paper
Guide Sensor Assy.
17
3. OTHER Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
(See P.8)
[3] [2]
2. Remove the two springs [1].
NOTE
• When reinstalling the spring, put it
through the hole [2] with the end [3]
faced out side.
3. Remove four screws [4] and then
remove the Upper Plate [5].
[1]
[4]
[5]
[4] a0phf2c008ca
[7]
[6]
a0phf2c009ca
18
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. OTHER
SD-507
[9]
4511f2c046nb
NOTE
[13] [16] [14] [17]
• Install the Folding Blade Assy in the
direction shown in the left figure.
[11] Front
[12] Rear
• Be sure to rotate the Crank Arm [13]
one turn in counter clockwise [15] ( as
seen from the front of device ) from the
position that the spring [14] doesn't
work (the spring hangs down vertical),
and then install the Folding Blade
Assy in the position that the spring
can hook the Stopper [16].
• Be sure to install the edge [17] of
Blade Support comes outside of the
metal plate [18].
[15] [18]
[12] [11]
a0phf2c010ca
19
3. OTHER Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
[23] [19]
a0phf2c011ca
20
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. OTHER
SD-507
• Install the gear [25] so that the marks
[26] of gear are aligned to the position
shown in the left figure.
9. Remove two C-rings [27] and then
remove the two gears [28].
NOTE
• Install the gears [28] so that the mark
[29] of Folding Roller /Rt comes half
tooth above the mark [30] of Folding
Roller /Lt.
[26]
[27]
21
3. OTHER Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
22
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. OTHER
SD-507
• Install the bearing [38] so that the last
tooth [39] of Guide Plate Gear /LtRr
comes half tooth above the last tooth
[40] of Guide Plate Gear /RtRr.
[39] [40]
a0phf2c014ca
23
3. OTHER Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
NOTE
• Install the Lower Guide Plate /Rt [43]
so that the claw [45] of Guide Plate
Gear make sure to put into the hole
[44].
13. Remove the C-ring [46] and the bearing
[46] [47] [43] [47].
NOTE
• Install the bearing [47] so that the
marks [48] are aligned.
24
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. OTHER
[49] [50] [51] 14. Remove the C-ring [49], and remove the
Crank Plate [50] and the bearing [51].
SD-507
NOTE
• When reinstalling it, insert the Crank
Shaft [52] into the recess [53] of Guide
Gear Plate. And, be sure not to insert
the Cam pin [54] into the Cam [55].
[52] [53]
[55] [54]
a0phf2c016ca
25
3. OTHER Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
26
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. OTHER
SD-507
appearance is identical for the Guide
Plate Gear /LtFr [83], /RtRr [84] and
/RtFr [85]. However, the mark [86] is
provided on the Guide Plate Gear /RtFr
[85]. Install claw in facing.
a0phf2c021ca
27
3. OTHER Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
SD-507
Blank Page
28
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 4. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
ADJUSTMENT/SETTING
4. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
SD-507
4.1 Fold Skew Adjustment
NOTE
Make this adjustment after any of the following procedures has been performed.
• When the Folding Unit has been replaced.
• When skew occurs in the crease.
4511f3c002na
29
4. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
Make this adjustment after any of the following procedures has been performed.
• When Staple Unit 1 or 2 has been replaced.
• When skew occurs in the position of the center staple.
[2]
4511f3c004na
30
SERVICE MANUAL Field Service
MT-502
( 501/421/361 (
2008.05
Ver. 1.0
Revision history
After publication of this service manual, the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for
improvement of their performance.
Therefore, the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine.
When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual, a revised version will be
issued with a revision mark added as required.
Revision mark:
• To indicate clearly a section revised, 1 is shown at the left margin of the revised section.
The number inside 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made.
• To indicate clearly a page that contains the revision, 1 is shown near the page number of the
corresponding page.
The number inside 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made.
NOTE
Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 3.0 only are shown with those for Ver. 2.0 deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has not been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 2.0 are left as they are.
CONTENTS
MT-502
MT-502
OUTLINE
1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS ................................................................................1
MAINTENANCE
2. PERIODIC CHECK..................................................................................................3
2.1 Maintenance procedure ........................................................................................3
2.1.1 Cleaning of the Roller....................................................................................3
3. OTHER ....................................................................................................................4
3.1 Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items ............................................................4
3.2 Disassembling and assembling list .......................................................................5
3.3 Disassembling and assembling procedure ...........................................................5
3.3.1 Rear Cover/Right Door ..................................................................................5
3.3.2 Front Cover/Upper Cover/Paper Output Tray.................................................5
i
CONTENTS Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
MT-502
Blank Page
ii
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
OUTLINE
1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
MT-502
A. Type
B. Maintenance
C. Machine specifications
D. Operating environment
NOTE
• The information herein may be subject to change for improvement without notice.
1
1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
MT-502
Blank Page
2
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 2. PERIODIC CHECK
MAINTENANCE
2. PERIODIC CHECK
MT-502
2.1 Maintenance procedure
NOTE
• The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure of Maintenance represents the iso-
propyl alcohol.
*1 501/421
*2 361
B. Procedure
1. Open the Right Door.
[1]
2. Using a soft cloth dampened with alco-
hol, wipe the rollers [1].
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
4510f2c001na
3
3. OTHER Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
3. OTHER
3.1 Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items
MT-502
B. Red-painted screws
• Do not remove or loosen any of the red-painted screws in the field. It should also be
noted that, when two or more screws are used for a single part, only one representa-
tive screw may be marked with the red paint.
NOTE
• Do not turn the variable resistors on boards for which no adjusting instructions are
given in ADJUSTMENT/SETTING.
D. Removal of Boards
NOTE
• When removing a circuit board or other electrical component, refer to “SAFETY AND
IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS” and follow the corresponding removal procedures.
• The removal procedures given in the following omit the removal of connectors and
screws securing the circuit board support or circuit board.
• When it is absolutely necessary to touch the ICs and other electrical components on
the board, be sure to ground your body.
4
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 3. OTHER
MT-502
No. Section Part name Ref. page
1 Rear Cover P.5
2 Front Cover P.5
Cover
3 Upper Cover P.5
4 Right Door P.5
5 Paper Output Tray Paper Output Tray P.5
[3] [2]
1. Remove the screw [1] and remove the
Front Cover [2].
2. Remove the Rear Cover.
(See P.5)
3. Remove the Upper Cover [3].
4. Remove the Paper Output Trays [4].
5. Reinstall the above parts following the
removal steps in reverse.
5
3. OTHER Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
MT-502
Blank Page
6
SERVICE MANUAL Field Service
JS-502
( 501/421/361 (
2008.05
Ver. 1.0
Revision history
After publication of this service manual, the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for
improvement of their performance.
Therefore, the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine.
When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual, a revised version will be
issued with a revision mark added as required.
Revision mark:
• To indicate clearly a section revised, 1 is shown at the left margin of the revised section.
The number inside 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made.
• To indicate clearly a page that contains the revision, 1 is shown near the page number of the
corresponding page.
The number inside 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made.
NOTE
Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 3.0 only are shown with those for Ver. 2.0 deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has not been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 2.0 are left as they are.
CONTENTS
JS-502
JS-502
OUTLINE
1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS ................................................................................1
MAINTENANCE
2. OTHER ....................................................................................................................3
2.1 Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items ............................................................3
2.2 Disassembling and assembling list .......................................................................4
2.3 Disassembling and assembling procedure ...........................................................4
2.3.1 Upper Cover ..................................................................................................4
i
CONTENTS Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
JS-502
Blank Page
ii
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
OUTLINE
1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
JS-502
A. Type
B. Paper type
C. Maintenance
Maintenance None
D. Machine specifications
E. Operating environment
NOTE
• The information herein may be subject to change for improvement without notice.
1
1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
JS-502
Blank Page
2
Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008 2. OTHER
MAINTENANCE
2. OTHER
JS-502
2.1 Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items
A. Screws to which blue paint or green paint is applied
• Blue paint or green paint is applied to some screws to prevent them from coming
loose.
• As a general rule, screws to which blue paint or green paint is applied should not be
removed or loosened.
B. Red-painted screws
• Do not remove or loosen any of the red-painted screws in the field. It should also be
noted that, when two or more screws are used for a single part, only one representa-
tive screw may be marked with the red paint.
NOTE
• Do not turn the variable resistors on boards for which no adjusting instructions are
given in ADJUSTMENT/SETTING.
D. Removal of Boards
Caution
• When removing a circuit board or other electrical component, refer to “SAFETY AND
IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS” and follow the corresponding removal procedures.
• The removal procedures given in the following omit the removal of connectors and
screws securing the circuit board support or circuit board.
• When it is absolutely necessary to touch the ICs and other electrical components on
the board, be sure to ground your body.
3
2. OTHER Field Service Ver.1.0 May. 2008
[1]
[2]
4347f2c001na
1. Remove two screws [1], and remove the Upper Cover [2].
4
SERVICE MANUAL Field Service
IC-207
2008.05
Ver. 1.0
Revision history
After publication of this service manual, the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for improve-
ment of their performance.
Therefore, the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine.
When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual, a revised version will be
issued with a revision mark added as required.
Revision mark:
• To indicate clearly a section revised, 1 is shown at the left margin of the revised section.
The number inside 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made.
• To indicate clearly a page that contains the revision, 1 is shown near the page number of the
corresponding page.
The number inside 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made.
NOTE
Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 3.0 only are shown with those for Ver. 2.0 deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has not been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 2.0 are left as they are.
CONTENTS
IC-207
IC-207
OUTLINE
1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
MAINTENANCE
2. FIRMWARE VERSION UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
3. DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
3.1 Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
3.2 Removal / Installation of Printer key control board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
ADJUSTMENT / SETTING
4. SERVICE MODE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
5. Starting and Finishing the Service Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
TROUBLESHOOTING
6. TROUBLESHOOTING THE PRINTING SYSTEM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
6.1 Troubleshooting of the print controller and copier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
7. Data Capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
i
CONTENTS Field Service Ver1.0 May.2008
IC-207
Blank Page
ii
Field Service Ver1.0 May.2008 1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
OUTLINE
IC-207
1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
A. Type
B. Functions
1
1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS Field Service Ver1.0 May.2008
Fax Driver
• Windows NT4.0 (SP6a)
• Windows 2000 Professional (SP3 or later) /Server
• Windows XP Home Edition/Professional (SP2 or later)
• Windows Server 2003 Standard
• Windows Vista (All versions)
C. Paper
2
Field Service Ver1.0 May.2008 1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
E. Machine Data
IC-207
Host Interface Ethernet, USB (Optional)
Hard Disk Drive Same as copier
Power Same as copier
Network Function
Network Interface Ethernet
Frame Type Auto/IEEE 802.2/802.3/Ethernet II/IEEE802.3 SNMP
Ethernet Connection 1000Base-T/100Base-TX/10Base-T
Network Connector RJ-45
F. Operating Environment
3
1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS Field Service Ver1.0 May.2008
IC-207
Blank Page
4
Field Service Ver1.0 May.2008 2. FIRMWARE VERSION UP
MAINTENANCE
IC-207
2. FIRMWARE VERSION UP
Firmware for IC-207 is contained in the copier firmware (MFP Controller).
With the updating of MFP controller version, the version of the IC-207 firmware is also updated.
5
3. DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY Field Service Ver1.0 May.2008
3. DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY
IC-207
Caution
• Assembly should be made in reverse order of disassembly unless otherwise noted.
Caution
• Be sure to unplug the power cable, not only to turn the copier off, before attempting to make ser-
vicing.
Caution
• Before engaging in Disassembly/Reassembly, check to make sure that all the cables are
unplugged from the copier.
• There may be occasions when boards are damaged if no appropriate grounding measures are
taken. Wear a wrist strap or others during servicing.
• Disassembly/Reassembly should be made on cushioning materials.
6
Field Service Ver1.0 May.2008 3. DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY
IC-207
the main body, and unplug the power cord from
the outlet.
2. Remove the back cover (6 screws).
Back cover
A0PAIXE002CA
7
3. DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY Field Service Ver1.0 May.2008
IC-207
Blank Page
8
Field Service Ver1.0 May.2008 4. SERVICE MODE
ADJUSTMENT / SETTING
IC-207
4. SERVICE MODE
In the service mode, various adjustments / settings are available.
See “10. SERVICE MODE” in Field Service for the main body.
9
5. Starting and Finishing the Service Mode Field Service Ver1.0 May.2008
IC-207
Blank Page
10
Field Service Ver1.0 May.2008 6. TROUBLESHOOTING THE PRINTING SYSTEM
TROUBLESHOOTING
IC-207
6. TROUBLESHOOTING THE PRINTING SYSTEM
This table lists information about the symptoms, possible causes, and remedies for problems that may occur
with the printing system (combination of the print controller and copier). It is intended to help engineers find
information as quickly as possible, and provide basic solutions.
Caution
• See the “Copier Service Manual” for information about Error Cord List.
11
7. Data Capture Field Service Ver1.0 May.2008
7. Data Capture
If any fault is caused in relation with the printer, acquire the print job data for the fault analysis.
IC-207
Capture data of up to 5 jobs can be saved. When new data is saved, oldest one is deleted.
Caution
To enable this function, following conditions should be met.
• Hard disk should have been installed in the main body printer (copier).
• [Administrator Settings] - [Security Settings] - [Security Details] - [Print Data Capture] should be
set to [Allow].
• [Administrator Settings] - [Network Settings] - [FTP Settings] - [FTP Server Settings] should be set
to [ON].
12
Field Service Ver1.0 May.2008 7. Data Capture
IC-207
8. Set the file transfer mode to binary transfer with
the [binary] command.
13
7. Data Capture Field Service Ver1.0 May.2008
IC-207
Blank Page
14
© 2008 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
Printed in Japan
Use of this manual should be strictly supervised to avoid
CCA0R5-M-FE1-900
disclosure of confidential information.